Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
1923 CALLE BARCELONA; 138; CBC2022-0348; Permit
Permit No: CBC2022-0348 Status: Closed - Finaled Applied: 09/21/2022 Issued: 12/01/2022 Finaled Close Out: 10/24/2023 Final Inspection: 10/05/2023 INSPECTOR: Kersch, Tim Building Permit Finaled Commercial Permit Print Date: 10/24/2023 Job Address: 1923 CALLE BARCELONA, # 138, Permit Type: BLDG-Commercial Parcel #: 2550120400 Valuation: $335,925.92 Occupancy Group: #of Dwelling Units: Bedrooms: Bathrooms: Occupant Load: Code Edition: Sprinkled: CARLSBAD, CA 92009-8457 Work Class: Tenant Improvement Track #: Lot #: Project #: Plan #: Construction Type: Orig. Plan Check #: Plan Check #: Project Title: Description: APPLE INC: REMODEL EXISTING TENANT SPACE BACKSTAGE (5828 SF) Applicant: Property Owner: GLASSMAN PLANNING ASSOCIATES TREA N W FORUM AT CARLSBAD OWNER LLC MICHELLE SLAYDEN 695 TOWN CENTER DR, # 17 1111 SARTORI AVE COSTA MESA, CA 92626-1924 TORRANCE, CA 90501-2226 Contractor: SHAWMUT WOODWORKING AND SUPPLY INC 560 HARRISON AVE BOSTON, MA 02118-2436 (617) 622-7000 FEE AMOUNT BUILDING PLAN CHECK $1,110.17 BUILDING PLAN REVIEW - MINOR PROJECTS (LDE) $194.00 BUILDING PLAN REVIEW - MINOR PROJECTS (PLN) $98.00 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY $16.00 COMM/IND TI - NON-STRUCTURAL $1,707.96 5B1473 -GREEN BUILDING STATE STANDARDS FEE $14.00 STRONG MOTION—COMMERCIAL (SMIP) - $94.06 Total Fees: $3,234.19 Total Payments To Date: $3,234.19 Balance Due: $0.00 Please take NOTICE that approval of your project includes the 'Imposition' of fees, dedications, reservations, o other exactions hereafter collectively referred to as 'fees/exaction." You have 90 days from the date this permit was issued to protest imposition of these fees/exactions. If you protest them, you must follow the protest procedures set forth in Government Code Section 66020(a), and file the protest and any oth•e required information with the City Manager for processing in accordance with Carlsbad Municipal Code Section 3.32.030. Failure to timely follow that procedure will bar any subsequent legal action to attack, review, set aside, void, or annul their imposition. You are hereby FURTHER NOTIFIED that your right to protest the specified fees/exactions DOES NOT APPLY to water and sewer connection fees and capacity changes, nor planning, zoning, grading or other similar application processing or service fees in connection with this project. NOR DOES IT APPLY to any fees/exactions of which you have previously been given a NOTICE similar to this, or as to which the statute of limitation has previously otherwise expired. Building Division Page 1 of 1 1635 Faraday Averue, Carlsbad CA 92008-7314 1 442-339-2719 1 760-602-8560 f I www.carlsbadca.gov COMMERCIAL Plan Check _____________ City of BUILDING PERMIT Est. Value 275 35 q Carlsbad APPLICATION pc Depositll 9ll0 7 B-2 Date Job Address 1923 Calle Barcelona Suite:_138,128 APN: 2550120400 Tenant Name #: Apple Inc Lot #: Year Built: Year Built: 2008 Occupancy:M Construction Type: VB Fire sprinklers:YESONO A/C:NO BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Remodel of existing tenant backstage - non-structural partitions, ceilings, finishes, furniture, and related HVAC, Electrical and Plumbing work. TI build out of new remote backstage, including non-structural partitions, ceilings, finishes, furniture and related HVAC, Electrical and Plumbing. Addition/New: New SF and Use, New SF and Use SF Deck, SF Patio Cover, SF Other (Specify)___________ Ulenant Improvement: SF, Existing Use: Prposed Use: 5,828 SF, Existing Use: Mercantile Proposed Use: Mercantile L Other: PRIMARY APPLICANT PROPERTY OWNER Name: Northwood Retail, contact: Roberto Ruiz Address: 1905 Calle Barcelona, Ste 200 City: _Carlsbad State: CA Zip:_92009 Phone: 760-4790166 Email: RRuiz@northwoodretail.com CONTRACTOR OF RECORD Business Name: TBD '-)bkW tAL)z P 4 Address: D H64(2'C)tJ k/- City: - 905-(0,sJ Sta1e:l4c Zip:_02-(tS Phone: ()7 (oZZ- 7000 Email: CSLB License #:7g73 03 Class: Carlsbad Business Li.çnse U (Required): ik -r_ u/l.a1 ic' Name: Michelle Slayden Address: 1111 Sartori Ave. City: Torrance State:CA Zip: 9050' Phone: 310•781 8250 X3 Email: michellegpan.com DESIGN PROFESSIONAL Name: MBH Architects Address: 960 Atlaitic Ave City:Alameda State: CA Zip: _94501 Phone: 510-865-8663 Email: ellysec@mbharch.com Architect State License: C24274 APPLICANT CERTIFICATION: I certify that/ have read the application andstate that the above information is correct and that the information on the plans is accurate./ agree to comply with all City ordinances and State laws relating to building construction. SIGN: '7?It_cL2Yu11DATE: 09/19/2022 Michelle Slayden _____________________ NAME (PRINT): 1635 Faraday Ave Carlsbad, CA 92008 Ph: 442-339-2719 V Email: BuildingtcarIsbacjca.gov REV. 04/22 NAME (PRINT): Note: If the person sigi above is an authorized SIGN: DATE:_____________ for the property owner include form B-62 signed by property owner. THIS PAGE REQUIRED AT PERMIT ISSUANCE PLAN CHECK NUMBER: A BUILDING PERMIT CAN BE ISSUED TO EITHER A STATE LICENSED CONTRACTOR OR A PROPERTY OWNER. IF THE PERSON SIGNING THIS FORM IS AN AGENT FOR EITHER ENTITY AN AUTHORIZATION FORM OR LETTER IS REQUIRED PRIOR TO PERMIT ISSUANCE. (OPTION A):LICENSED CONTRACTOR DECLARATION: Iherebyaffirm under pena(tyof perjury that /am licensed underprovisions of Chapter 9 (commencing with Section 7000) ofDivision3 of the Business and Professions Code, and my license is in fu( (force and effect. /also affirm under penalty of perjury one of the following declarations (CHOOSE ONE): I have and will maintain a certificate of consent to self-insure for workers' compensation provided by Section 3700 of the Labor Code, for the performance of the work which this permit is issued. PolicyNo. -OR- I have and will maintain worker's compensation, as required by Section 3700 of the Labor Code, forth performance of the work for which this permit is issued. My workers' compensation iisurance carrier and policy number are: Insurance Company Name: (0I3c'(Z 0 C—i-( 0k) Rc eç Policy No. \jg'- (o •4gL::,() ii- 72_ — 2-5- H Expiration Date: I) — I — -OR- Certificate of Exemption: I certify that in the performance of the work for which this permit is issued, I shall not employ any person in any manner so as to become subject to the workers' compensation Laws of California. WARNING: Failure to secure workers compensation coverage is unlawful and shall subject an employer to criminal penalties and civil fines up to $100,000.00, in addition the to the cost of compensation, damages as provided for in Section 3706 of the Labor Code, interest and attorney's fees. CONSTRUCTION LENDING AGENCY, IF ANY: I hereby affirm that there is a construction lending agency for the performance of the work this permit, is issued (Sec. 3097 (i) Civil Code). Lender's Name: Lender's Address: CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION: The applicant certifies that all documents and plans clearly and accurately show all existing and proposed buildings, structures, access roads, and utilities/utility easements. All proposed modifications and/or additions are clearly labeled on the site plan. Any potentially existing detail within these plans inconsistent with the site plan are not approved for construction and may be required to be altered or removed. The city's approval of the application is based on the premise that the submitted documents and plans show the correct, dimensions of; the property, buildings, structures and their setbacks from property lines and from one another; access roads/easements, and utilities. The existing and proposed use of each building as stated is true and correct; oil easements and other encumbrances to development hove been accurately shown and labeled as well as all on-site grading/site preparation. All improvements existing on the property were completed in accordance with all regulations in existence at the timqon~str tion, unless othe iso noted. qXV0 NAME(PRINT): SIGNATU 47DATE:12 (2 Note: If the person signing above is an authorized agent for the contractor pro r of authorization on contractor letterhead. (OPTION B): OWNER-BUILDER DECLARATION: / hereby affirm that I am exempt from Contractor's License Law for the following reason: 1, as owner of the property or my employees with wages as their sole compensation, will do the work and the structure is not intended or offered for sale (Sec. 7044, Business and Professions Code: The Contractor's License Law does not apply to an owner of property who builds or improves thereon, and who does such work himself or through his own employees, provided that such improvements are not intended or offered for sale. If, however, the building or improvement is sold within one year of completion, the owner-builder will have the burden of proving that he did not build or improve for the purpose of sale). -OR- I, as owner of the property, am exclusively contracting with licensed contractors to construct the project (Sec. 7044, Business and Professions Code: The Contractor's License Law does not apply to an owner of property who builds or improves thereon, and contracts for such projects with contractor(s) licensed pursuant to the Contractor's License Law). -OR- I am exempt under Business and Professions Code Division 3, Chapter 9, Article 3 for this reason: AND, FORM B-61 "Owner Builder Acknowledgement and Verification Form" is required for any permit issued to a property owner. By my signature below I acknowledge that, except for my personal residence in which I must have resided for at least one year prior to completion of the improvements covered by this permit, I cannot legally sell a structure that I have built as an owner-builder if it has not been constructed in its entirety by licensed contractors.! understand that a copy of the applicable law, Section 7044 of the Business andProfessions code, is available upon request when this application is submitted or at the following Web site: http:IIwww. leginfo.co.gov/calaw.html. OWNER CERTIFICATION: The applicant certifies that all documents and plans clearly and accurately show all existing and proposed buildings, structures, access roads, and utilities/utility easements. All proposed modifications and/or additions are clearly labeled on the site plan. Any potentially existing detail within these plans inconsistent with the site plan are not approved for construction and may be required to be altered or removed. The city's approval of the application is based on the premise that the submitted documents and plans show the correct dimensions of; the property, buildings, structures and their setbacks from property lines and from one another; access roads/easements, and utilities. The existing and proposed use of each building as stated is true and correct; all easements and other encumbrances to development have been accurately shown and labeled as well as all on-site grading/site preparation. All improvements existing on the property were completed in accordance with all regulations in existence at the time of their construction, unless otherwise noted. 1635 Faraday Ave Carlsbad, CA 92008 Ph: 442-339-2719 Email: BuiIdingcarlsbadca.ov 2 REV. 04/22 Permit Type: BLDG-Commercial Application Date: 09/21/2022 Owner: TREA N W FORUM AT CARLSBAD OWNER LLC Work Class: Tenant Improvement Issue Date: 12/01/2022 Subdivision: CARLSBAD TCT#92-08 GREEN VALLEY Status: Closed - Finaled Expiration Date: 03/25/2024 Address: 1923 CALLE BARCELONA, # 138 CARLSBAD, CA 92009-8457 IVR Number: 43441 Scheduled Actual Inspection Type Inspection No. Inspection Primary Inspector Reinspection Inspection Date Start Date Status NOTES Created By TEXT Created Date Angie Teanio 617-719-3438 Mike 03/10/2023 Angie Teanio 617-719-3438 Mike 03/13/2023 10/05/2023 10/05/2023 BLDG-Final Inspection 226091-2023 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes BLDG-Plumbing Fnal T C 0 phase one. Notes left on card. AC Yes unit on back order. BLDG-Mechanical Final Yes BLDG-Structural Final Yes BLDG-Electrical F nal Yes Tuesday, October 24, 2023 Page 5 of 5 Permit Type: BLDG-Commercial Application Date: 09/21/2022 Owner: TREA N W FORUM AT CARLSBAD OWNER LLC Work Class: Tenant Fmprovement Issue Date: 12/01/2022 Subdivision: CARLSBAD TCT#92-08 GREEN VALLEY Status: Closed - Finaled Expiration Date: 03/25/2024 Address: 1923 CALLE BARCELONA, # 138 IVR Number: 43441 CARLSBAD CA 92009-8457 Scheduled Actual Inspection Type Inspection No. Inspection Primary Inspector Reinspection Inspection Date Start Date Status - - BLDG-85 T-Bar, Ceilig 205431-2023 Partial Pass Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete Grids, Overhead Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Hard lid drywall. Yes BLDG-14 No Frame-Steel-Bolting-welding (Decks) BLDG-24 Rough-Topout No BLDG-34 Rough Electrical No BLDG-44 No Rough-Ducts-Dampers NOTES Created By TEXT Created Date Angie Teanio 617-719-3438 Mike 03/10/2023 Angie Teanio 617-719-3438 Mike 03/13/2023 0813112023 08/3112023 BLDG-34 Rough 222570-2023 Partial Pass Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete Electrical Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Underground plumbing with main sewer tie Yes in. 09/05/2023 09/05I2023 BLDG-34 Rough 222823-2023 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Electrical Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Underground plumbing with main sewer tie Yes in. 09/13/2023 09/13/2023 BLDG-44 223732-2023 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Rough/Ducts/Dampers - Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes 09/27/2023 09/27/2023 BLDG-85 T-Bar, Ceiling 225204-2023 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Grids, Overhead Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Hard lid drywall. Yes BLDG-14 Yes Frame-Steel-Bolting-welding (Decks) BLDG-24 Rough-Topout Yes BLDG-34 Rough Electrical Yes BLDG-44 Yes Rough-Ducts-Dampers Tuesday, October 24, 2023 Page 4 of 5 R__NjMjEJjR0ffl37-HL1SjTjf Permit Type: BLDG-Commercial Application Date: 09/21/2022 Owner: TREA N W FORUM AT CARLSBAD OWNER LLC Work Class: Tenant Improvement Issue Date: 12/01/2022 Subdivision: CARLSBAD TCT#92-08 GREEN VALLEY Status: Closed - Finaled Expiration Date: 03/25/2024 Address: 1923 CALLE BARCELONA, # 138 IVR Number: 43441 CARLSBAD CA 92009-8457 Scheduled Actual Inspection Type Inspection No. Inspection Primary Inspector Reinspection Inspection Date Start Date Status NOTES Created By TEXT Created Date Seta Levanduski CESAR 213-238-4848 - PLEASE CONTACT 02/06/2023 CESAR AN HOUR BEFORE ARRIVAL. ENTR' AT BOH APPLE STORE Angie Teanio 213-215-4745 Shaun 02/08/2023 02/22/2023 02/2212023 BLDG-84 Rough 203930-2023 Partial Pass Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete Cornbo(14,24,34,44) Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes BLDG-14 Yes Frame-Steel-Bolting-welding (Decks) BLDG-24 Rough-Topout Phase 3 combo No BLDG-34 Rough Electrical No BLDG-44 Yes Rough-Ducts-Dampers NOTES Created By TEXT Created Date Angie Teanio 617-719-3438 Michael 02/21/2023 02/24/2023 02/24/2023 BLDG-17 Interior 204028-2023 Partial Pass Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete - Lath/Drywall Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes NOTES Created By TEXT Created Date Angie Teanio 617-719-3438 Mike //VIP 02/22/2023 03/1312023 03/13/2023 BLDG-85 T-Bar, Ceiling 205308-2023 Failed Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete Grids, Overhead Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Hard lid drywall. Yes BLDG-14 No Frame-Steel-Bolting-welding (Decks) BLDG-24 Rough-Topout No BLDG-34 Rough Electrical No BLDG-44 No Rough-Ducts-Dampers NOTES Created By TEXT Created Date Angie Teanio - 617-719-3438 Mike 03/10/2023 03/14/2023 03/14/2023 Tuesday, October 24, 2023 Page 3 of 5 I flfYTLR T111 [TF) Cm- Permit Type: BLDG-Commercial Application Date: 09/21/2022 Owner: TREA N W FORUM AT CARLSBAD OWNER LLC Work Class: Tenant Improvement Issue Date: 12/01/2022 Subdivision: CARLSBAD TCT#92-08 GREEN VALLEY Status: Closed - Finaled Expiration Date: 03/25/2024 Address: 1923 CALLE BARCELONA, # 138 IVR Number: 43441 CARLSBAD, CA 92009-8457 Scheduled Actual Inspection Type Inspection No. Inspection Date Start Date Status Primay Inspector Reinspection Inspection 12/30/2022 12/30/2022 BLDG-84 Rough 199964-2022 Partial Pass Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete - Combo(14,24,34,44) Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes BLDG-14 Yes Frame-Steel-Boltirg-Welding (Decks) BLDG-24 Rough-Topout No BLDG-34 Rough Electrical No BLDG-44 Yes Rough-Ducts-Dampers 0110312023 01/03/2023 BLDG-85 T-Bar, Ceiling 200014-2022 Partial Pass Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete - Grids, Overhead Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Hard lid drywall. Yes BLDG-14 No Frame-Steel-Bolting-Welding (Decks) BLDG-24 Rough-Topout No BLDG-34 Rough Electrical No BLDG-44 No Rough-Ducts-Danpers 01/20/2023 01/20I223 BLDG-Final Inspection 201139-2023 Partial Pass Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency No BLDG-Plumbing Final T C 0 phase one. Notes left on card. A C Yes unit on back order. BLDG-Mechanical Final Yes BLDG-Structural Final No BLDG-Electrical Final Yes 02/08/2023 02/08/2023 BLDG-24 Rough/Topout 202399-2023 Cancelled Tim Kersch Rèinspection Incomplete Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency No NOTES Created By TEXT Created Date Seta Levanduski CESAR 213-238-4848 - PLEASE CONTACT 02/06/2023 CESAR AN HOUR BEFORE ARRIVAL. ENTR' AT BOH APPLE STORE 02/09/2023 02/09/2023 BLDG 24 Rough/Tcpout 202914-2023 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes Tuesday, October 24, 2023 Page 2 of 5 Building Permit Inspection History Finaled (City Of Carlsbad Permit Type: BLDG-Commercial Application Date: 09/21/2022 Owner: TREA N W FORUM AT CARLSBAD OWNER LLC Work Class: Tenant Improvement Issue Date: 12/01/2022 Subdivision: CARLSBAD TCT#92-08 GREEN VALLEY Status: Closed - Finaled Expiration Date: 03/25/2024 Address: 1923 CALLE BARCELONA, # 138 IVR Number: 43441 CARLSBAD CA 92009-8457 Scheduled Actual Inspection Type Inspection No. Inspection Primary Inspector Reinspection Inspection Date Start Date Status 12/02/2022 1210212022 BLDG-21 197866-2022 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Underground/U nderflo or Plumbing Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes BLDG-34 Rough 197865-2022 Partial Pass Tim Kersch Reinspection Incomplete Electrical Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Underground plumbing with main sewer tie Yes in. 12/0512022 12/05/2022 BLDG-84 Rough 197970-2022 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Corn bo(14,24,34,44) Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes BLDG-14 Yes Frame-Steel-Bolting-welding (Decks) BLDG-24 Rough-Topout Yes BLDG-34 Rough Electrical Yes BLDG-44 Yes Rough-Ducts-Dampers 12/0612022 12/0612022 BLDG-11 198081-2022 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Foundation/Ftg/Piers (Rebar) Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes BLDG-12 Steel/Bond 198082-2022 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Beam Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes 12/08/2022 12/08/2022 BLDG-17 Interior 198405-2022 Passed Tim Kersch Complete Lath/Drywall Checklist Item COMMENTS Passed BLDG-Building Deficiency Yes Tuesday, October 24, 2023 Page 1 of 5 Mark Kaiser S.E. Professional Engineer STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS FOR Apple Carlsbad Project No.: 2215.319 Completion Date: Revisions: (~O' Xp1, F A R& R ~&n 05 AP Engineer of Record: Mark Kaiser SE Project Manager: Courtney Overton Project Engineer: Courtney Overton Project Technician: Courtney Overton 12001 N. CENTRAL EXPRESSWAY, SUITE 300 DALLAS, TEXAS 75243 214/739-8100 C0Cw.011czC0) 11/11/22, 10:58 AM ATC Hazards by Location I A This is a beta release of the new ATC Hazards by Location website. Please contact us with feedback. 0 The ATC Hazards by Location website will not be updated to support ASCE 7-22. Find out why_ ccrc Hazards by Location Search Information Address: f Carlsbad, CA, USA Coordinates: - 33.1580933, -117.3505939 Elevation: 55 ft Timestamp: 2022-11-11T16:58:41 .000Z Hazard Type: Wind ';-- . .. Ten4écula, - CeqeIad AnzaBot i. NationalForest - Desei - S1ä'teP data ©2022 Google, lNEGl ASCE 7-16 MRI 10-Year ------------------------67 mph MRI 25-Year ------------72 mph MRI 50-Year ------------------------77 mph MRI 100-Year - --------------------82 mph Risk Category I -----------------. 89 mph Risk Category II ---------------------96 mph Risk Category III ---------------------102 mph ASCE 7-10 MRI 10-Year ------------------72 mph MRI 25-Year - 79 mph MRI 50-Year -----------------85 mph MRI 100-Year ------------------91 mph Risk Category I ----------100 mph Risk Category II ----------110 mph Risk Category III-IV . ----------115 mph ASCE 7-05 ASCE 7-05 Wind Speed ----------85 mph Risk Category IV ..................107 mph The results indicated here DO NOT reflect any state or local amendments to the values or any delineation lines made during the building code adoption process. Users should confirm any output obtained from this tool with the local Authority Having Jurisdiction before proceeding with design. Please note that the ATC Hazards by Location website will not be updated to support ASCE 7-22. Find out why. Disclaimer Hazard loads are interpolated from data provided in ASCE 7 and rounded up to the nearest whole integer. Per ASCE 7, islands and coastal areas outside the last contour should use the last wind speed contour of the coastal area - in some cases, this website will extrapolate past the last wind speed contour and therefore, provide a wind speed that is slightly higher. NOTE: For queries near wind-borne debris region boundaries, the resulting determination is sensitive to rounding which may affect whether or not it is considered to be within a wind-borne debris region. Mountainous terrain, gorges, ocean promontories, and special wind regions shall be examined for unusual wind conditions. While the information presented on this website is believed to be correct, ATC and its sponsors and contributors assume no responsibility or liability for its accuracy. The material presented in the report should not be used or relied upon for any specific application without competent examination and verification of its accuracy, suitability and applicability by engineers or other licensed professionals. ATC does not intend that the use of this information replace the sound judgment of such competent professionals, having experience and knowledge in the field of practice, nor to substitute for the standard of care required of such professionals in interpreting and applying the results of the report provided by this website. Users of the information from this website assume all liability arising from such use. Use of the output of this website does not imply approval by the governing building code bodies responsible for building code approval and interpretation for the building site described by latitude/longitude location in the report. https://hazards.atcouncil.org/#/wind?lat=33. 1580933&lng=-117.3505939&address=Carlsbad%2C CA%2C USA 1/1 11/11/22,11:O0 AM ATC Hazards by Location 2 A This is a beta release of the new ATC Hazards by Location website. Please contact us with feedback. 0 The ATC Hazards by Location website will not be updated to support ASCE 7-22. Find out why.. CTC Hazards by Location Search Information Address: Carlsbad, CA, USA Coordinates: 33.1580933, -117.3505939 Elevation: 55 ft Timestamp: 2022-11-11 TI 7:00:03.395Z Hazard Type: Snow Temecula - - - . 0 - - EetI c,de , \ _) Cleveland,.Ariza-Bol ;"NationalEorest - Dese' . .. -" State P (c3o1j* . ASCE 7 -16 Ground Snow Load .... ......... A 0 lb/sqft The reported ground snow load applies at the query location of 55 feet up to a maximum elevation of 1800 feet. ASCE 7-10 Ground Snow Load - - - A 0 lb/sqft The reported ground snow load applies at the query location of 55 feet up to a maximum elevation of 1800 feet. ASCE 7-05 Ground Snow Load ------ ---- -A 0 lb/sqft The reported ground snow load applies at the query location of 55 feet up to a maximum elevation of 1800 feet. The results indicateo here DO NOT reflect any state or local amendments to the values or any delineation lines made during the building code adoption process. Users shou'd confirm any output obtained from this tool with the local Authority Having Jurisdiction before proceeding with design. Please note that the ATC Hazards by Location website will not be updated to support ASCE 7-22. Find out why. Disclaimer Hazard loads are interpolated from data provided in ASCE 7 and rounded up to the nearest whole integer While the information presented on this website is believed to be correct, ATC and its sponsors and contributors assume no responsibility or liability for its accuracy. The material presented in the report should not be used or relied upon for any specific application without competent examination and verification of its accuracy, suitability and applicability by engineers or other licensed professionals. ATC does not intend that the use of this information replace the sound judgment of such competent professionals, having experience and knowledge in the field of practice, nor to substitute for the standard of care required of sich professionals in interpreting and applying the results of the report provided by this website. Users of the information from this website assume all liability arising from such use. Use of the output of this website does not imply approval by the governing building code bodies responsible for building code approval and interpretation for the building site described by latitude/longitude location in the report. https:lmazards.atcouncil.org/#/snow?lat=33.1580933&lng=-117.3505939&address=Carlsbad%2C CA%2C USA 1/1 CtTC Hazards by Location Address: Carlsbad, CA, USA Coordinates: 33.1580933, -117.3505939 Elevation: 55 ft Timestamp: 2022-11-11 Ti 7:00:17.545Z Hazard Type: Seismic Reference ASCE7-1 6 Document: Risk Category: II Site Class: D-default Search Information 'j .- - ,.. -'•••• Temecula -' .-f \5ft. I .OceWde JI Cleveland,- AnzBor \ "NationaIoresL -. Dese StateP - I -,,..----zu SanhDleno --- .0'Map data ©2022 Google, INEGI 11/11/22, 11:00 AM ATC Hazards by Location 3 A This is a beta release of the new ATC Hazards by Location website. Please contact us with feedback. 0 The ATC Hazards by Location website will not be updated to support ASCE 7-22. Find out why.. Basic Parameters Name Value Description SS 1.092 MCER ground motion (penod=0.2s) S 0.394 MCER ground motion (penod=i Os) SMS 1.31 SM1 * null SDS 0.873 S01 * null * See Section 11.4.8 Site-modified spectral acceleration value Site-modified spectral acceleration value Numeric seismic design value at 0.2s SA Numeric seismic design value at lOs SA -Additional Information Name Value Description SDC * null Seismic design category Fa 1.2 Site amplification factor at 0.2s F * null Site amplification factor at lOs CRS 0.893 Coefficient of risk (0.2s) CR1 0.904 Coefficient of risk (lOs) PGA 0.482 MCEG peak ground acceleration FPGA 1.2 Site amplification factor at PGA PGAM 0.579 Site modified peak ground acceleration TL 8 Long-period transition period (s) https:/Thazards.atcouncil.org/#/seismic?lat=33.i 580933&lng=-117.3505939&address=Carlsbad%2C CA%2C USA 1/2 11/11/22,,11:00 AM ATC Hazards by Location SsRT 1.092 Probabilistic risk-targeted ground motion (0.2s) SsUH 1.222 Factored uniform-hazard spectral acceleration (2% probability of exceedance in 50 years) SsD 1.5 Factored deterministic acceleration value (0.2s) S1RT 0.394 Probabilistic risk-targeted ground motion (lOs) S1UH 0.436 Factored uniform-hazard spectral acceleration (2% probability of exceedance in 50 years) SID 0.6 Factored deterministic acceleration value (lOs) PGAd 0.597 Factored determnistic acceleration value (PGA) * See Section 11.4.8 The results indicated here DO NOT reflect any state or local amendments to the values or any delineation lines made during the building code adoption process. Users should confirm any output obtained from this tool with the local Authority Having Jurisdiction before proceeding with design. Please note that the ATC Hazards by Location website will not be updated to support ASCE 7-22. Find out why. Disclaimer Hazard loads are provided by the U.S. Geological Survey Seismic Design Web Services. While the information presented on this website is believed to be correct, ATC and its sponsors and contributors assume no responsibility or liability for its accuracy. The material presented in the report should not be used or relied upon for any specific application without competent examination and verification of its accuracy, suitability and applicability by engineers or other licensed professionals. ATC does not intend that the use of this information replace the sound judgment of such competent professionals, having experience and knowledge in the field of practice, nor to substitute for the standard of care required of such professionals in interpreting and applying the results of the report provided by this website. Users of the information from this website assume all liability arising from such use. Use of the output of this website does not imply approval by the governing building code bodies responsible for buildng code approval and interpretation for the building site described by latitude/longitude location in the report. https://hazards.atcouncil.orgl#/se ism ic?lat=33.1580933&lng=-117.3505939&address=Carisbad%2C CA%2C USA 2/2 TekIa Project Job Ref. U Tedds RLG Inc. Section Sheet no/rev. Calc. by Date Chkd by Date Appd by C 11/11/2022 7e WIND LOADING In accordance with ASCE7-16 Using the directional design method Tedds calculation version 2.1.05 49.33 ft Wall/sign data Length of wall/sign Height of wall/sign Height to top of sign General wind load requirements Basic wind speed Risk category Velocity pressure exponent coef (Table 26.6-1) Ground elevation above sea level Ground elevation factor Exposure category (cl 26.7.3) Gust effect factor Minimum design wind loading (cl.27.4.7) Topography Topography factor not significant B = 9.33 ft 5 = 3.50 ft h = 21.50 ft V = 96.0 mph Kd = 0.85 z9i = 0 m Ke = exp(-0.0000362 x zgillft)= 1.00 B Gf= 0.85 Pmin_r = 8 lb/ft2 K= 1.0 Velocity pressure Velocity pressure coefficient (Table 26.10-1) I(z = 0.63 Velocity pressure qh = 0.00256 x 1(2 x Kzt x Kd x K x V2 x 1 psf/mph2 = 12.7 psf Area ofsign At=Bxs=32.655ft2 Ratio of solid area to gross area E = 1.00 Wall/sign forces - Case A and B Force coefficient (Figure 29.3-1) Resultant force Wall sign forces - Case C Number of whole regions - main wall Ct A = 1.82 FA = max(l6psf, qh x Gf x CLA) x Af = 0.6 kips N = lnt(B/s) = 2 I, TekIa Project Job Ref. U Tedds RLG Inc. Section Sheet no/rev. 2 Caic. by Date Chkd by Date App'd by Date C 11/11/2022 Length of;balance - main wall Region 1 -0.0 ft to 3.5 ft Force coefficient (Figure 29.3-1) Effective area Resultant force Region 2 -3.5 ft to 7.0 ft Force coefficient (Figure 29.3-1) Effective area Resultant force Region 3 -7.0 ft to 9.3 ft Force coefficient (Figure 29.3-1) Effective area Resultant force Lbalance = B - N5 X S = 2.3 ft Ctc_otos = 2.48 Atc_i = S x S = 12.3 ft2 FA_C1 = max( l6psf, qh x Gc x Ctc_o to s) x Ac_, = 0.3 kips Cfc_s to 2o = 1.63 ALC_2 = s x s = 12.3 ft2 FA—C-2 = max(l6psf, qh x Gt x CLc_s to 2s) x ALC_2 = 0.2 kips CLc_25t03s = 1.15 ALC_3 = Lbatance X 5 = 8.2 ft2 FA—q-3 = max(l6psf, qh x Gr x Ctc_25t0 3s) x ALC_3 = 0.1 kips 0.6 kips Plan — Case A Plan — Case C 1 41.866 ft 0.6 kips Plan — Case B Fp Calculations (shelving unit a p= Sds= 0.87 Rp= 1p= Title Weight Fp RTU 1 Wp= 2324 649 RTU2 lwp= 2667 745 7 , 2215.319 Apple Carlsbad RTU Loading Seismic Load= 649 lbs Seismic Load= 745 WL =12.7 psf*15*(9 33ft*3 5ft)=622 lbs @1.75ft WL= 12.7 psf*1.5*(6.75ft*3.5ft)=451 lb @1.75ft SEISMIC LOAD GOVERNS M=.745k*1.75ft+Fy*9.33ft Fy=0.139k/10=141b N= 0.745k*1.75ft + Fy*6.75ft Fy= 0.193k/10=201b 'A" Screw Capacity V= lO6lbs T= 291Ibs Unit Loads: V= 941b/ anchors T= 201b/ anchors (20/2911bs)+(94/106lbs)=0.955 OKAY WoodWorkso COMPANY PROJECT SOFTWARE FOR WOOD DESIGN Nov. 11, 2022 12:021 Blocking.wwb Design Check Calculation Sheet WoodWorks Sizer 2019 (Update 4) Loads: Load Type Distribution- at Location [ft] Magnitude Unit Start End Start End Loadl Dead Point 1.02 500 lbs Self-weight Dead Full UDL 1 1 7.7 plf Maximum Reactions (Ibs), Bearing Capacities (Ibs) and Bearing Lengths (in): 2.042 0' 2 Unfactored: Dead Factored: 258 258 Total 258 258 Bearing: Capacity Beam 1094 1094 Support 1211 1211 Des ratio Beam 0.24 0.24 Support 0.21 0.21 Load comb #1 #1 Length 050* 0•50* Min req'd 050* 0.50* Cb 1.00 1.00 Cb min 1.00 1.00 Cb support 1.11 1.11 Fcp sup 625 625 *Minimum bearing length setting used: 1/2" for end supports Lumber-soft, D.Fir-L, No.2, 4x10 (3-112"x9-114") Supports: All - Timber-soft Beam, D.Fir-L No.2 Total length: 2.06; Clear span: 1.938'; Volume = 0.5 cu.ft. Lateral support: top = at supports, bottom = at supports; This section PASSES the design code check. I Wood Works® Sizer SOFTWARE FOR WOOD DESIGN I Blocking.wwb WoodWorks® Sizer 2019 (Update 4) Page 2 Analysis vs. Allowable Stress and Deflection using NDS 2018: Criterion Analysis Value Design Value Unit Analysis/Design Shear fv = 12 Fv' = 162 psi fv/Fv' = 0.07 Bending(+) fb = 61 Fb' = 969 psi fb/Fb' = 0.06 Live Defl'n negligible Total Defl'n negligible Additional Data: FACTORS: F/E(psi) CD CM Ct CL CF Cfu Cr Cfrt Ci LC# Fv' 180 0.90 1.00 1.00 - - - - 1.00 1.00 1 Fb'+ 900 0.90 1.00 1.00 0.997 1.200 - 1.00 1.00 1.00 1 Fcp' 625 - 1.00 1.00 - - - - 1.00 1.00 - E' 1.6 million 1.00 1.00 - - - - 1.00 1.00 1 Emin' 0.58 million 1.00 1.00 - - - - 1.00 1.00 1 CRITICAL LOAD COMBINATIONS: Shear : LC #1 = D only Bending(+) : LC #1 = U only Deflection: LC #1 = U only (total) Bearing : Support 1 - LC #1 = D only Support 2 - LC #1 = D only D=dead All LC's are listed in the Analysis output Load combinations: ASD Basic from ASCE 7-16 2.4 / IBC 2018 1605.3.1 CALCULATIONS: V max = 258, V design = 252 lbs; M(+) = 254 lbs-ft Ely = 369.34 lb-in2 "Live" deflection is due to all non-dead loads (live, wind, snow...) Total deflection = 1.5 dead + "live" Lateral stability(+) : Lu = 2.00' Le = 4.13' RB = 6.1 Design Notes: Analysis and design are in accordance with the ICC International Building Code (IBC 2018) and the National Design Specification (NDS 2018), using Allowable Stress Design (ASD). Design values are from the NDS Supplement. Please verify that the default deflection limits are appropriate for your application. Sawn lumber bending members shall be laterally supported according to the provisions of NDS Clause 4.4.1. MUS28 .er lo ll III S ,r '1l Ill) ll lii .1 lit If( o 'HUS21O (HUS26, HUS28, and HHUS similar) CL 0 UV HHUS21O-2 Gil Gil Typical HUS26 Installation with Reduced Heel Height (multiple member fastening by designer) j s:stronTiewoodconstruchonco:nectors Ps This product is preferable to similar connectors because of a) easier installation, b) higher loads, c) lower installed cost, or a combination of these features. The double-shear hanger series, ranging from the light-capacity WS hangers to the highest-capacity HGUS hangers, feature innovative double-shear nailing that distributes the load through two points on each joist nail for greater strength. This allows for fewer nails, faster installation and the use of all common nails for the same connection. For medium-load truss applications, the MUS offers a lower-cost alternative and easier installation than the HUS or THA hangers, while providing greater load capacity and bearing than the LUS. Material: See tables on pp. 200-201 Finish: Galvanized. Some products available in stainless steel or ZMAX® coating. See Corrosion Information, pp. 12-15. Installation: Use all specified fasteners; see General Notes. Nails must be driven at an angle through the 101st or truss into the header to achieve the table loads. Not designed for welded or nailer applications. Options: [US and MUS hangers cannot be modified Concealed flanges are not available for HGUS and HHUS Other sizes available; consult your Simpson Strong-Tie representative Codes: See p. 11 for Code Reference Key Chart Double-Shear Nailing - Top View Double-Shear Nailing Side View Do not bend tab Dome Double-Shear Nailing Side View (Available on some models) 199 Model I OF Allowable Loads SR Allowable Loads SPF/HF Allowable Loads Code No. F I Uplift (160) Floor (100) Snow (115) Roof (125) Wind (160) Uplift (160) Floor (100) Snow (115) Roof (125) Wind (160) Uplift (160) Floor (100) Snow (115) Roof (125) Wind (160) Ref. Single 2x Sizes LUS24 435 670 765 820 1,045 435 725 825 890 1,120 360 495 565 605 770 LUS26 1,165 865 990 1,070 1,355 1,165 935 1,070 1,150 1,475 865 635 725 785 1,000 MUS26 930 1,295 1,480 1,560 1,560 930 1,405 1,560 1,560 1,560 810 955 1,090 1,180 1,350 HUS26 1,320 2,735 3,095 3,235 3,235 1,320 2,960 3,280 3,280 3,280 1,150 2,350 2,660 2,780 2,780 HGUS26 1040 4,355 4,875 5,230 5,390 1,045 4,725 5,295 5,390 5,390 1,005 3,755 4,205 4,495 5,390 LUS28 1,165 1,100 1,260 1,350 1,725 1,165 1,195 1,360 1,465 1,730 865 810 925 1,000 1,270 IBC, MUS28 1,320 1,730 1,975 2,125 2,255 1,320 1 1,875 1 2,135 2,255 1 2,255 1,150 1,270 1,455 1,575 1,955 FL, LA HUS28 1,760 4,095 4,095 4,095 4,095 1,760 4,095 4,095 4,095 4,095 1,480 3,520 3,520 3,520 3,520 HGUS28 11,650 7,275 7,275 7,275 7275 1,650 7,275 7,275 7,275 7,275 1485 6,010 6,255 6,255 6,255 LUS210 1,165 1,335 1,530 1,640 2,090 1,165 1,450 1,655 1,775 2,270 865 985 1,120 1,215 1,500 HUS210 2,635 5,450 5,795 5,630 5,830 2,635 5,395 5,780 5,830 5,830 2,220 4,685 4,985 5,015 5,015 HGUS210 2,090 9,100 9,100 9,100 9,100 2,090 9,100 9,100 9,100 9,100 1,545 6,340 6,730 6,730 6,730 SIMPSON ss ss LUS/MUS/HUS/HHUS/HGUS Face-Mount Joist Hangers (cont.) Model No. Min. Heel Hh Ga. Dimensions (in.) Fasteners eig t Member WTH B Carrying Carried Member Single 2x Sizes LUS24 2% 18 1A6 31/s 13/4 (4)0.148x3 (2)0.148x3 LUS26 41/4 18 1316 43/4 11/4 (4)0148x3 (4)0.148x3 MUS26 411/16 18 1 'As 531 2 (6) 0.148 x 3 (6) 0.148 x 3 HUS26 431e 16 1/8 53/h 3 (14)0.162x3½ (6)0.162x3½ HGUS26 4,16 12 1% 53/8 5 (20)0.162x3½ (8)0.162x3½ LUS28 4316 18 134e 6% 13/4 (6)0.148x3 (4)0.148x3 MUS28 6316 18 1316 613A6 1 2 1 (8)0.148x3 (8)0.148x3 l4US28 61h 16 1% 7 3 (22)0.162x3½ (8)0.162x3½ HGUS28 6316 12 1% 713 5 (36) 0.162 x 31/2 (12) 0.162 x 31/a LUS210 41/4 18 1 316 7'3A6 13/4 (8) 0.148 x 3 (4) 0.148x3 HUS210 8% 16 1 /8 9 3 (30)0.162x 315 (10) 0.162 x 31/2 HGUS210 8316 12 1/8 1 9½ 5 (46)0.162x3½ (16)0,162x3½ 1. See table below for allowable loads. These products are available with add tional corrosion protection. For more information, see p. 14. For stainless-steel fasteners, see p. 21. Many of these products are approved for installation I with Strong-DrivEP SD Connector screws. See pp. 348-352 for more information. 1. For dimensions and fastener information, see table above. See table footnotes on p. 201. HHUS/HGUS See Hanger Options information on pp. 97-99. HHUS - Sloped and/or Skewed Seat HHUS hangers can be skewed to a maximum of 45° and/or sloped to a maximum of 450 For skew only, maximum allowable download is 0.85 of the table load For sloped only or sloped and skewed hangers, the maximum allowable download is 0.65 of the table load Uplift loads for sloped/skewed conditions are 0.72 of the table load, not to exceed 2,475 lb. The joist must be bevel-cut to allow for double shear nailing HGUS - Skewed Seat HGUS hangers can be skewed only to a maximum of 45°. Allowable loads are: HGUS Seat Width Carried Member End Condition Square Cut Bevel Cut Uplift Download Uplift Download W < 2" 0.46 0.62 0.46 0.72 2"<W<6" 0.41 0.46 0.41 0.85 6" <W <6.75" 0.40 6.75" <W < 7.25" Not allowed Not allowed 200 UPDATED 07/01/22 Acute Specify angle Top View HHUS Hanger Skewed Right hoist must be bevel cut) All joist nails installed on the outside angle (non-acute side). Model Mm Dimensions (in.) Fasteners (in.) DF/SP Allowable Loads SPF/HF Allowable Loads No. Heel H eight . a. W H B Carrying Member Carried Member Uplift (160) Floor (100) Snow (115) Roof (125) Wind (160) Uplift (160) Floor (100) Snow (115) Roof (125) Wind (160) Code Ref. Double 2x Sizes LU5242 21A 18 31/8 31/8 2 (4)0162x3½ (2)0162x3½ 410 800 905 980 1245 355 690 780 845 1,070 LUS26-2 016 18 31/a 4 /8 2 (4)0,162x3½ (4)0.162531/2 1,060 1,030 1,170 1,265 1,595 910 885 1,005 1,090 1,370 HHUS26-2 4,16 14 3 5A6 53/a 3 (14) 0.162 x 31/2 (6) 0.162 x 3½ 1,320 2,830 3,190 3,415 4,250 1,135 2,435 2,745 2,935 3,655 HGUS26-2 06 12 391 6 5146 4 (20) 0.162 x 3'/2 (8)0.162x 31/2 2,155 4,355 4875 5,230 5,575 2,155 3,755 4,875 5,230 5,255 LUS28-2 4916 18 31A 7 2 (6)0.162x3½ (4)0.162x3½ 1,060 1,315 1,490 1,610 2,030 910 1,130 1,280 1,385 1,745 180, F1HUS28-2 6346 14 3546 71/4 3 (22)0.162x3½ (8)0.162x3½ 1,760 4,265 4,810 5,155 5,980 1,515 3,670 4,135 4,435 5,145 FL, LA HGUS28-2 6346 12 3546 7346 4 (36)0.162x3½ (12)0.162x3½ 3,235 7,460 7,460 7,460 7,460 2,780 6,415 6,415 6,415 6,415 LUS210-2 61.4€ 18 31/s 9 2 (8)0.162x3½ (6)0.16201h 1,445 1,830 2,075 2,245 2,830 1,245 1,575 1,785 1,930 2,435 HHUS210-2 8~ 14 3346 9/15 3 (30) 0.162 x 3½ (10) 0.162 x 31,5 3,550 5,705 6,435 6,485 6,485 3,335 4,905 5,340 5,060 5,190 HGUS210-2 8916 12 3916 9316 4 (46)0.162x3½ (16)0.162x3½ 4,095 9,100 9,100 9,100 9,100 3,520 7,460 1 7,825 7,825 7,825 Triple 2x Sizes HGUS26-3 41346 12 41346 51,5 4 (20)0.162x3½ (8)0.162x3½ 2,155 4,355 4,875 5,230 5,575 2,155 3,755 4,875 5,230 5,255 IBC, HGUS28-3 81316 12 415,46 71/4 4 (36)0.162x3½ (12) 0.162 x3½ 3,235 7,460 7,460 7,460 7,460 2,780 6,415 6,415 6,415 1 6,415 1 FL, LA HHUS210-3 81/a 14 411,16 81/s 3 (30)0.162x3½ (10)0.162x3½ 3,405 5,640 6,380 6,485 6,485 2,930 4,850 5,485 5,575 5,575 FL HGUS210-3 834€ 12 41346 91/4 4 (46)0.162x3½ (16)0.162x3½ 4,095 9,100 9,100 9,100 9,100 3,520 7,825 7,825 7,825 7,825 HGUS212-3 10% 12 4 41 103/4 4 (56) 0.162 x 31,5 (20) 0.162 53½ 5,205 11,915 13,330 14,290 14,350 4,730 10,280 12,420 12,420 12,420 FL, LA HGUS214-3 12% 12 41346 12~ 4 (66)0.162x3½ (22)0.162x3½ 5,360 13,860 14,350 14,350 14,350 4,915 11,960 12,420 12,420 12,420 Quadruple 2x Sizes HGUS26 4 51/2 12 6346 5A6 4 (20)0162x3½ 8)0162x3½ 2155 4,355 4875 5,230 5575 2,155 3,755 4,875 5,230 5,255 IBC HGUS28-4 71/4 12 6316 7346 4 (36)0.162x3½ (12)0.162x3½ 3,235 7,460 7,460 7,460 7,460 1 2,780 6,415 6,415 6,415 6,415 FL, LA FlHUS210-4 8% 14 61/8 8½ 3 (30)0.162x3½ (10)0.162x3½ 3,405 5,640 6,380 6,485 6,485 2,930 4,850 5,485 5,575 5,575 FL HGUS210-4 91/4 12 6916 9346 4 (46)0.162x3½ (16)0.162x3½ 4,095 9,100 9,100 9,100 9,100 3,520 7,825 7,825 7,825 7,825 HGUS212-4 10% 12 6946 10% 4 (56)0.162x3½ (20)0.162x3½ 5,205 11,915 13,330 14,290 14,350 4,730 10,280 12,420 12/32012,420 ELLA HGUS214-4 12% 12 6°,46 12% 4 1 (66)0.162x3½ (22)0.162x3½ 5,360 13,860 14,350 14,350 14,350 4,915 11,960 12,420 12,420 12,420 4x Sizes LUS46 43/a 18 3946 43/4 2 (4)0.162x3½ 4)0.162x3½ 1,060 1,030 1 1,170 1,265 1,595 1 910 885 1,005 1,090 1,370 HGUS46 47,1 12 3% 4146 4 (20)0.162x3½ (8)0.162x3½ 2,155 4,355 1 4,875 5,230 5,575 2,155 3,755 4,875 5,230 5,255 HHUS46 4546 14 3% 5346 3 (14)0.162x3½ (6)0.162x3½ 1,320 2,830 3,190 3,415 4,250 1,135 2,435 2,745 2,935 3,655 LUS48 43/a 18 3346 6Y4 2 (6)0.162x3½ (4)0.162x3½ 1,060 1,315 1,490 1,610 2,030 910 1,130 1,280 1,385 1,745 HUS48 61546 14 3346 7 2 (6)0.162 x 31/2 (6)0.162531,5 1,320 1,580 1,790 1,930 2,415 1,135 1,360 1,540 1,660 2,075 HHUS48 6½ 14 3% 71,5 3 (22)0162531,5 (8)0.162x31/2 1,760 4,265 4,810 5,155 5,980 1,515 3,670 4,135 4,435 5,145 180, HGUS48 6146 12 3% 7146 4 (36)0.162x3½ (12)0.162x3½ 3,235 7,460 7,460 7,460 7,460 2,780 6,415 6,415 6,415 6,415 FL, LA LUS41O 61/4 18 3916 8Y4 2 (5)0.162531/2 (6)0.162x3½ 2,435 HHUS41O 1,445 2,830 1,245 1,575 1,785 1,930 8% 14 3% 9 3 (30)0.162x3½ (10)0.162x3½ 3,550 5,705 ,485 6,485 3,265 4,905 5,535 5,575 5,575 HGUS41O 8146 12 3% 91,46 4 (46)0,162x3½ (16)0.162x3½ 4,095 1,830[2,075,245 9,100 ,100 9,100 3,520 7,825 7,825 7,825 7,825 HGUS412 10146 12 3% 10146 4 (56)0.162x3½ (20)0.1625 31,5 5,205 11,915 4,290 14,350 4,730 10,280 12,420 12/320 12/320 HGUS414 111.16 12 35,5 1214€ 4 (66)0.162x3½ (22)0.162x3½ 5,360 13,860 4,350 14,350 4,915 11,960 12,420 12,420 12,420 Double 4x Sizes HGUS7.37/10 8146 12 7Y8 834€ 4 (46)0.162x3½ (16)0.16201/2 4,095 9,100 9,100 9,100 9,100 3,520 7,825 7,825 7,825 7,825 FlGUS7.37/12 10A€ 12 73A 10346 4 (56)0.162x3½ (20)0.162x3½5,205 11,915 13,330 14,290 14,350 4,730 10,280 12,420 12,420 12,420 ELLA HGtJS7.37/14 11A& 12 7Y,1294€ 4 (66)0.162x3½ (22)0.162 x3½ 5,360 13,860 14,350 14350 14,350 4,915 11,960 12,420 12/320 12,420 1~ Simpson Strong-Tie' Wood Construction Connectors IGEMPSOIN LUS/MUS/HUS/HHUS/HGUS These products are available with additional corrosion For stainless-steel Many of these products are approved for installation protection. For more information, see p. 14. fasteners, see p. 21. with Strong-DriveP SD Connector screws. See pp. 348-352 for more information. Uplift loads have been increased for earthquake or wind loading with no further increase allowed. Reduce where other loads govern. Wind (160) is a download rating. Minimum heel height shown is required to achieve full table loads. For less than minimum heel height, see technical bulletin T-C-REDHEEL at strongtie.com. Truss chord cross-grain tension may limit allowable loads in accordance with ANSI/TPI 1-2014. Simpson Strong-TieP Connector Selector' software includes the evaluation of cross-grain tension in its hanger allowable loads. For additional information, contact Simpson Strong-Tie. Loads shown are based on a two-ply 2x carrying member minimum for nailed hangers. With 3x carrying members: when 0.162" x 3½" nails are specified. use 0.162" a 2½" nails into the header and 0.162" x 3½' nails into the joist with no load reduction, When 0.146" x 3" nails are specified, use 0.148" x 2 ½" nails into the header and 0.148" x 3" nails into the joist with no load reduction. With 2x carrying members: when 0.162" x 3 ½" nails are specified, use 0.148" x I ½" nails into the header and 0.148" x 3" nails into the joist and reduce the load to 0.64 of the table values. When 0.148" x 3" nails ow specified, use 0.148" x I ½" nails into the header and 0.148" x 3" nails into the joist and reduce the load to 0.77 of the table values. Fasteners: Nail dimensions are listed diameter by length. See pp. 21-22 for fastener information. 201 ZAX / Loads: BLC 7. <Licensed Company> SK-1 cverdel-ogden Nov 11, 2022 Door Opening.r3d 14 15' Company : <Licensed Company> 11/11/2022 IIIRISA Designer : cverdel-ogden 11:33:54 AM Job Number : Checked By: A NEMETSCHEK COMPANY Model Name Nodes Label X [ftl V FIll Z Fftl Temp Idea 19 Detach From Diahraam NI 0 2 N2 0 18 0 3 N3 3.5 0 0 4 N4 3.5 18 0 5 N5 0 8 0 6 N6 3.5 8 0 Bounda,y Conditions Node Label X [k/mi V 1k/ml Z 1k/mi X Rot [k-if/radi V Rot Fk-ft/radi 1 Ni Reaction Reaction Reaction Reaction 2 N3 Reaction Reaction Reaction Reaction 3 N2 Reaction Reaction 4 N4 Reaction Reaction Cold Formed Steel Properties Label E [ksi] G [ksij Nu Therm. Coeff. [1e50F11 Density [k/Ill Yield [ksij Fu [ksi] 1 A653 SS Gr33 1 29500 1 11346 0.3 0.65 0.49 1 33 1 45 2 A653 SS Gr50/1 1 29500 1 11346 0.3 0.65 0.49 1 50 1 65 Cold Formed Steel Section Sets Label Shape Type Design List Material Design R... Area [1n9 IW [in4] Izz [in 41 J [in4] I 1 I JAMBS 1 2-362S162-54-FF I Column I None IA653 SS ... I TvDical 1 0.844 1 1.308 I 1.746 I 2.174 2-362S162-43-FF I Beam Member Area Loads (BLC I: DL) Node A Node B Node C Node D Direction Load Direction Magnitude [ksf] Inactive [(k, k-f... 1 1 I N5 I N2 I N4 I N6 I V I B-C 1 0 I Active Member Area Loads (BLC 2: WL) Node A Node B Node C Node D Direction Load Direction Magnitude [ksf] Inactive [(k, k-f... 1 I N5 I N2 I N4 N6 I Z I B-C I -0.005 I Active Basic Load Cases BLC Description Category X GravitvV GravitvZ Gravity Nodal Point Distributed Area(Member) 1 I DL DL 21 WL WL 3 1 BLC 1 Transient Area... None 4 LC 2 Transient Area... None 2 Load Combinations Description Solve Poelta SRSS BLC Factor BLC Factor I 1 IBC 16-12 (a) (a) Yes V DL I WL 1 L2 IBC 16-12 (a) (b) Yes V DL 1 WL -1 Node Reactions LC Node Label X [k] V Fki Z [k] MX [k-ft] MY 1k-Ill MZ 1k-Ill 1 1 Ni 0 0.056 0.163 2 1- N3 0 0.056 0.054 0 0 0 .3 1- N2 0 0 0.124 0 0 0 4 - - N4 0 0 0.093 0 0 0 5 1 Totals: 0 0.111 0.434 6 - - COG (Il): X: 1.75 Y: 8.927 Z: 0 7 2 Ni 0 0.056 -0.163 0 0 0 8 2 N3 0 0.056 -0.054 0 0 0 RISA-313 Version 18 [Door Opening.r3d] Page 1 111RISA Company : <Licensed Company> Designer : cverdel-ogden Job Number A NEMETSCHEK COMPAF4Y Model Name 16 11/11/2022 11:33:54 AM Checked By: Node Reactions (Continued) LC Node Label X [ki Y Fk1 Z 1k] MX 1k-if] MY Fk-ft] MZ 1k-if] 9 2 N2 0 0 -0.124 0 0 0 10 2 N4 0 0 -0.093 0 0 0 11 2 Totals: 0 -0.434 12 _2 COG (ft): _X:_1.75:_8.927 _0.111 _Z:_0 Node Deflections LC Node Label X Fin] V Fini Z hifi X Rotation Frad] V Rotation Iradi Z Rotation Frad] 1 1 Ni 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 N2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 N3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 _i N4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 _i N5 0 0 -0.795 -1.578e-03 0 0 6 _i_ N6 0 0 -0.422 -1.45e-03 0 0 7 2 Ni 0 0. 0 0 0 0 8 2 N2 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 2 N3 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 2 N4 0 0 0 0 0 0 ii 2 N5 0 0 0.795 1.578e-03 0 0 12 2 N6 0 0 0.422 1.45e-03 0 0 Cold Formed Steel Code Checks LC M Shane tiC Max In S I o Dir PnI Tn! Mn Mn Vnv Vn7 Ch Fon I i - Ml -362... 0.494 8.. 0.. 0 1 v 2.146 16.. 10.906 1.329 4682 3.76 1.304 H1.2-1 2 _1 - -362... 0.291 i0.02 18 y_ 2.146 16.. 865 1.278 4.682 316 1.166 H1.2-1 3 _1 M2 1-362 M3-362... 0.003 1.750... 35 _y_ 8.271 13.... 0.836 129 3.479 3.108 1.136 F3.1-1 4 2 Mi-362... 1 7.. 0.... 0 2146 16.. 0.715 0.65 4.682 316 1.304 H1.2-1 5 2 M2 -362... 0.546 10.0M2 18 _y 2146 16... 0132 0.669 4.682 316 1.166 H1.2-1 6 2 M3... 1 0.003 1.7510.... 35 _y_ 8.271 13.... 0.836 1.29 3.479 3.1081 1.136 F3.1 -1 RlSA-30 Version 18 [Door Opening.r3d] Page 2 17 Screw Table Notes Screw spacing and edge distance shall not be less than 3 x D. (D = Nominal screw diameter) The allowable screw values are based on the steel properties of the members being connected, per AISI section E4. When connecting materials of different metal thicknesses or yield strength, the lowest applicable values should be used. Screw strength needs to be verified by the screw manufacturer. Values include a 3.0 factor of safety. Applied loads may be multiplied by 0.75 for seismic or wind loading, per AISI A 5.1.3. Penetration of screws through joined materials should not be less than 3 exposed threads. Screws should be installed and tightened in accordance with screw manufacturer's recommendations. Values based on a tensile to yeld steel property ratio of 1.08. Allowable Loads for Screw Connections Design Sheet Properties #6 Screw #8 Screw #10 Screw #12 Screw Thickness Yield Tensile Shear Pullout Shear Pullout Shear Pullout Shear Pullout Mil in. ksi ksi lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. 18 0.0188 33 36 4826 52 31 56 36 60 41 27 0.0283 33 36 88 39 96 47 104 54 110 62 30 0.0312 33 36 102 43 111 52 120 60 128 68 33 0.0346 33 36 119 48 130 57 140 66 149 75 43 0.0451 33 36 178 63 194 75 208 87 222 98 54 0.0566 33 36 250 79 272 94 293 109 312 123 68 0.0713 33 36 316 99 375 118 414 137 441 156 97 0.1017 33 36 450 142 535 168 620 195 705 222 54 0.0566 50 54 378 120 412 142 444 165 473 187 68 0.0713 50 54 478 151 568 179 627 207 669 236 97 1 0.1017 1 50 54 682 215 811 255 939 296 1068 336 Weld Table Notes Weld capacities based on AISI, section E2 When connecting materials of different metal thicknesses or yield strength, the lowest applicable values should be used. Values include a 2.5 factor of safety. Applied loads may be multiplied by 0.75 for seismic or wind loading per AISI A 5.1.3. Values based on a tensile to yeld steel property ratio of 1.08. Allowable Loads for Fillet Welds and Flare Groove Welds - Mil Design Thickness in. Steel Properties Yield Tensile ksi ksi E60XX Electrodes lbs/in 43 _ 0.0451 33 36 482 54 0.0566 33 36 605 68 0.0713 33 36 762 97 0.1017 33 36 1087 43 0.0451 50 54 731 54 0.0566 50 54 917 68 0.0713 50 54 1155 97 0.1017 50 54 1648 48 SSMA The following pages are an excerpt from the North American Product Technical Guide, Volume 1: Direct Fastening Technical Guide, Edition 21. Please refer to the publication in its entirety for complete details on this product including data development, base materials, general suitability, installation, corrosion, and product specifications. Direct Fastening Technical Guide, Edition 21 To consult directly with a team member regarding our direct fastening products, contact Hilti's team of technical support specialists between the hours of 7:00am - 6:00pm CST. US: 877-749-6337 or HNATechnicalServiceshilti.com CA: 1-800-363-4458 ext. 6 or CATechnicalServices(hilti.com Hilti, Inc. 7250 Dallas Parkway, Suite 1000 Piano, Texas 75024 1-800-879-8000 1 www.hilti.com 19 - 3.2.5.1 Product description 3.2.5 GENERAL APPLICATION FASTENERS 3.2.5.2 Material specifications 3.2.5.1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 3.2.5.3 Technical data 3.2.5.4 Ordering information '1 4 X-C DS X-CR, X-R R X-S EDS X-U 15 Listinas/Acrnrovals ICC-ES (International Code Council) ESR-2269 with LABC/LARC Supplement (X-P, X-U and X-U 15) ESR-1663 with LABC/LARC Supplement (DS, EDS, X-R and X-CR) ESR-1752 with LABC/LARC Supplement ((-C, X-P G2/G3/B3, X-S) X-U Universal Series This universal high performance fastener is designed for applications in concrete and high strength or standard strength steel. The shank diameter is consistent through the fastener offering at 0.157". X-U fastener lengths range from 5/8 through 2-7/8 and are available as single fasteners (138) or collated (MX) in strips of 10. All X-U fasteners have a unique twist knurling reaching 7/8' from the tip up the shank. X-P Premium Concrete Fastener The X-P fastener is optimized for high performance in concrete base materials. With a shank diameter of 0.157", an optimized conical tip design, and high steel hardness, the X-P is designed for demanding concrete applications, in base materials up to 8,000 psi in strength. The X-P fastener is available in lengths ranging from 5/8" to 1-9/16", making it ideal for drywall track to concrete applications. X-P fasteners are available as single fasteners (P8) or collated (MX) in strips of 10. X-C Standard Series The X-C series of fasteners is a cost effective solution for applications in concrete and masonry. This fastener is not suited for fastening to steel base materials. Fastener lengths range from 3/4" through 2-7/8" with a shank diameter of 0.138". X-C fasteners are offered in a single (P8) fastener version as well as in collated (M)) strips of 10. X-CR and X-R Fastener Series The X-CR is a high performance, corrosion resistant fastener equivalent to SAE 316 stainless steel. This fastener is ideally suited for applications where corrosion is a concern whether on concrete or steel base materials. The X-CR is designed mainly for concrete applications and is offered as a single (P8) fastener in lengths from 5/8' through 2-1/8". The X-R fastener is intended for steel applications and is offered in 1/2" shank length. Shank diameter for these fasteners is 0.145" for shank lengths less than 1-1/2" and 0.157" for longer fasteners. X-S Steel Fastener The X-S is an economical fastener for steel. It has a 0.145" smooth shank diameter and is offered in a 1/2' and 5/8" length. The X-S13 comes collated (MX) in strips of 10 or individually with a plastic "tophat" (THP). The X-S1 6 comes singly with a metal "tophat" (TH). This fastener is ideally suited for fastening drywall track to standard strength steel and is discussed further in Section 3.2.9. X-C G2/G3/B3, X-P G2/G3/B3, X-PN G3, X-S B3 These collated fastener lines for Hilti's gas-actuated and battery actuated tools are designed for applications in interior finishing, mechanical and electrical trades. These fasteners are used for fastenings in concrete and masonry (X-C G2/G3/B3 standard, X-P G2/G3/B3 premium), and steel (-S B3 and X-P G2/G3). For more details refer to Section 3.2.9. DS/EDS Fastener Series The DS series fastener is a high performance fastener of 0.177" shank diameter suitable for both concrete and steel applications. It is offered in a single fastener version only with a 10 mm dome head design and a 10 mm guidance washer. Available lengths are 3/4" through 2-1/2". Knurling is offered on 3/4" and 7/8" lengths; designated as EDS and ideally suited for steel applications. X-U 15 Steel Fastener The X-U 15 is a premium, high performance fastener designed specifically for attachments to steel (e.g. drywall track, tagging, etc.). It is offered in a 0.145" shank diameter and 5/8" length with a unique step shank design as either single fasteners with metal tophat or collated in strips of 10. 30 20 Direct Fastening Technical Guide, Edition 21 3.2.5.2 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Fastener designation Fastener material Fastener plating' Steel washer or clip material Washer or clip plating l-2 X-P Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc N/A N/A X-U Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc OS/EDS Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc N/A N/A X-C Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc X-R, X-CR3 SAE 316 N/A SAE 316 N/A X-C/X-P/X-PN/X-S: Carbon Steel 2-10 pm Zinc N/A N/A X-CT Forming Nail Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc N/A N/A BC X-C Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc Carbon Steel 5 pm Zinc 1 The 5 pm zinc coating is in accordance with ASTM B 633, SC 1 Type Ill. Refer to Section 2.3.3.1 for more information. 2 Most fasteners have a plastic washer for guidance when installing. Not all fastener lengths have a pre-mounted steel washer. Refer to Section 3.2.2.4 for more information on available fasteners. 3. The X-CR and X-R fastener material is a proprietary material, which provides a corrosion resistance equivalent to SAE 316 stainless steel. The steel washer material is SAE 316 stainless steel. More details about the innovative X-P and X-U fasteners can be found in Section 3.2.6. 3.2.5.3 TECHNICAL DATA Allowable loads in normal weight concrete 1,2 Fastener description Fastener e Al Shank diameter in.' n. (m ,i Minimum embedment i n. (mm) Concrete compressive strength 2000 psi 4000 psi 6000 psi 8000 psi tension lb (kN) Sheàr lb (kN) Tension lb (kN) Shear lb (kN) Tension lb (kN) Shear lb (kN) Tension lb (kN) Shear. lb (kN) Fastener Premium Concrete X-P 0.157 (4.0) 3/4 (19) 100 (0.44) 155 (0.69) 100 (0.44) 175 (0.78) 105 (0.47) 205 (0.91) 135 (0.60) 205 (0.91) 1 (25) 165 (0.73) 220 (0.98) 180 (0.80) 225 (1.00) 150 (0.67) 300 (1.33) 150 (0.67) 215 (0.96) 1-1/4 (32) 240 (1.07) 310 (1.38) 280 (1.25) 310 (1.38) 180 (0.80) 425 (1.89) - - 1-1/2 (38) 310 (1.38) 420 (1.87) - - - - - - Universal Knurled Shank Fasteners X- U 0.157 40 3/4 (19) 100 (0.44) 125 (0.57 100 (0.44) 125 (0.57) 105 (0.47) 205 (0.91) - - 1 (25) 165 (0.73) 190 (0.85 170 (0.76) 225 (1.00) 110 (0.49) 280 (1.25) - - 1-1/4 (32) 240 (1.07) 310 (1.3 280 (1.25) 310 (1.38) 180 (0.80) 425 (1.89) - - 1-1/2 (38) 275 (1.22 420 (1.87 325 (1.45) 420 (1.87) - - - - Standard Fastener X-C (Black collated strip or guidance washer) 0.138 3/4 (19) 45 (0.20) 75 (0.33) 65 (0.29) 105 (0.47) 95 (0.42) 195 (0.87) - - 1 (25) 85 (0.38) 150 (0.67) 160 (0.71) 200 (0.89) 105 (0.47) 270 (1.20) - - 1-1/4 (32) 130 (0.58) 210 (0.93) 270 (1.20) 290 (1.29) 165 (0.73) 325 (1.45) - - 1-1/2 (38) 175 (0.78) 260 (1.16) 270 (1.20) 360 (1.60) - - - - Heavy Duty Fastener DS 0.177 45 3/4 (19) 50 (0.22) 120 (0.53) 125 (0.56) 135 (0.60) - - - - 1 (25) 130 (0.58) 195 (0.87) 155 (0.69) 240 (1.07) - - - - 1-1/4 (32) 220 (0.98) 385 (1.71) 270 (1.20) 425 (1.89) - - - - 1-1/2 (38) 300 (1.33) 405 (1.80) 355 (1.58) 450 (2.00) - - - - Stainless Steel Fastener X-CR 0.145 3/4 (19) 30 (0.13) 40 (0.18) 65 (0.29) 40 (0.18) - - - - 1 (25) 55 (0.24) 185 (0.82) 120 (0.53) 190 (0.85) 100 (0.44) 170 (0.76) - - 1-1/4 (32) 110 (0.49) 290 (1.29) 125 (0.56) 300 (1.33) 120 (0.53) 440 (1.96) - - 1-1/2 (38) 265 (1.18) 405 (1.80) 350 (1.56) 450 (2.00) - - - - 0.157 (4.0) asStener X-C B3, X-C G3 0.118 (3.0) 3/4 (19) 110 (0.5) 190 (0.9) 110 (0.5) 190 (0.9) 110 (0.5) 190 (0.9) - - Premium Gas Fastener X-P 17 G2, X-P 20 G2, X-P G3, X-P B3 0.118 (3.0) 5/8 (16) - - 50 (0.2) 120 (0.5) 50 (0.2) 90 (0.4) - - 3/4 (19) 80 (0.4) 120 (0.5) 50(0.2) 120(0.5) 50(0.2) 90(0.4) - - Forming X-CT 473 0.145 (3.7) 1 (25) 1 60 (0.27) 65 (0.29) - - - - - - Fastener X-CT 62 3 10.145 (3.7) 1 (25) 1 75 (0.33) 75 (0.33) - - - - - - 1 The tabulated allowable load values are for the low-velocity fasteners only, using a safety factor that is greater than or equal to 5.0, calculated in accordance with ICC-ES Ac70. Wood or steel members connected to the substrate must be investigated in accordance with accepted design criteria. 2 Multiple fasteners are recommended for any attachment. 3 For temporary fastening of formwork only. 31 21 Direct Fastening Technical Guide, Edition 21 Allowable Loads Into Minimum = 3000 psi Structural Lightweight Concrete Over 1-1/2" Deep, B-Type Steel Deck' .4 . ' . .. . Fastener location Fastener description Fastener Shank diameter in. (mm) Minimum embedment in. (mm) installed through metal deck into concrete43 Tension lb (kN) Shear Upper flute Lower flute lb (kN) .. f4 (19) 140 (0.6) 130 (0.6) 335 (1.5) Premium concrete fastener X-P 0.157 (4.0) 1 (25) 215 (1.0) 215 (1.0) 385 (1.7) 1-1/4 (32) - 270 (1.2) 465 (2.1) Universal knurled X-U 0.157 (4.0) 3/4 (19) 95 (0.42) 95 (0.42) 370 (1.65) 1 (25) 125 (0.56) 125 (0.56) 415 (1.85) shank fastener Standard fastener X-C 0.138 (3.5) 3/4 (19) 80 (0.36) 80 (0.36) 315 (140) 1 (25) 205 (0.91) 205 (0.91) 445 (1.98) Gas fastener X-C B3, X-C G3 0.118 (3.0) 3/4 (19) 75 (0.3) (0.8) 85 (0.38) 175 1 (25) 155 (0.7) 160 (0.71) 255 (1.1) X-P 17 G2, X-P Premium gas fastener 20 G2, X-P G3, 0.118 (3.0) 5/8 (16) 60 (0.27) 60 (0.3) 175 (0.8) X-P B3 1 The tabulated allowable load values are for the low-velocity fasteners only, using a safety factor that is greater than or equal to 5.0, calculated in accordance with ICC-ES AC70. Wood or steel members connected to the substrate must be investigated in accordance with accepted design criteria. 2 Steel deck profiles are 1.112' deep, B-type deck with a minimum thickness of 20 gauge (0.0368" thick steel). Fasteners may be installed through the metal deck into lightweight concrete having both nominal and inverted deck profile orientations with a minimum lower flute width of 1-3/4" or 3-1/2", respectively. Fasteners shall be placed at centerline of deck flutes. Refer to Figures 2 and 3 (Section 3.2.1.6) for additional flute dimensions, fastener locations, and load orientations for both deck profiles. 3 Structural lightweight concrete fill above top of metal deck shall be a minimum 2.1/2" deep. 4 Multiple fasteners are recommended for any attachment. 33 22 Direct Fastening Technical Guide, Edition 21 Allowable loads in minimum ASTM A36 (F5 ? 36 ksi, F 258 ksi) steel' 2,4.5 . Shank Steel thickness fun.) 1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 ?3/41 Fastener description Fastener diameter Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear h (mm) lb (kN) lb (W) 1b (kN) lb(kN) ib(kNl lb (kN) 1b (W) lb (kN) lb(kN) ib(kN) lb (kN) lb (kN)I 0.157 500 720 775 720 935 720 900 720 350 375 Universal knurled shank* X-U6 - - (4.0) 22) (320) (345) (320) (416) 0) 00) 20) (1.56) 1.67) Stepped-shank X-U157 0.145 - - 155 395 230 395 420 450 365 500 365 400 knurling-lengthwise (3.7) 1 (0.69) (1.76) (1.02) (1.76) (1.87) (2.00) (1.62) (2.22) (1.62) (1.78) 0.145 140 300 300 460 300 450 300 450 Standard knurled shank X-S13 - - - - (3.7) (0.62)(1.33)133)(20)(1.33)(20)(1.33)(200) Drywall smooth shank XS16b0 0.145 - - 315 480 315 480 315 530 315 480 - - w/metal top hat washer (3.7) - (1.40) (2.14) (1.40) (2.14) (1.40) (2.36) (1.40) (2.14) Heavy duty EDS3 0.177 - - 305 615 625 870 715 870 890 960 400 655 knurled shank (4.5) - - (1.36) (2.74) (2.78) (3.87) (3.18) (3.87) (3.96) (4.27) (1.78) (2.91) Heavy duty DS 0.177 - - 365 725 580 725 695 725 735 860 - - smooth shank (4.5) - - (1.62) (3.22) (2.58) (3.22) (3.09) (3.22) (3.27) (3.83) X-R9, X-CR 0.145(3.7) - 460 460 615 500 - - - Stainless steel 0.157 (4.0) - (2.05) (2.05) (2.74) (2.22) - - - smooth shank X-118.9 0.145 300 190 615 495 760 500 220 325 225 335 - - (3.7) (1.33) (085) (2.74) (220) (338) (222) (98) (1.45) (1.00) (1.49) Standard gas fastener X-S 14 B3 0.118 140 230 220 245 225 290 280 330 280 330 280 330 for steel (3.0) 62) 2) (098) (1.09) (1oO) (129) (125) (147)(1.25)(1.47) 25) (147) Standard gas fastener 0.118 220 295 260 355 280 385 280 385 280 385 for steel X-514B38 (3.0) - - (98) (131) (116) (158) (1.25) (111) 25) (1.71) (125) 71) Premium gas fastener I X-P G3, X-P B3 0.118 125 230 170 245 200 230 250 255 - - - - (3.0) The tabulated allowable load values are for the low-velocity fasteners only, using a safety factor that is greater than or equal to 5.0, calculated in accordance with ICC-Es AC70. Wood or steel members connected to the substrate must be investigated in accordance with accepted design criteria. Low-velocity fasteners shall be driven to where the point of the fastener penetrates through the steal base material in accordance with section 3.2.2.3, except as noted in this table. EDS fasteners installed into greater than 1/2 thick steel require 1/2" minimum penetration. Multiple fasteners are recommended for any attachment. Refer to guidelines for fastening to steel, Section 3.2.2, for application limits. Tabulated allowable load values provided for 3/4" steel are based upon minimum point penetration of 1/2 into the steel. If 1/2 point penetration into the steel is not achieved, but a point penetration of at least 318" is obtained, the tabulated tension value should be reduced by 20 percent and the tabulated shear load should be reduced by 8 percent. X-U 15 fasteners installed into greater than 3/8"th ck steel require 15/32" minimum penetration into the steel. Based on testing with F = 50 ksi base material. Fasteners installed into 3/8" or thicker base require 0.38" minimum penetration depth into the steel. Published values may vary from values in lCC-EsR Allowable tensile pullover and shear bearing load capacities for steel framing with power driven fasteners 1,2.3,4 - Head _________ _________ Sheet steel thickness 14 ga. 16 ga. 18 ga. 20 ga. 22 ga. 24 ga. 25/26 ga. , Fastener descriptions Fastener dia. Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear Tension Shear (mm) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) it (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) lb (kN) 0.157' shank with or w/o 0.322 825 1,085 685 720 490 525 360 445 300 330 205 255 120 145 plastic washers or MX collation x-u ' - x p (8.2) (3.67) (4.83) (3.05) (3.20) (2.18) (2.34) (1.60) (1.98) (1.33) (1.47) (0.91) (1.13) (0.53) (0.64) 0.145" shank with or w/o 0.322 985 685 720 490 515 360 440 300 310 205 235 120 145 plastic washers or MX collation - ' - R (8.2) - (4.38) (3.05) (3.20) (2.18) (2.29) (1.60) (1.96) (1.33) (1.38) (0.91) (1.05) (0.53) 1 (0.64) 0.322 965 1,085 810 815 625 535 460 465 360 350 300 260 0 0.177" shank without washer OS, EDS (8.2) (4.29) (4.83) (3.60) (3.63) (2.78) (2.38) (2.05) (2.07) (1.60) (1.56) (1.33) (1.16) 0) 0.145" shank with plastic top X-S13THP 0.322 - 985 685 720 490 515 1(2.29) 360 440 300 310 205 235 Oil 5 hat washers X-S16TH (8.2) (4.38) (3.05) (3.20) (2.18) (1.60) (1.96) (1.33) (1.38) (0.91) (1.05) 4) 1 pjlowable Iced values are based on a safety factor of 3.0. 2 Ailowable pullover capacities of sheet steel should be compared to the allowable fastener tensile Iced capacities in concrete, steel, and masonry to determine controlling resistance load. 3 Allowable shear bearing capacities of sheet steel should be compared to allowable fastener shear capacities in concrete, steel and masonry to determine controlling resistance load. 4 Data is based on the following minimum sheet steal properties, F = 33 ksi, F = 45 ksi IASTM A653 material). * More details about the innovative X-U fastener can be found in Section 3.2.6. 35 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 000110 Table of Contents 003000 Available Information - Issued Under Separate Cover Owner I Contractor Construction Agreement Landlord's Construction Manual Work Letter DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011100 Summary of Work 012500 Substitution Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013216 Construction Process Schedules 013300 Submittal Procedures 013513 Special Project Procedures for Leased Space Facilities 013516 Alteration Project Procedures 01450C Quality Control 01500C Temporary Facilities and Controls 01600C Product Requirements 017000 Execution Requirements 017329 Cutting and Patching 017423 017700 Final Cleaning Project Closeout >= DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 024120 Selective Demolition DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 035416 Cementitious Underlayment and Ramping Mortar DIVISION 04 MASONRY Reserved DIVISION 05 METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055100 Design-Build Steel Stairs 057000 Ornamental Metals DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 064116 Thermofoil-Clad Architectural Cabinets 064200 Wood Paneling - Owner Furnished DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 070151 Roofing Repair 078100 Applied Fireproofing 078139 Patching Existing Fireproofing CBC2022-0348 078413 Penetration Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants 1923 CALLE BARCELONA #138 APPLE INC: REMODEL EXISTING TENANT SPACE BACKSTAGE (5828 SF) 000110-1 2550120400 i0/25I2022 C BC2022 -0348 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 08 OPENINGS 080500 Common Requirements for Glazing 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Wood Clad Doors 083100 Access Doors and Panels 084226 Interior All-Glass Entrances 084429.23 Sliding Automatic Entrances 087000 Door Hardware 088000 Interior Glazing 088323 Glass Mirrors DIVISION 09 FINISHES 092200 Non-Structural Metal Framing 092713 Quartz (Owner Furnished / Contractor Installed in Sales Area) 092900 Gypsum Board 093013 Ceramic Tiling 093033 Stone Tiling j 095100 Acoustical Ceiling 095446 Acoustical Fabric Panel Ceiling Systems 096513 Resilient Base 096813 Tile Carpeting 097200 Wall Covering 097713 Acoustical Fabric Panel Wall Systems 098100 Acoustical Insulation 098129 Sprayed Cellulose Acoustical Insulation 098433 Fixed Sound Absorbing Wall Units 098436 Fixed Sound Absorbing Ceiling Units 098439 Suspended Sound Absorbing Ceiling Units 099000 Painting and Coating 099733 Concrete Sealer DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage 102613 Corner Guards 102623 Protective Wall Covering 102813 Toilet Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties 105613 Metal Storage Shelving 108000 Other Specialties DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 113100 Residential Appliances DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 122413 Roller Window Shades Nonfixed Furniture, Fixtures, And Equipment (FF&E) Owner Furnished/Owner Installed DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Reserved DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 142423 Hydraulic Passenger Elevators 000110 -2 OF 220 1011012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 20 BASIC MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND FIRE-PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS 200000 Basic Mechanical, Plumbing, And Fire-Protection Requirements DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 210000 Fire Suppression DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 220553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation 221005 Plumbing Piping 221006 Plumbing Piping Specialties 223000 Plumbing Equipment 224000 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230500 Common Work Results for HVAC 230514 Variable Frequency Motor Controllers 230548 Vibration Isolation 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23070C HVAC Insulation 230900 Control 232300 Refrigerant Piping 233113 Metal Ducts 233300 Duct Accessories 233301 Flexible Duct 233417 HVAC Power Ventilators 233600 Air Terminal Units 236200 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units 237413 Rooftop Package Units 237500 Air Handlers 238126 Split System Air Conditioners DIVISION 25 INTEGRATED AUTOMATION Reserved DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 260000 Electrical 262213 High Performance K-7 Dry-Type Transformers DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS Reserved DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Reserved END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-3 OF 220 10/10/2022 I APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011100— SUMMARY OF WORK 1.1 SUMMARY A. Project consists of construction of proposed Apple computer store as further described in the Contract Documents. 1. Items noted FOIO will be furnished and installed by Owner or under separate contract. B. Division 01: Where provisions of the agreement relate to project administration or work-related requirements of the Contract, those paragraphs are expanded in Division 01 - General Requirements. Owner! Contractor Construction Agreement and Division 01 - General Requirements contain information necessary for completion of every part of project. Where items of work are done under subcontracts, each item shall be subject to these conditions. C. Inspect portions of work already performed under this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent work. Where assembly involving several trades is called for on drawings, submit shop drawings showing the proposed interaction of related elements for Architect's review. Contractor responsible for proper operation of all systems. D. Prior to ordering materials for of each portion of the Work, investigate and verify site conditions and dimensions to ascertain that work is feasible as shown. Immediately notify Architect and Owner of problems with site conditions. E. Manufacturer's specifications and installation requirements referenced in Project Manual govern over the Specifications. 1.2 OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Owner has placed orders with suppliers for specific products. Specific products are to be furnished and paid for by Owner and installed by Contractor: 1. Refer to drawings for list of Owner's vendor-furnished products and systems. B. Owner's Responsibilities: Arrange for and deliver shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site, in accordance with Progress Schedule. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Contractor Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor. Submit claims for transportation damage. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, and missing items. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, service, and inspections, as required. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Designate delivery date for each product in Progress Schedule. Review Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. Submit to Architect with notification of any discrepancies or problems anticipated in use of product. Receive and unload products at site. Promptly inspect products jointly with Owner; record shortages, damage, and defective items. Handle products at site, including uncrating and storage. Protect products from exposure to elements and from damage. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products, as stipulated in respective Specification Section. Repair or replace any items damaged by Contractor. 011100-4 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.3 WORK RESTRICTIONS AND USE OF SITE AND PREMISES. A. Refer to Landlords Construction Manual, where applicable, and work letter (defines scope and assigns responsibilities to Landlord and Apple Inc). 1.4 REFERENCE INDUSTRY STANDARDS Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Irdustry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations o the United States." 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to the codes listed on the Drawings. Obtain copies and retain at Project site to b093000e available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS Titles to Divisions, Sections and paragraphs in these Contract Documents are introduced merely for convenience and shall not be taken as a correct or complete segregation of the several units of materials and labor. Owner will not assume responsibility either direct or implied, for omissions or duplications by Contractor or his subcontractors, due to real or alleged error in arrangement of matter in these Contract Documents. Specifications or drawings do not imply sub contract disciplines or division of work assignments. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. A masculine pronoun used in these Specifications, shall be considered to include the feminine and a neuter; and a neuter pronoun used herein shall be considered to include the masculine and feminine. Reference to material and equipment in singular quantity shall be intended to apply to as many such items as are required to complete an installation. 011100-5 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS C. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. 1. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the Drawings. - D. Definitions: 1. General: Basic Contract definitions are: "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. "Field Samples": Partial installation of selected materials installed at Project site as a standard of quality for Owner's and Architect's review and approval of visual features and workmanship. Field samples are portions of the work generally constructed in-place, completed first, and submitted for evaluation. Field Samples may be allowed to remain if approved. "Mock-ups": Full size assemblies that incorporate several materials or elements of construction erected for Owner's and Architect's review and approval of visual features and workmanship. Mock-ups represent quality of materials and workmanship required for Work. Mock-ups are not constructed in final location and are removed at end of construction unless specifically permitted to remain. E. Hazardous Materials: Owner requires, under terms of this Contract, that all products and materials proposed for use have been thoroughly investigated by Contractor, to ensure that products and materials containing asbestos and lead will not under any circumstances be furnished, used, or installed. Contractor, by executing this Contract, accepts responsibility for prohibiting materials or products containing asbestos from being used on this Project. Should Contractor furnish, use, or install any products or materials containing asbestos and lead, knowingly or otherwise Owner will consider that Contractor has not met requirements of this Contract. 011100-6 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS END OF SECTION 011100 011100 -7 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 012500 — SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 1.1 SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for product substitutions where substitutions are permitted. This Section applies to all technical Specification Sections and supplements the Owner I Contractor Construction Agreement. 1.2 DEFINITIONS Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the work, whether purchased for project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material", "equipment", "system", and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1.3 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST CONDITIONS A. Reason for Not Providing Specified Item Is: 1. Specified product cannot be provided and incorporated into work due to non-availability of the specified product through no fault of Contractor. Ill-timed ordering of product is not grounds for substitution request. Burden of proof for substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract document requirements remains with Contractor. B. Do not substitute Products unless a substitution request has been approved by Owner and Architect. C. Submit substitution requests on form provided by Architect. D. Document specified product and proposed substitution with complete data, including: Product identification, including name and address of manufacturer. Product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. Sample, if requested. Description of any anticipated effect that acceptance of proposed substitution will have on Progress Schedule, construction methods, or other items of Work. Description of any differences between specified product and proposed substitution. Difference in cost between specified product and proposed substitution. E. Burden of proof for substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Document requirements remains with Contractor. F. A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor: Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified Product. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified Product. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. Will reimburse Owner for design services associated with re-approval by authorities or revisions to Contract Documents to accommodate the substitution. 012600 - 8 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS G. Substitutions will not be considered if: They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or other submittals without submittal of a Substitution Request. They are indicated or implied in Requests for Information (RFI) without submittal of a Substitution Request. Approval will require substantial revision of Contract Documents without additional compensation to Architect. H. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format form provided by Architect. 1. Architects Action: Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. Architect may request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 working days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 working days of receipt of request, or 7 working days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 1. Form of acceptance: Change Order or Construction Change Directive. END OF SECTION 012500 012500 - 9 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.1 COORDINATION A. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved as needed, outlining special procedures required for coordination. 1. Include required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings; include Architect and Owner in distribution. B. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as possible. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. C. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated; coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. D. Administrative procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other Contractors to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of work. 1.2 PROJECT MEETINGS Schedule and administer weekly project Owner/Architect/Contractor conference calls throughout progress of work: Make physical arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, send out conference call call-in phone number and access code, preside over conference call, record minutes and distribute copies within two days to Owner, Architect, participants, and those affected. Attendance: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate to agenda; Owner, Architect, and Owner's consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. Suggested Agenda: Review of work progress, status of progress schedule and adjustments, delivery schedules, submittals, requests for information, maintenance of quality standards, pending changes and substitutions, and issues needing resolution. 1.3 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI) A. Adequately study and compare Contract Documents, and coordinate own work. B. Use the RFI to obtain information that cannot be accessed through research, document review, project meetings or any other reasonable means. RFI's shall address only information that does not already exist in a discernable form, or is not reasonably inferable from the documents. Contractor will be assessed cost of Architect's time and materials for unnecessary RFI's. C. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for information of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request information at project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI on an approved form. RFI's originate with Contractor. RFI's submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. Coordinate and submit RF1's in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor work or work of subcontractors. One topic per RFI. 013100- 10 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS D. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing further information and the following: Project name. Date. Name of Contractor. Name of Architect. RFI number, numbered sequentially. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the contract time or the contract sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. Contractor's signature. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, product data, shop drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. E. Submit electronically in electronic pdf format on standard form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. Submit attachments as electronic files in electronic pdf format. F. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow three working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. in the receiving Architect's time zone will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: Use of RFIs to justify claims for delays in construction schedule, claims that Contract Documents are inadequate, and claims that Architect is nonresponsive Requests for approval of submittals. Requests for approval of substitutions. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. Requests for adjustments in the contract time or the contract sum. 1) If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the contract time or the contract sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. G. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. H. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Include the following: Project name. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of Architect. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. RFI description. Date the RFI was submitted. 013100- 11 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Date Architects response was received. Identification of related minor change in the work, construction change directive, and proposal request, as appropriate. END OF SECTION 013100 013100 - 12 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 013216 - CONSTRUTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES 1.1 FORMAT Prepare progress schedule as a horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major portion of work or operation, identifying first work day of each week. Sequence of Listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions. 1.2 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. B. Identify each item by Specification Section number. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of work completed, as of the first day of each month. D. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, including: 1.. Dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. 2. Delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. E. Revisions: Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of each activity. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. F. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on progress schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect. 1.3 SUBMITTAL Submit initial progress schedule within 15 days after date of notice to proceed. Submit revised progress schedule with each application for payment. Submit electronically in electronic PDF format. 1.4 DISTRIBUTION Distribute copies of approved progress schedule to project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned parties. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in progress schedule. END OF SECTION 013216 013216 - 13 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Submittal form requirements. Contractors' submittal schedule. General requirements for submittals. Contractor responsibilities. Requirements for each type of submittal. Manufacturer's certificates. Shop drawings submittals schedule. B. This Section applies to all technical Specification Sections, and supplements the general and supplementary conditions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS Submittals for Review: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL FORM REQUIREMENTS A. Provide the following, as applicable, on each submittal: 1. The project title and number. 2. Present and previous submittal dates. 3. Contractor's submittal number. 4. Subcontract identification. 5. The names of: Contractor. Supplier. Manufacturer. 6. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 7. For each product, reference corresponding Specification Section and paragraph number. 8. A 6 by 4-inch blank space for Contractor and Architect stamps. B. Deliver submittals to the Owner and Architect in electronic format (PDF) at e-mail addresses listed in the project team on drawings. Include name of contact person identified at the time of agreement. C. Submittals in graphic form shall be clear readable copies with Contractor's original stamp. Facsimile submittals will not be accepted. 1.4 CONTRACTORS' SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE Make submittal to the Owner and Architect as required, causing no delay in the work. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, without affecting the construction schedule, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the contract time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 7 business days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 013300 - 14 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 business days for review of each resubmittal. Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. Note date and content of previous submittal. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. 4. Sequential review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 7 work days for initial review of each submittal. C. Make the following submittals to the Owner prior to starting construction and within 10 working days of the notice to proceed: Certificates of insurance. List of subcontractors and suppliers. Construction schedule. Products list. Description of methods. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. General: Prepare and submit SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW required by individual specification sections. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. a. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as shop drawings, not as product data. Shop Drawings: Prepare project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base shop drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD drawings is otherwise permitted. Samples: Submit samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. Do not submit a photocopy of a color chart or a printout of a color chart on a website for the Architect to use for color selection. B. Sustainable Design Documentation Submittals: 1. Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): ISO 14025, type III environmental declarations. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit informational submittals required by other Specification Sections. Number of Copies: Submit one copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in other Division 01 Sections. B. OFOI items: 1. Owner to provide submittal information, one copy to Architect, one copy to Contractor. C. OFCI items 1. Owner to provide submittal information, one copy to Architect, one copy to Contractor. D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification 013300 - 15 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for project. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014500. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements of Owner/Contractor Construction Agreement. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. Safety Data Sheets (SDS): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. Architect will not review submittals that include SIDS and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. Sustainable Design Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within [seven] [14] [30] [60] <Insert number> days of date established for [commencement of the Work] [the Notice to Proceed] [the Notice of Award], indicating how the following requirements will be met: 1. List of proposed products with Environmental Product Declarations. 0. Sustainable Design Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with sustainable design action plans. 1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTALS Make submittals to the Architect and Owner as indicated in action submittal schedule. Review submittals prior to submittal to the Architect or Owner. Verify specified requirements for products, field measurements, and field construction requirements. Stamp and sign each submittal as certification that the submittal has been reviewed by the Contractor. Submittals not stamped and signed by the Contractor will be returned by the Owner and Architect without review for resubmittal. Notify the Owner and Architect in writing, at time of submission, of all deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. 013300 - 16 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Make additional copies of approved submittals as necessary to implement the work. Review and approval of a submittal by the Owner and Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper fitting, finishing, quantities, and erection of the work in strict accordance with the contract requirements. Review and approval of a submittal by the Owner and Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for providing work not indicated on the submittal, but otherwise required for the completion of the work. Do not fabricate or erect work prior to approval of the submittals. Should discrepancies become evident, immediately notify Owner and Architect for resolution before proceeding with shop work. Incorporation of substitutions into submittals will be considered cause for rejection of the submittal. Submittals will be reviewed by the Owner and Architect for conformance to the design concept, only. Owner and Architect's review of vendor designed items shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with specified performance requirements. If the Contractor fails to review shop drawings, product data, or samples to determine their responsiveness to the Contract Documents, or fails to substantially respond to Owner and Architect's review comments prior to resubmittal, or if he makes submittals which substantially alter the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the charges of the Architect for extra services required to review such submittals. 1.8 PRODUCTS LIST A. Complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1.9 PRODUCT DATA Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. include manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Submit the number of copies which Contractor requires, plus one copy which will be retained by Owner and Architect. Modify product data and installation instructions to delete information which is not applicable to the work. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS Submit shop drawings required by individual Sections of the Specifications, and as otherwise required on action submittal schedule. Illustrate fully the requirements of the specifications and the contract drawings, and accurately show quantities, kinds of materials, methods of assembly, and all data required for fabrication, erection, and installation. Show the relationship of adjoining work, relevant field conditions and dimensions; coordinate with affected subcontractors and suppliers if in conflict. Number of Copies: One in electronic PDF format to the Owner and Architect for review. The Owner and Architect will return one copy to Contractor with corrections, notations and Owner and Architect's stamp indicating action to be taken. 013300 - 17 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS In the case of rejected shop drawings, the Owner and Architect will keep one copy and return two prints to the Contractor for use in the preparation of a revised reproducible for resubmittal. Use of Contract Drawings: Except as follows, do not use Contract Drawings for Shop Drawings. 2. Electronic data of portions of the Contract Documents may be available for use as basis for preparation of shop drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for subsequent distribution of such information to subcontractors and suppliers. Request documents by submitting an executed copy of the "Agreement for Payment and Use of Electronic Data" form, Section 006323 obtained from the Architect of Record. Use of such documents implies Contractor's and subcontractor's agreement to the terms described on the form. Fully describe requirements for each request. a. Release of CADD information will be restricted to the following categories: Architectural floor plans. Reflected ceiling plans. Exterior elevations. Structural framing plans. b. The CADD database will be generated on PC hardware with Revit and AutoCAD software. Architect has the capability to format CADD output to meet capabilities of all major platforms and major media types. c. When requesting CADD databases, specify the output form required. 1.11 SAMPLES Submit samples as specified in the technical Sections and Drawings submittal schedule. Include identification on each sample, giving full information. Submit the number of samples specified in the technical sections. Where quantity is not specified, submit three samples. One will be retained by the Owner and Architect. Unless specified otherwise, submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for Owner and Architect's selection. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work. 1.12 ARCHITECTS ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Submittals for Review: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will electronically stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: El REVIEW NOT REQUIRED El SUBMITTAL NOT RESPONSIVE OR INCOMPLETE El NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN 0 REVISE AND RESUBMIT El INCORPORATE NOTED CORRECTIONS IN THE WORK C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. Phased submittals for items such as reinforcing steel, post-tension cable, electrical 013300 - 18 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS switch gear, and the like that can be reviewed in discrete packages are acceptable and will be reviewed. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. 1.13 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW SCHEDULE: PRODUCT DATA, SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES Owner is responsible for verifying submittal duration is appropriate for scope of project [Edit per project. Coordinate with final Table of Contents] CONTRACTOR FURNISHED SUBMITTALS Section Description Requirements Product Data Shop Drawings Samples 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 035416 Cementitious Underlayment 051200 Structural Steel Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055100 Design-Build Steel Stairs 057000 Ornamental Metals 064116 Thermofoil-Clad Architectural Cabinets 078100 Applied Fireproofing 078139 Patching Existing Fireproofing 078413 Penetration firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants 080500 Exterior All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 083100 Access Doors and Panels . 084226 Interior All-Glass Entrances 087000 Door Hardware 088000 Interior Glazing 088323 Glass Mirrors 093013 Ceramic Tiling 095100 Acoustic Ceilings 098126 Sprayed Cellulose Acoustical Insulation 098433 Fixed Sound Absorbing Wall Units 098436 Fixed Sound Absorbing Ceiling Units 098439 Suspended Sound Absorbing Ceiling Units 097200 Wall Coverings 099000 Painting and Coating • ____________ ____________ 099733 Concrete Sealer 101400 Signage 102636 Protective Wall Coverings 102813 Toilet Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties 105613 Metal Storage Shelving • • ___________ 113100 Residential Appliances 122413 Roller Window Shades • ___________ ___________ 142423 Hydraulic Passenger Elevator . . . 210000 Fire Sprinkler System Drawings and Calculations 013300 - 19 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 220400 Plumbing Fixtures 230500 HVAC Equipment 230548 Vibration Isolation ____________ • ____________ 230593 Final TAB Report 230900 Controls • • ___________ 233113 Metal Ducts 260000 Lighting Fixtures and Drivers 260000 Electrical Panels and Equipment 260000 Security/Data/AV Devices • ____________ ____________ 263100 Photovoltaic Collectors OWNER FURNISHED SUBMITTALS Section Description Requirements Product Data Shop Drawings Samples 064200 Wood Paneling . . . 092713 Quartz or Glass-Fiber Reinforced Concrete . • - Sales Area Fixtures - OF/01 END OF SECTION 013300 013300 - 20 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 013513 - SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR LEASED SPACE FACILITIES 1.1 INTENT A. Due to nature of the facility, special procedures shall be followed by the Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers and others having access to the site during the course of the work. B. Restrictions related to use of site: comply with requirements of this Section to minimize: Disruption of adjacent tenant operations. Inconvenience to adjacent tenant personnel. Security: Comply with security requirements of Landlord. C. Comply with procedures and requirements specified in this Section and as otherwise required to maintain the normal degree of security and safety for Landlord staff, tenants, Contractor's personnel, the Architect, and the public. 1.2 DEFINITIONS Owner: Means occupants (tenant) of leased space; Apple Inc. <insert mall name> and its personnel. Owner Representative or Development Manager (DM): Means contact person of the Owner identified above, with respect to requirements of this Section and all other facets of the work which directly or indirectly affect the operation of the facility. Owner Representative is not a representative of the Landlord. Landlord: Means shopping center or building Owner or Landlord's designated representative as indicated. Landlord's Personnel: Means personnel appointed to represent the interests of the Landlord, and who will have the authority to make decisions on behalf of the Landlord. Contractor's Personnel: Means all persons directly and indirectly employed by the Contractor and who require access to the facility for performance of the work. Subcontractor Personnel: Means all persons directly and indirectly employed by the subcontractor and who require access to the facility for performance of the work. 1.3 LANDLORD'S REPRESENTATIVE A. As indicated in drawing project directory. 1.4 CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL Throughout the course of construction, the Contractor, major subcontractors, and such other subcontractors as deemed appropriate for the stage of construction, shall designate and advise the Landlord of a contact person and backup contact person for working hours and nonworking hours in the event of emergencies. Update this list weekly during Owner/Architect/Contractor (OAC) conference call and provided to the Landlord when revised. Landlord will approve format of list. 1.5 COMMUNICATION Communication shall, in the first instance, be with the Landlord's authorized representative who will in turn communicate with the Owner's representative or development manager. Communicate directly with Owner's representative only if: A concern arises which affects the operation of the facility, and Such concern requires prompt attention, and Landlord's authorized representative cannot be contacted. 013513 -21 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Acceptance of any instructions given by Owners representative under circumstances indicated above, shall be at Contractors discretion and at their own risk. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event of an emergency involving safety, comply immediately with all relevant instructions given by Owner's representative. 1.6 REFER TO LANDLORDS CONSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR Use of premises. Leased space regulations. System shutdowns. Coring and drilling. END OF SECTION 013513 013513 - 22 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL 1.1 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. 1.2 WORKMANSHIP Comply with industry standards, except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. Perform work with persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. 1.3 SPECIAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES Make no attachment to structural concrete or steel members in the building in such a way as to overload or impair the structural integrity of the member. Steel decking: Where fastening into bottom of steel floor and roof decking is required, fasten only into lower flutes. Do not use fasteners in steel deck which penetrate more than 1 inch. Where anchorage to structural framing members is impractical, supports for items such as suspended ceiling systems, ductwork, and aluminum conduit 1-1/2 inches or less may be supported from steel roof decking by sheet metal screws, screwed into the bottom flute of the roof deck, and in sufficient quantity to adequately support the load. Equipment supports, hangers for mechanical piping and other items requiring more than incidental support, shall not be secured to the roof decking. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES A. When required by individual Specifications Section, submit, in duplicate, manufacturer's certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.5 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in respective Specification Sections, require manufacturer or supplier to have qualified personnel provide on-site observations and recommendations. Observe field conditions, including conditions of surfaces and installation. Observe quality of workmanship. Provide recommendations to assure acceptable installation and workmanship. Where required, start, test, and adjust equipment as applicable. B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect listing observations and recommendations. 1.6 FIELD SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS Provide field samples and mock-ups as specified in the individual Specification Sections in Divisions 02 to 49. When the initial field samples or mock-ups is unacceptable to the Architect, provide additional mock-ups until approval is obtained. For each field sample and mock-up, provide conditions which will replicate the conditions of the actual installation, including lighting, to the greatest reasonable extent. 1. Field samples and mock-ups requiring special equipment may be erected at location having access to necessary equipment; coordinate with the Owner. 014500 - 23 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Approved field sample and mock-up shall be the standard of workmanship and materials for the remainder of the related work. Contractor may proceed with the work upon Owner's approval of the field sample and mock-up. Approved field samples and mock-ups may be used as part of project except where required otherwise in individual technical Specification Sections. 1.7 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Refer to Owner I Contractor Construction Agreement. 1.8 CONTRACTOR TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Contractor's Convenience Testing: Inspection and testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. END OF SECTION 014500 014500 - 24 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 015000— TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide temporary construction facilities and temporary controls as required to conform to applicable authorities and as required to complete project in accordance with Contract Documents. 1. Authorities: Contact governing authorities to establish extent of temporary facilities and temporary controls required by authorities. 1.2 ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING Provide branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction-type power cords. Provide lighting for construction operations. Permanent lighting may be used during construction; maintain lighting and make routine repairs. Take measures to conserve energy. 1.3 HEAT AND VENTILATION A. Take measures to conserve energy. 1.4 WATER Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by use of hoses. Conserve water use whenever possible. Provide and maintain required sanitary facilities and enclosures. 1. Where Owner permits use of new sanitary facilities during construction operations maintain in sanitary condition. 2 Provide daily cleaning. Coordinate with Owner's cleaning operations. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Fire Protection: Maintain on-site fire protection facilities as required by applicable authorities, and insurance requirements. 1.6 CLOSURES A. Temporary Closures: Provide temporary weathertight closures for exterior openings for acceptable working conditions, for protection for materials, to protect interior materials from dampness, for temporary heating, and to prevent unauthorized entry. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks. Paint surfaces exposed to view on exterior. 1.7 BARRIERS Barriers: Provide barriers as required to prevent public entry to construction areas and to protect adjacent areas from damage from construction operations. Barricades: Provide barricades as indicated on drawings. Barricades: Provide barricades as required by governing authorities. Provide barriers around trees designated to remain. Protect against vehicular traffic, stored materials, dumping, chemically injurious materials, and puddling or continuous running water. Provide barricades around openings in floors and roof decks. 1.8 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; recycle or dispose of offsite. 015000 - 25 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations Remove excess debris from cavities which are to be concealed in the finished work. END OF SECTION 015000 015000 - 26 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 016000 - PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 1.1 GENERAL PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS Products include material, equipment, and systems. Comply with specifications, referenced standards, and applicable codes and regulations as minimum requirements. Provide new materials except as specifically allowed by Contract Documents. Materials to be supplied in quantity within a Specification Section shall be by one manufacturer, shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable. Provide equipment and systems composed of materials from a single manufacturer except where otierwise recommended by equipment or systems manufacturer or where otherwise indicated in Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with industry standards and applicable codes except when more restrictive tolerances or requirements indicate more rigid standards or precise workmanship. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. Install products straight, level, and in correct relationship to adjacent materials, with hairline joints, free of rough, sharp and potentially hazardous edges. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. 1. Seismic Anchors: Conform to code requirements. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Tansport products by methods to avoid product damage, deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection; periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling and prevent damage. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. Immediately remove from project products damaged, wet, stained, and products with mold and products with mildew. 1. Take special care to prevent absorbent products such as gypsum board and acoustical ceiling units from becoming wet. END OF SECTION 016000 016000 -27 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 1.1 FIELD ENGINEERING Establish lines and levels by use of recognized engineering survey practices. Locate and protect control and reference points. 1.2 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Experienced Installers: Installers to have minimum five years of successful experience installing items similar to those required for project, except for individuals in training under direct supervision of experienced installer. 1.3 EXAMINATION Acceptance of Conditions: Beginning installation of a product signifies installer has examined substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with manufacturer requirements for tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit work properly; recheck measurements prior to installing each product. 1. Where portions of work are to fit to other construction verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication; allow for cutting and patching in order to avoid delaying work. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items-shown diagrammatically on drawings. 1.4 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Where manufacturer's information notes special recommendations in addition to installation instructions, comply with both recommendations and instructions. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct at Project site. 1. Attendance: Installers and suppliers. B. Locate work and components accurately, in correct alignment and elevation. Make vertical work plumb and horizontal work level. Install components to allow space for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. C. Install products at time and under conditions to ensure best possible results; maintain conditions required for product performance until substantial completion. D. Conduct operations so no part of work is subject to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions. E. Securely anchor permanent construction in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of work. F. Allow for building movement including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Make joints of uniform width; arrange joints as indicated, for best visual effect where not otherwise indicated; fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints except where otherwise indicated. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Protect products subject to deterioration with impervious cover. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation and trapping water. 016000 - 28 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Take care to use protective covering and blocking materials that do not soil, stain, or damage materials being protected. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage from traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed. Protect interior materials from water damage; immediately remove wet materials from site to prevent growth of mold and mildew on site. END OF SECTION 017000 016000 - 29 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Cuffing and patching of new work as a normal part of the construction process and due to ill- timed work. Contractor responsible for cutting, fitting and patching required to complete work and to: Make its parts fit together properly. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. Remove and replace defective work. Remove and replace work not conforming to Contract Documents. Remove samples of installed work as required for testing. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of executing cutting or alteration that affects: Work of Owner or separate Contractor. Structural integrity of project. Integrity or effectiveness of weather exposed or moisture resistant elements or systems. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. B. Include in Request: 1. Identification of project. 2. Description of work affected. 3. Necessity for cuffing or patching. 4. Effect of cuffing or patching on work of Owner or separate Contractor, or on structural, weatherproof, or visual integrity of project. 5. Description of proposed work: Scope of cutting and patching. Subcontractor and trades to execute work. Products proposed to be used. Extent of refinishing. 6. Alternate to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, if applicable. 8. Written permission of any separate Contractor whose work will be affected. C. If conditions of work or schedule necessitate a change of material from that originally installed, submit substitution request in accordance with Section 012500. D. Submit written notice to Owner designating date and time work will be uncovered. 1.3 MATERIALS Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. Where specifications and standards have not been provided, provide materials and fabrication consistent with quality of project and intended for commercial construction. Provide new materials for cuffing and patching unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 PREPARATION A. Examine existing conditions of work, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching. 017329 - 30 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS After uncovering work, examine conditions affecting installation of new products or performance of work. Provide protection for other portions of project. Provide protection from elements. 1.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting to include excavating, fitting, and patching of Work required to: Make several parts fit properly. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. Remove and replace defective work. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. Provide routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. B. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances, and finishes. C. Execute cutting and demolition by methods that will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work. D. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods that will prevent damage to other Work, and will prevent settlement. E. Employ original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: Weather exposed or moisture resistant elements. Sight exposed finished surfaces. F. Restore work that has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish: Continuous surfaces: To nearest intersections. Assembly: Refinish entirely. H. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes: For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. END OF SECTION 017329 017329 -31 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 017423— FINAL CLEANING 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform final cleaning to work of this contract prior to final inspection for certification of substantial completion. Conduct cleaning and waste removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. Employ experienced or professional cleaning personnel skilled in commercial cleaning procedures. clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Leave project clean and ready for occupancy and use by Owner. Clean surfaces free of dust, fingerprints, dirt, soiling, and other residue remaining from work of this contract. Use cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface material to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning materials damaging to surfaces or creating hazards to health or property. 1. Owner furnished stainless steel finishes - contact Owner for specific cleaning requirements. Conform to regulatory authorities for safety procedures and environmental regulations. Do not discharge excess water or volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. transport waste materials from site in legal manner. Do not use Landlord's nor Owner's trash facilities. 1.2 FINAL INTERIOR CLEANING A. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of substantial completion for entire project or for a portion of project: 1. Damp mop concrete floors clean in unoccupied spaces. 2. Hard surface floors shall be free of dirt streaks; no dirt remaining in corners, behind doors, or where dirt is picked up with the dustpan after sweeping operations. 3. Clean resilient floors with damp mop to remove surface dirt and dust. buff dry to bring sheen to surface. 4. Vacuum using HEPA filter vacuum cleaner. Vacuum carpet. Vacuum walls, ceilings, supply ceiling diffusers, and light fixtures. Vacuum stair landings, treads and corners of treads free of loose dirt or dust streaks after sweeping. 5. Base shall be free of watermarks, scars from cleaning equipment striking the surface, and splashing from the cleaning solution and rinse water. Surfaces shall be dry, and the corners and crevices clean after mopping. 6. Leave window sills, top of door rails, door and borrowed lite frames, window frames, base, columns, dust free. 7. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 8. Remove labels that are not permanent. 9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 10. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 11. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 017423 - 32 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. Leave sanitary receptacles empty except for a new liner. Leave toilet seats up after cleaning, free of spots, stains, including seat hinges. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters, clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grilles. 161. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 17. Leave project clean and ready for occupancy. END OF SECTION 017423 017423 -33 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 017700- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Closeout procedures. Adjusting. Project record documents. Operation and maintenance data. Warranties. Spare parts and maintenance materials. Starting of systems. Demonstration and instructions. 1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Final Inspection: Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents and ready for Architects inspection. If Architect performs reinspection due to failure of Work to comply with claims of status of completion made by Contractor, Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services and will deduct the amount of such compensation from final payment to Contractor. B. Submit final Application for Payment showing original Contract Sum, adjustments, previous payments and sum remaining due. C. Closeout Submittals: Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. Certificate of Occupancy. Project Record Documents. Operation and Maintenance Data. Warranties. Keys and keying schedule. Spare parts and maintenance materials. Evidence of payment of subcontractors and suppliers. Final lien waiver. Certificate of insurance for products and completed operations. Consent of Surety to final payment. 1.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain following record documents on site; record actual revisions to the Work: Drawings. Specifications. Addenda. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. Material Safety Data Sheets. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. 017700 - 34 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS D. Make entries neatly and accurately. E. Label each set or volume with "PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS, project title, and description of contents. Organize contents according to Project Manual table of Contents. Provide table of contents for each volume. F. Drawings: Mark each item to record actual construction including: Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. Field changes of dimension and detail. Details not on original Drawings. G. Specifications: Mark each Product section description of actual ProdLcts installed, including the following: Manufacturer's name and product model and number. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. H. Shop Drawings: Mark each item to record actual construction including: Field changes of dimension and detail. Details not on original Shop Drawings. 1. Sjbmit electronically in Adobe PDF format along with final Application for Payment. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Identify as "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and title of project. B. Contents: 1. Directory: List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Operation and maintenance instructions: Arranged by system and subdivided by Specification Section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: Significant design criteria. List of equipment. Parts list for each component. Operating instructions. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Project documents and certificates including: Shop drawings and product data. HVAC balance reports. Certificates. Copies of warranties and bonds. C. Submittal: Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format at least 15 days prior to final inspection. Architect will notify Contractor of any required revisions after final inspection. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. 017700 - 35 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 4. Submit revised documents electronically in Adobe POE format within 10 days after final inspection. 1.6 WARRANTIES Execute and assemble documents from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. Include Table of Contents. Submit electronically in Adobe PDF format along with final Application for Payment. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.7 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide spare parts and maintenance materials in quantities specified in individual Specification Sections. B. Inspect spare parts and maintenance materials jointly with Owner: Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, and missing items. Obtain receipt from Owner prior to final payment. C. Packaging: Leave products in original packaging when possible. Supplement and reinforce original packaging when required to ensure safe transport and storage. Clearly mark containers to identify contents. 1.8 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Notify Owner and Architect at least seven days prior to startup of each system or piece of equipment. B. Prior to beginning startup verify that: Lubrication has been performed. Drive rotation, belt tension, control sequences, tests, meter readings, and electrical characteristics are within manufacturer's requirements. Utility connections and support components are complete and tested. C. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable manufacturer's representative or Contractor's personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. D. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to startup, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. E. Submit written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.9 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months. Utilize Operation and Maintenance Manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 017700 - 36 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Demonstrate startup, operation, control, adjustment, troubleshooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed upon times, at equipment location. Prepare and insert additional data in Operation and Maintenance Manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. END OF SECTION 017700 END OF DIVISION 01 017700 - 37 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02- EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 024120- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION NOT USED END OF DIVISION 02 024120 -38 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 03— CONCRETE SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cast-in-place concrete. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage. Concrete reinforcement. Underslab vapor barrier. Finishing monolithic interior slabs on grade. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) (www.fscus.org) STD-40-004 - Chain of Custody Standard. 1.3 SUMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: For each of the following. Portland cement. Fly ash. Slag cement. Blended hydraulic cement. Silica fume. Performance-based hydraulic cement Aggregates. Admixtures: 1) Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials, supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing conditions, and use of other admixtures. Color pigments. Fiber reinforcement. Vapor retarders. I. Floor and slab treatments. Liquid floor treatments. Curing materials. Retain first subparagraph below if co/or pigments are applicable to Project. 1) Include documentation from color pigment manufacturer, indicating that proposed methods of curing are recommended by color pigment manufacturer. Joint fillers. Repair materials. 2. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following: Mixture identification. Minimum 28-day compressive strength. Durability exposure class. Maximum w/cm. Calculated equilibrium unit weight, for lightweight concrete. Slump limit. Air content. Nominal maximum aggregate size. Steel-fiber reinforcement content. Synthetic micro-fiber content. 033000 - 39 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS k. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if permitted. Retain first two subparagraphs below if permeability-reducing admixture is applicable to any concrete mix design. I. Include manufacturers certification that permeability-reducing admixture is compatible with mix design. Include certification that dosage rate for permeability-reducing admixture matches dosage rate used in performance compliance test. Intended placement method. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 3. Shop Drawings: a. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1) Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) for concrete; Type Ill - EPD with Third party certification. a. Ready-mix concrete. Certified Wood. Ultra-Low Emitting Formaldehyde for wood. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. Concrete work is subject to special testing and inspection as specified in 014500. Notify Architect at least 48 hours before concrete is poured. Allowable Tolerances: Fabrication and placement tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 117. 1.5 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work such that slabs on grade with vapor barriers under are installed only after the building has a functioning roof and is sufficiently enclosed to prevent saturation of the fill material under the vapor barrier. 1.6 FORM MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to ACI 301. B. Plywood: Certified to FSC STD-40-004. APA rated high density overlay or medium density overlay, Plyform Class 1, EXT. APA B-B Plyform Class 1, EXT. Basis of Design Source: Roseburg PourMor Plywood. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500. C. Form Ties: Snap-off metal; metal washer ends. 1.7 REINFORCING Reinforcing Steel: As indicated on the structural drawings. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM Al 85 or A497; mesh and wire sizes as indicated on the structural drawings. For use in slabs, furnish flat sheets, not rolls. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, And Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete. 033000 - 40 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS D. Fabrication: Reinforcement: Bend reinforcement cold. Fabricate and detail to shapes and dimensions shown on drawings in accordance with CRSI manual of standard practice and with fabricating tolerances in accordance with ACI 117. Welding: Welding or tacking of reinforcing bars is not permitted unless specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. When welding of reinforcement is indicated and required, provide welds in accordance with AWS D1.4. 1.8 CONCRETE MATERIALS As indicated on the Structural Drawings. Cement: ASTM C150, Normal - Type II Portland, grey color. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F. Normal Weight Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 1.9 ADMIXTURES A. Water Reducer Normal: ASTM C494, Type A; Master Builders Inc. "Pozzolith/Polyheed," Euclid Chemical Co. "Eucon WR 75," or Owner approved. 1.10 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Acrylic type; Sonneborn "Sonnocrete", W.R. Grace "Duraweld C", Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex-Con", or Owner approved. B. Non-shrink Grouts: Dry pack or ASTM C1107, Grade B; non-shrink non-catalyzed natural aggregate grout; minimum compressive strength of 7000 psi at 28 days; 25 to 30 second flow when tested in accordance with ASTM C939 at 45 to 90 degrees f; cement gray in color; Master Builders Inc. "Masterliow 928," Euclid Chemical Co. "Hiflow Grout," or Owner approved. C. Form Coatings: Commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces when applied to forms or form liners. D. Curing Materials: Waterproof Sheet Material: Waterproof paper in accordance with ASTM C171; reinforced waterproof kraft paper. Mats and Burlap: Fabric covering composed of quilted polyethylene sheeting laminated to outer covering of burlap, cotton, or other approved fabric; outer covering shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Approved covering materials: Reef Industries Inc. (Houston TX; 713-507-4251) "Transguard 4000." Sika Greenstreak (St. Louis MO; 636-225-9400) "UltraCure NCF." PNA Construction Technologies (800-542-0214) "HydraCure MS." E. Epoxy for Anchors and Dowels: As indicated. F. Underslab Vapor Barrier: ASTM E1745, Class A; one of the following: "Stego Wrap 10 mil Class A" by Stego Industries, LLC (877-464-7834). 'Vapor Block 10" by Raven Industries (800-635-3456). "Griffolyn T-105" by Reef Industries, Inc. (800-231-6074). "Vapor-mat" by W.R. Meadows, Inc. (847-214-2100). "Florprufe 120" by W.R. Grace. 033000 -41 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.11 CONCRETE MIX Compressive Strength: As indicated. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. All concrete shall contain the specified or otherwise approved water reducing admixture. Provide fly ash at minimum 15 percent by weight of cementitious materials. Redi-Mix Design. Basis of Design Source: Central Concrete, a U.S. Concrete Company. 1.12 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 1.13 FORMWORK ERECTION Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork. Align form joints. Use plywood forms, unless other systems are approved by the Architect. Use form coating on forms in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify that form coatings will not affect the bond of subsequent concrete surface treatments. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117. 1.14 REINFORCEMENT Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on the drawings at points of minimum stress. Provide laps and concrete cover as indicated in the drawings. Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened except as specifically permitted. Reinforcement shall not be cut in the field except as specifically permitted. 1.15 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER Place, protect, and repair vapor retarder sheets according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions under all interior slabs-on-grade. Install vapor retarder sheet over compacted granular base course. Roll down vapor retarder in widest practical width, parallel with direction of concrete pour, and with minimum number of joints. Lap vapor retarder over footings, turn up to full slab thickness, and seal with pressure sensitive tape to foundation wall. Overlap joints 6 inches minimum and seal with pressure sensitive tape. Seal pipe penetrations with vapor retarder or prefabricated boots and pressure sensitive tape. field fabricate boots and other shapes as necessary to seal vapor retarder against vapor penetration. 033000 -42 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS G. Place concrete slab-on-grade directly over installed vapor retarder. Do not install granular fill layer over vapor retarder. 1.16 PLACING CONCRETE In accordance with ACI 301. Bonding Agent: Mix thoroughly and apply strictly in accord with the manufacturers instructions; do not use when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. Place concrete in contact immediately while bonding agent is still tacky. 1.17 SLABS A. Preparation of subgrade Ensure rough grading and backfilling has brought subgrade to required elevations. Fill trenches, soft spots and hollows with additional fill. Place and level structural fill to a compacted depth indicated on the drawings, true to lines and levels. Compact to 95 percent of standard dry density per ASTM D1557 B. Control joints for slabs on grade: Coordinate with control joint requirements for terrazzo flooring in sales area. See Section 096626. Make joints straight; perpendicular or parallel to building lines and slab edges, as appropriate. Control joints shall be saw cut, unless indicated otherwise. Complete sawing within 12 hours after placement. Control joints shall penetrate the slab a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of the slab and shall be 3/16 inch in width minimum. Coat concrete jointed with new concrete with concrete bonding compound. Place control joints at the locations indicated, except when not indicated locate at 32 times the slab thickness. C. Tooled Joints for Slabs on Grade: Provide tooled joints to match control joints. Tooled joints do not need to penetrate the slab 1/4 the depth of the slab. D. Construction Joints: Place at either expansion or control joint locations for slab on grade construction. E. Curing: Moisture cure all concrete for a minimum of 7 days, unless approved or specified otherwise. Use waterproof sheet material mats and burlap at surfaces to receive subsequent bonded finish materials, including sealing compound. Maintain concrete temperatures above 50 degrees F. F. Monolithic Slab Finishes: Full trowel finish slab surfaces indicated to remain exposed in the finished work unless specified or directed otherwise. Full trowel finish slab surfaces indicated to be covered with resilient flooring. Light steel trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces scheduled to receive tile, underbed or other similar bonded materials. G. Sealer: After slab is completely cured and dry, apply curing/sealing compound to interior slabs scheduled to receive sealer. Comply with manufacturer's published data for coverage rates for uniform semi-gloss appearance. 033000 -43 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS H. Finish concrete to achieve the following tolerances: Under epoxy terrazzo on cured underbed: Ff20 (15 local) and Fl 15. (10 local) Under thin-set ceramic tile and resilient finishes: Ff35 (24 local) and Fl 25 (17 local), approximately 3/32 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION 033000 033000 - 44 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 035416 - CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT AND RAMPING MORTAR 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Poured cementitious type floor underlayment; not intended as a finished traffic surface, suitable as underlayment for indicated finished flooring installations. Ramps and tapers as necessary to correct levels between dissimilar finishes. Interior concrete ramping mortar to receive concrete tint to match existing unsealed concrete slab. B. Related Sections: 1. 099733 - Concrete Sealer. 1.2 SUMBITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Installers: Installation shall be by approved applicator using approved mixing and placement equipment. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Uiderlayment: Pourable cementitious, high strength, fast setting, norshrink underlayment. 1. Products: Ardex, Inc./K-15. Prospec/Level Set 300. 2. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4100 psi at 28 days, ASTM C349. B. Ramping Mortar: One of the following preapproved products: 1. Ardex Engineered Cements ERMTM Exterior Ramp Mortar" with 'ARDEX EP 2000TM PRIMER." a. Compressive Strength: Minimum 8200 psi at 28 days, ASTM C109. 2 ARDEX Engineered Cements "ARDEX FDMTM Full Depth Repair Mortar" with "ARDEX P 71 TM PRIMER." a. Compressive Strength: Minimum 7000 psi at 28 days, ASTM C109. C. Aggregates: Washed mason, mortar or plaster sand, and other clean nondeleterious aggregates as recommended by underlayment manufacturer as required for indicated thickness of underlayment. D. Primer: As recommended by the underlayment and topping manufacturer for absorbent concrete substrate. E. Water: Clean and free from impurities and substances deleterious to underlayment. F. Tint: Color match existing concrete prior to sealing for monolithic appearance. 1.5 PREPARATION Inspect subfloor for structurally sound condition required for type of underlayment and conditions under which work will be performed. 1. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions. Prepare substrates to produce sound, dry surface as required for proper bonding of underlayment and ramp mortar in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove stud wall base plates in doors and other openings. 035416 -45 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Prevent leakage at cracks; fill cracks and voids with quick setting drywall patching material as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Ensure area to be poured is clean and free of mud, oil, grease or other contaminants. 1.6 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT Priming: Prime in accordance with underlayment manufacturer's recommendations. Mix underlayment ramp materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of placement operation employed; do not exceed amounts of water determined by manufacturer. Keep mixing and placement equipment clean and free of hardened lumps of cementitious materials. Provide adequate equipment and personnel to ensure uniform, continuous flow of underlayment at point of delivery without segregation and loss of material. Schedule application as late as possible during construction to avoid damage by heavy trades. Pour should be scheduled after installation of drywall to minimize damage to installed underlayment. Install underlayment in one layer at minimum thickness recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Do not interrupt placement of underlayment until entire Section is completed; ensure no slurry is placed against underlayment that has obtained initial set, except at authorized joints. Immediately after placement, screed and level to required thickness and trowel to smooth, even plane. Clean spatter from supporting structure and walls before spatter sets. Provide adequate ventilation and heat, if necessary, after placement of underlayment to ensure complete drying of underlayment. 1.7 INSTALLATION - RAMP MATERIAL Examine substrates and conditions under which materials will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper sequence of construction. Protect adjacent areas from contact due to mixing and handling of materials. Mixing: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions. Application: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions Curing Ramp Material: Keep surface damp for 48 hours with curing blanket. Do not use solvent- based curing compounds. 1.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Testing: Test, record results, and identify each set of test specimens relating to area underlayment is placed. 1. Compressive Strength: Test in accordance with ASTM C472 testing procedures, using 2 inch by 2 inch cube molds. 1.9 PROTECTION During construction, place temporary wood planking over underlayment wherever it will be subjected to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads. Replace damaged work. 035416 -46 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.10 CLEANING A. Remove excess material before material cures. If material has cured, remove using mechanical methods that will not damage substrate. END OF SECTION 035416 END OF DIVISION 03 035416 -47 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 05— METALS SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Elements indicated on the structural drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, fasteners, cambers, loads. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. indicate net weld lengths. Indicate types and locations of field welds. 2. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type Ill - EPD with Third party certification. Recycled Content: Indicate recycled content; indicate percentage of pre-consumer and post-consumer recycled content per unit of product. Indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of product included in project. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate the percentage of recycled content product in the assembly by weight. If recycled content product is part of an assembly, indicate relative dollar value of recycled content product to total dollar value of assembly. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE The work of this Section is subject to testing and inspection as specified in Section 014500. Use only certified welders approved by the project jurisdictional authority. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, work shall comply with AWS and AISC standards. Refer to structural drawings - general structural notes for wind loads, seismic loads, dead loads, live loads, and additional requirements. Epoxy Embedments: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations during preparation and installation of grouted bolts and reinforcement bars. 1.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL Types as indicated on the structural drawings. Basis of Design Source: Gerdau. 1.5 ACCESSORIES Nonshrink Grout: Master Builders "Master Flow 713," Sonneborn "Sonogrout," or Owner approved; non-shrink, non-metallic grout in compliance with 1 ASTM C107 - Grade C. Welding Electrodes: E-70 series, low hydrogen, appropriate for use. Shop Organic Zinc Primer: Series 394 Perimeprime" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400). 051200 -48 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.6 FABRICATION Fabricate structural steel items in accordance with AISC and AWS standards and in accordance with approved shop drawings. Properly mark and match mark all materials for field assembly. fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling. Shop Assembly: Fabricate units in as large a part or section as practicable. Shop Primer Application: Prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified below. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1; commercial blast ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 10. Spray apply one coat organic zinc primer and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide additional stripe coat at all outside corners including penetration edges. Maintain at least one coat of primer at all times during installation, immediately patch damaged coatings. Apply organic zinc primer to all steel. Hold back primer at surface to receive bolted connections, welds, or embedment in concrete, except where approved by the primer manufacturer. 1.7 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 1.8 ERECTION Embedded Items: Provide anchor bolts and templates, and other items as indicated, to other Sections for installation prior to placement of cast-in concrete. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide as required with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads, remove temporary members when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Erect structural steel in accordance with approved shop drawings and AISC "Code of Standard Practice," Section 7. Base Plate Grouting: Set on leveling nuts to accurate elevations and grout solid with non-shrink grout. Welds shall be in accordance with AWS Dli. Cut holes by drilling only. Tolerances: Maximum deviation from plumb, level, and alignment shall not exceed 1 to 500. Cleaning and Touch-Up: Clean steel of oil or other contaminants as specified under fabrication. Columns, beams, girders, and other members which are to receive sprayed-on fireproofing shall be cleaned free of loose rust, heavy mill scale, oil, dirt or other foreign substances prior to application of fireproofing materials. 051200 -49 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 3. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch-up factory primed surfaces with same primer as used in shop. END OF SECTION 051200 051200 - 50 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Stock and custom fabricated metal fabrications complete in respect to function as intended including items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, 51 rips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel as defined by AISC or metal systems specified elsewhere. Continuous slot metal channel systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design slotted metal channel framing, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following: Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. Elevator machine beams. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. Prefabricated building columns. Elevator pit sump covers. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36. B. Continuous Roll Formed Slot Metal Channel Systems and Steel Fittings: 1-5/8-inch channel width series, cold formed of ASTM Al Oil SS, Grade 33, 12 gage (0.105 inch) strip steel; single channel and double back to back channel. Finish: Rust inhibiting acrylic enamel paint electro-deposited and baked; Fed Standard 595a, color number 14109 (Dark Limit V-) Perma-Green II. Acceptable Manufacturers: Member company of the metal framing manufacturers association. C. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM Al 53. D. Grout: Nonshrink meeting ASTM Cl 107, nonmetallic, premixed, factory packaged, ronstaining, noncorrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition. 1. Manufacturers: Master Builders/Masterfiow 713. Five Star Products, Inc/Five Star Grout. Bostik Construction Products/Upcon Grout. Protex Industries, Inc/Propak. E. Fasteners and Rough Hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinc-coated fasteners where built into exterior walls. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded. 055000 - 51 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS G. Interior Primer: Modified alkyd type (VOC compliant); lead and chromate free; gray/green or white color; one of the following unless approved otherwise. "Azeron Primer Series 88HS" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400). "Amercoat 5105" byAmeron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951). "Carbocoat 150UP" by Carboline Company (St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645). 1.5 FABRICATION Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces, and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32-inch uniform radius. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications; fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication. Finishes: Shop prime paint interior work unless otherwise noted; comply with requirements of Section 099000 for preparation and priming. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to applying finish. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding. 1.6 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Field measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible; do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where necessary. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1.7 ERECTION A. Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments which are not part of scheduled work. perform necessary cutting and altering for installation and coordination with other work. B. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Supply items required to be cast into or embedded in other materials to appropriate trades. Ensure alignment with adjacent construction; coordinate with related work to ensure no interruption in installation. C. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment. D. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding; hide bolts and screws whenever possible, where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings. 1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS Dli. 055000 - 52 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS After installation, touch up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use primer consistent with shop coat or recommended for galvanized surfaces, as applicable. Replace items damaged in course of installation and construction. END OF SECTION 055000 055000 - 53 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 055100 - DESIGN-BUILD STEEL STAIRS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Prefabricated, drop-in interior steel stairs. Structural design of stairs by fabricator. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Design: Structural design of the stair, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation system. The engineer shall be licensed to practice in the state where the project is located. B. Unless specified otherwise, fabricate stair system from steel. If constructability conflicts occur, fabricator may modify design details subject to the specified requirements and design intent. Modified details to be shown in shop drawings. C. Stair systems include, but are not limited to, treads, risers, stringers, landings, handrails, guardrails, floor edge channels or angles, and all supports and anchors to adjacent construction. Handrails may be mounted to the stairs, or to building walls as indicated on the drawings. Where handrails are attached to walls, provide metal backing within walls. D. Floor construction, as indicated on the drawings, includes bearing capacity to support steel stairs and design live loading, except for slab edge supports which are to be provided under the work of this Section. Stair system shall accommodate the surrounding construction indicated. All modifications to structure as required to support or otherwise accommodate the design/build stairs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Changes in dimension or location of finish surfaces indicated in the drawings are subject to prior approval by the Apple project representative. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the Architect's charges for redesign necessitated by changes in building structure to accommodate stairs. Tread, landing, and stringer deflections shall be limited to L/360 span under design live loading indicated in the structural notes. E. Railings: Railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments shall be capable of resisting a force of 200 pounds at any point in any direction without damage or permanent set. Railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments shall be capable of resisting a force of 50 pounds per lineal foot in any direction without damage or permanent set. F. Risers: Closed design. G. Unless indicated otherwise, size stairs for a clearance of 1/2 inch between the stringers and landing edges and the finish surface of the adjacent enclosing walls. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: Manufacturer's standard published, design data, specifications, and descriptive literature. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate profiles, sizes, clearances, thickness of metals, connections, anchorages, size and type of fasteners, holes, field joints, and accessories. Indicate locations of anchors, weld plates, and blocking for attachment of wall-mounted handrails. Installation drawings for stair framing, concrete pan stair treads, risers, railings, and structural support. 055100 - 54 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Connections to structural frame. Include description of leads imparted to structural frame through connections. Welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate weld lengths. Final adjusted shop drawings reflecting field dimensions of adjacent structure and other conditions of installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Stair system shall meet the requirements of local jurisdictional code authorities. Furnish all calculations, engineer's stamps, drawings, and other items required by the code authorities to obtain approval of the installation. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years of experience in the fabrication of exit stairs of the type specified. C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years of experience in successful installation of steel stair and railing systems. Authorized installer or accepted by manufacturer as qualified to install work of this Section prior to bid, or accepted by Architect. D. Achitecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Conform to AISC code of standard practice for structural steel buildings and bridges, section 10 for exposed-to-view steel surfaces and welds. Treat exposed-to-view structural steel in finished areas as AESS whether or not shown as such on drawings. 1.5 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS, STAIRS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: American Stair Corporation (Romeoville, IL; 800-872-7824). Breuer Metal Craftsmen (Beaver Dam, WI; 920-885-2828). Worthington Stairs (formerly Sharon Stairs) (Akron, OH; 330-777-5377). 1.6 HANDRAIL BRACKETS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: The Wagner Companies. Material: Type 304 stainless steel; #4 finish. Wall mount: Model # MB33O1W. Post mount: Model # MB3301 P. 1.7 FABRICATION Fabricate stairs and rails in accordance with approved shop drawings. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces, and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Form bent- metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation, or otherwise impairing the work. Welding: Comply with AWS standards. Provide galvanic isolation between dissimilar metals. Accurately fit joints at mechanical fastenings to present neat hairline joints; welded connections exposed to view shall be neat and uniform, free of spatter and protrusions. Shop Applied Prime Paint Coatings: Shop preparation: Remove rust and mill scale. Make exposed surfaces and edges smooth, free of burrs and sharp edges. 055100 -55 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS G. Interior Metal: Conform to SSPC-SP-1, SSPC-SP-2, and SSPC-SP-3 as necessary to clean surfaces of oil, grease, scale dirt, and other foreign matter present in sufficient quantities to impair bond. 1. Provide shop primer compatible with top coats as specified in Section 099000. 1.8 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Apple project representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. Place inserts, blocking and related support framing in adjacent construction in accordance with construction sequence requirements. 1.9 INSTALLATION AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Install in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Perform field assembly in accordance with specified fabrication requirements. Repair all damage caused by installation; retouch damaged finishes with matching material to like new conditions. Field Quality Control: The structural design engineer or an authorized representative shall visit the site to inspect the work. Verify and certify that the installation has been installed in accordance with structural requirements. END OF SECTION 055100 055100 -56 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 057000 - ORNAMENTAL METALS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ornamental metal items not furnished by Owner. 1.2 SUMBITALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachment details. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design ['including mechanical finishes]. 3. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Fabricator Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years' successful experience fabricating ornamental metal items similar to those required for project as well as sufficient production capacity tc produce required units. Irstaller Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum (Contractor provided items): Extruded Bar and Shapes: ASTM B221, 6063-t6. Extruded Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429, 6063-t6. Drawn Seamless Tube: ASTM B483, 6063-t832. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, 606146. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B247, 606146. Castings: ASTM B26, 356.046. B. Steel: 1. Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36. 2 Steel Sheet: Hot rolled, ASTM Al 011; or cold rolled, ASTM Al 008, class 1; of grade required for design loading. 3. Steel Tubing: Cold formed ASTM A500; or hot rolled, ASTM A501; minimum grade B; seamless where exposed. C. [Oxidized Brass: Manufacturer: a. PROEmpty Parent Company: Empty SL c/ Linneo 3-5, 28005 Madrid - Spain VAT NUMBER ES-1380052749 Contact person: Csaba Tarsoly, ctarsolyempty.es Alloy composition: CuZn37 (Copper 63%, Zinc 37%). Finish: Medium Irregular Statuary Finish, no lacquer coating. a. Ebonol C (Cold Black Oxide) bath. 86 degree F (30 degree C) bath. 30 to 60 seconds per immersion cycle. 057000 - 57 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 3) Number of cycles based upon desired finish darkness, to match Owner-furnished control sample. Wax finish: 1) Renaissance Wax: Colorless, virgin wax with turpentine essence and petroleum derivatives. If finish becomes damaged, reapply wax as necessary to maintain finish per control sample. Field stripping and reapplication of Ebonol C may also be required.] D. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron ASTM A47, or cast steel ASTM A27. 1. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot-dip galvanized, ASTM Al 53. E. Grout: Non-shrink meeting ASTM Cl 107, non-metallic, pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition. I. Manufacturers: Master Builders/Masterfiow 713. Five Star Products, Inc/five Star Grout. Bostik Construction Products/Upcon Grout. Protex Industries, Inc./Propak. F. Brackets and Anchors: Unexposed plates, angles and supports may be steel; exposed items to match ornamental metal type and finish. G. Fasteners: Type required for specific usage; provide concealed fasteners except where specifically approved; where exposed match type and finish of metal being fastened. 1. Concealed Steel Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized minimum G90 where built into exterior walls or subject to high humidity. 1.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate component connections to support specified design loads. B. Select materials for straightness, free of defects and irregularities. Exposed to view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains, discolorations, and imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. C. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened; provide concealed connection devices with hidden fasteners. Fabricate continuous items with joints neatly fitted and secured. Ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32-inch uniform radius. D. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding each type of material; provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration on exposed side; dress exposed and contact surfaces. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located, consistent with design of structure. F. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for site delivery. G. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint where concealed, with preformed separators, or similar method to prevent corrosion. 1.6 EXAMINATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible; do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where necessary. 057000 - 58 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 INSTALLATION Install ornamental metal items in accordance with manufacturers recommendations, installation instructions, and approved shop drawings. 1. Bead Blasted Stainless Steel Panel Systems: Comply with manufacturer recommendations and installation requirements; anchor securely in place capable of withstanding anticipated loads. Install plumb, true and in correct relation to adjacent work, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance. Prior to securing continuous items, adjust to ensure correct alignment of reveals and joints throughout length of system. Install sufficient anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten system to building. Provide anchors to be installed in other work, and setting details, in time for proper installation by trades concerned; verify correct placement. END OF SECTION 057000 END OF DIVISION 05 057000 - 59 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 06— WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Plywood panels. Plywood blocking Preservative treat and fire retardant treat wood members as indicated. (*Fire retardant treated wood may not be required in all projects. Include if required by construction type orjurisdiction*7 Miscellaneous wood blocking. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. 1. Letter of Certification (s) for Sustainable Forestry: a. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC "Principles for Natural Forest Management" and identify certifying organization. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a tine-item basis. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers. 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type Ill - EPD with Third party certification. Softwood lumber. Softwood plywood. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Lumber Grading Agency: Certified to NIST PS 20 for each indicated use, including moisture content and actual sizes related to indicated nominal sizes Plywood Standard: Comply with PSi (ANSI A199.1). Identify lumber and sheet products by official grade mark. Fire Retardant Treated Products: Bear label of recognized independent testing laboratory indicating flame spread rating of 25 or less, tested to ASTM E84. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Dimension Lumber Products: Blocking: Dimensional lumber graded in accordance with fps grading rules; construction grade, Douglas fir or southern pine; minimum S-Dry. Certified to FSC STD-04-004. a. Basis of Design Certified Products: Sustainable Northwest Wood Dimensional Lumber. PotlatchDeltic Lumber. b. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500. B. Panel Products: Plywood Sheathing and Blocking: Minimum APA C-D Exterior (CDX) plywood; stress rated where spanning between supporting members; minimum 3/4 inch thick unless otherwise indicated. a. Basis of Design Product: Roseburg Sheathing or Owner approved Substitute. Plywood Panel Boards: Panel boards for electrical and communication panel boards; APA C-D Plugged, interior type plywood with exterior glue, fire retardant treated; minimum 3/4-inch thick by 49 inches by 97 inches. 061053 - 60 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS a. Basis of Design Product: Commonwealth Plywood Poplar or Owner approved Substitute 3. Certified to FSC STD-04-004. C. Accessories: Treated Products: Stainless steel, ASTM F593, Type 304 or 316. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized; size and type to suit application. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel; galvanized; size and type to suit application. Fasteners: As required for complete, secure installation of miscellaneous rough carpentry. Solid Masonry or Concrete: Expansion shield and lag bolt type. Steel: Bolts or powder activated type. 1.5 FABRICATION A. Wood Preservation: Treat lumber and plywood to comply with applicable requirements of American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA). 1. Decay Resistance Treatment: Pressure treat following items with waterborne preservatives for above ground use with AWPA C-2. Treat wood members in contact with masonry and with concrete. Treat wood members in connection with roofing and flashing. Kiln-dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent (at time of covering) with waterborne preservative. 2. Fire Retardant Treatment: Comply with AWPA standards for pressure impregnation with fire retardant chemicals to achieve flame spread rating of not more than 25 in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. Treat interior wood and plywood complying with AWPA C20 and C27, Interior Type A, and identify with FRTW. Provide UL label on each piece of fire retardant treated wood and plywood. Kiln dry treated items to maximum moisture content of 19 percent at time of covering. 3 Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, wherever possible; if cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment. 4. Inspect each piece after drying and discard damaged and defective pieces. 1.6 PLACEMENT A. Place miscellaneous rough carpentry true to lines and levels. B. Correlate location so attached work will comply with design requirements and be properly located. C. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. D. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. E. Shim with plastic for bearing on concrete and masonry. F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required by recognized standards. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact with wood. G. Wood Blocking: Provide blocking of s4s lumber not less than 1-1/2-inch-wide and of thickness required to provide adequate support or to properly locate attached material. Provide attachment to other work; form to shapes shown. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces. Remove temporary blocking when no longer needed. H. Plywood: Comply with recommendations of American Plywood Association (APA) for fabrication and installation of plywood work. 061053 -61 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS END OF SECTION 060153 061053 -62 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 064116— THERMOFOIL-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Shop fabricated thermofoil faced cabinetwork. Shop fabricated lockers, coat cabinets, and shelving units. Shop fabricated thermofoil faced adjustable shelving. Solid surfacing countertops. Cabinetwork hardware. 1.2 REFERENCES North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS), US Version 3.0. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) (www.fscus.org) STD-40-004 - Chain of Custody Standard. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Show large-scale details. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate architectural cabinets. Apply NAAWS Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. 1. Low-Emitting Materials. 2. Letter of Certification(s) for Sustainable Forestry: Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC "Principles for Natural Forest Management" and identify certifying organization. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item basis. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers. 3. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. Softwood lumber. Softwood plywood. Medium Density Fiberboard. Particleboard, 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality Standards: NAAWS, US Version 3.0. Fabricator Qualifications: Member of NAAWS or with minimum five years' successful experience fabricating architectural woodwork similar to that required for project. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products. Installer shall be responsible for supplying field dimensions that will affect the work of this section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until site conditions are adequate to receive work; protect items from weather while in transit. 1 Allow architectural woodwork shop finish to completely dry prior to delivery to site; allow materials to off gas volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions off site. 064116 -63 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Store materials indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent Do not begin installation of architectural woodwork until space is fully enclosed and mechanical systems are fully operational. Maintain interior installation areas at 70 degrees F and 50 to 55 percent relative humidity. Immediately remove from site materials with visible mold and materials with mildew. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of the following items during fabrication: Plumbing fixtures. Electrical conduit. Electrical junction boxes. Electrical fixtures. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. 1.8 THERMOFOIL FINISH A. Manufacturer: SSI North America. Product: Pentadecor 3D Laminate. Thickness: 0.012 inch minimum. Color: Mission White, 03/1630. 1.9 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Low Pressure Laminate (LPL): Thermoset decorative panels (melamine) composed of melamine or polyester-impregnated decorative paper bonded to a cellulosic substrate of particleboard or medium-density fiberboard (MDF). 1. Color: Snow White, 05/1480. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1-1999, Grade M-2, sanded faces, formaldehyde-free, certified to FSC STD-04-004, manufactured using low-emitting, urea formaldehyde-free binders, contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins. 1. Basis of Design Product: Georgia-Pacific TemStock FREE Particleboard or Owner approved substitute. C. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF)-. ANSI A208.2, grade MD-exterior glue, certified to FSC STD-04- 004, manufactured using low-emitting, urea formaldehyde-free binders, contain no added urea- formaldehyde resins. Industrial grade medium density fiberboard, average 45 to 48 pcf density. Basis of Design Product: Georgia-Pacific UltraStock Premium MDF or Owner approved substitute. D. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, certified to FSC STD-04-004; ultra-low emitting formaldehyde. 1. Basis of Design Product: Roseburg Sheathing or Owner approved substitute. 1.10 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS A. Countertops and sidesplash surfaces: 1. Source: Conan. 064116 -64 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Color: Cameo White. 1.11 ACCESSORIES Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact adhesive of woodworker's option. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Adhesive specified above for faces. Exposed Screw Fasteners: Provide screws with square drive; countersinking in wood or with decorative cup washers as indicated. 1.12 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MODEL Door pulls Richelieu 305128195 contemporary metal pull; 5.04" CTC, brushed nickel Upper cabinet hinges, tip-on Richelieu 75T158180,9561004 Base cabinet hinges, soft- Richelieu 75T158180, 973A close Trash drawers Richelieu 560H5500B Interior pull out drawer Richelieu 560H4000 & T557150 Trash bins: Hafele 503.13.994 Concealed shelf brackets Shelfology HD Series Floating Shelf Bracket Open Adjustable Shelves Wall Knape &Vogt Receiving Stations "82 WH 28'; screws to match Technology Station '82 WH 63'; screws to match Janitor's Closet "82 WH 48"; screws to match Manager's Office '82 WH 16.5"; screws to match Brackets Knape & Vogt 182 WH 14.5'; screws to match Lockers (Per 064116— 1.18) Locks Keyless Co Keylessl-SN (Keylessi -ADA-SN at Accessible lockers) Coat hooks Richelieu 6215140, chrome Hinges, soft-close Richelieu Concealed, heavy duty hinges allowing 110 degree door opening; 2 hinges per locker door 1.13 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE A. Anchors, Nails and Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws for drilled-in-place anchors. 064116 -65 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.14 UNDER-SHELF LIGHTING A. Under-shelf Lighting: As scheduled on Electrical drawings. 1.15 CABINETS A. Quality Standard: NAAWS US Version 3.0, Section 10 and related sections, custom grade; premium grade for door/drawer faces. Construction Style: Flush overlay. Construction Type: Multiple self-supporting units. Locker Door Style: Flush panel, non-vented. Core Materials: Thermofoil wrapped components: MDF. LPL faced components: Particleboard unless otherwise noted. 1.16 FABRICATION - CABINETS A. Exterior Cabinet Finish: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Mission White 03/1630. B. Interior Cabinet Finish: LPL. 1. Color: White. C. Interior Shelf Finish: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Snow White 05/1480. D. Back Panel Finish: 1. Color: White LPL, Snow White 05/1480 on back panels with cutouts. E. Doors: Thermofoil. Color: Mission White 03/1630. Interior Finish Color: White. F. Drawers: Thermofoil. Color: Mission White 03/1630. Interior Finish Color: White. G. Toe Kick: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Mission White 03/1630. 1.17 PREFABRICATED HPDL LOCKERS, COAT CABINETS, AND SHELVING UNITS A. Basis of Design: Hollman Inc. (www.hollman.com); lockers@hollman.com Product (Lockers): Apple" Model C triple-tier lockers. a. Quantities and configurations per Drawings. Product (Coat Cabinets): "Apple" Model A and Model A - ADA coat cabinets. a. Quantities and configurations per Drawings. Product (Shelving Units): "Apple" Model A Open Cubbie OC-1, OC-2, and OC-3. a. Quantities and configurations per Drawings. Product: Hollman Trim Package (filler panels, end panels, and base trim). a. Quantities as necessary per configurations on Drawings. 1.18 FABRICATION - LOCKERS [Option for projects not using Hollman lockers; confirm direction with development manager] Exterior Cabinet Finish: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Mission White 03/1630. Interior Cabinet Finish: LPL. 1. Color: White. 064116 -66 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS C. Interior Shelf Finish: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Snow White 05/1480. D. Back Panel Finish: 1. Color: White LPL. E. Doors: Thermofoil. Color: Mission White 03/1630. Interior Finish Color: White. F. Toe Kick: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Mission White 03/1630. 1.19 FABRICATION - LOCKER ROOM COAT CLOSETS [Option for projects not using Hoilman coat cabinets; confirm direction with development manager] A. Exterior Cabinet Finish: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Mission White 03/1630. B. Interior Cabinet Finish: LPL. 1. Color: White. C. Interior Shelf Finish: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Snow White 05/1480. D. Back Panel Finish: 1. Color: White LPL. E. Doors: Thermofoil. Color: Mission White 03/1630. Interior Finish Color: White. F. The Kick: Thermofoil. 1. Color: Mission White 03/1630. 1.20 SOLID-SURFACING FABRICATION A. Cut solid surfacing panels accurately to required shapes and dimensions. Edges: Square. Surface: No factory polishing. Will be seamed and polished on site. B. Fabricate with hairline joints. C. Cut holes for faucets. 1.21 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of fabrication where possible; do rot delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting. 1.22 INSTALLATION A. listall in accordance with NAAWS US Version 3.0. 064116 -67 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS B. Install work consistent with specified quality grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. shim as required, using concealed shims. C. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting architectural woodwork are properly placed, complete, and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of installation. D. Secure work to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. E. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work. F. Install architectural woodwork under supervision of factory-trained mechanics. G. Attach architectural woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for thermal and building movements. H. Acceptable Tolerances: Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16 inch at any position and maximum 1/8 inch in any 10-0" length. Adjoining Surfaces of Same Material: No variation permitted. Offset with Abutting Materials: Maximum 1/32 inch. I. Countertops: Install countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Set plumb and level. Align adjacent pieces in same plane. Install with hairline joints. Fill joints between countertops and adjacent construction with joint sealant; finish smooth and flush. 1.23 CLEANING A. Clean countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.24 PROTECTION A. Protect installed countertops with nonstaining sheet coverings. END OF SECTION 064116 064116 -68 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 064200 - WOOD PANELING - OWNER FURNISHED 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of Owner furnished custom wood veneer paneling; shop finished, complete required hanging hardware. 1.2 REFERENCES A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS), US Version 3.0. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference Convene 2 weeks prior to beginning work of this Section. Attendance: Owner, Architect, Contractor, Fabricator, Installer, and related trades Review, Discuss and Resolve: Critical Dimensions Product delivery and storage Staging and sequencing Protection of completed work 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain following conditions in building for minimum 7 days prior to, during and after installation of paneling: Temperature: 60 to 80 degrees F Humidity: 25 to 55 percent 1.5 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1.6 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, condition paneling to average humidity that will prevail after installation. 1.7 INSTALLATION Install in accordance with NAAWS US Version 3.0, Section 8, Premium Grade. Set plumb, rigid and level. Scribe to adjacent construction with maximum gaps as indicated. END OF SECTION 064200 END OF DIVISION 06 064200 - 69 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 07— THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 070151 - ROOFING REPAIR 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Performed by Landlord: Matching, patching, extending and repair of existing roofing system, including insulation, as required by project construction of vents and piping through roof, with base and cant flashings, accessories, and to develop proper drainage patterns as required for complete weathertight roof. END OF SECTION 070151 070151 - 70 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 078100 -APPLIED FIREPROOFING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sprayed fireproofing on structural steel members. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fireproofing Performance: Dry Density: Minimum 15pcf. Fire Hazard: 25 or less flame spread, 50 or less fuel contributed, and 50 or less smoke developed, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Bending: No cracking or delamination when subject to deflection of not less than 1/120 the span, when tested in accordance with ASTM E759. Impact Strength: No cracking or delamination when tested in accordance with ASTM E760. Air Erosion: Less than .005 g/sf. of weight loss when tested in accordance with ASTM E859, under an 800 fpm air stream for a minimum of six hours. Bond Strength: Minimum of 100 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E736. Resistance to Mold: Minimum 60 days in accordance with ASTM G21. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Approved by the manufacturer of the fireproofing. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the jurisdictional code authority. Submit test reports, evaluation reports, or other data as required by the jurisdictional code authority to obtain approval for the fire ratings scheduled. C. Fireproofing installation is subject to testing and inspection as specified in Section 014500. D. Use of sprayed fireproofing materials shall not result in asbestos exposures to workers or building occupants exceeding the US OSHA action level: 29 CFR 1926.55(c), at any time during or subsequent to application. E. Each fireproofing bag shall be UL labeled to designate formulation compliance. 1.5 FIREPROOFING SYSTEMS A. Sprayed Low Density Fireproofing: GCP Applied Technologies; (Cambridge, MA; 800-354-5414) "Monokote 6/HY." Carboline Company (St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000) "Pyrolite 1." Isolatek International (Stanhope, NJ; 201-347-1200) "Cafco 300". 1.6 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 078100 - 71 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 PREPARATION Provide protective coverings to prevent overspray on finished surfaces, and on surfaces to receive additional finish materials or treatment. close off and seal ductwork in areas where fireproofing is being applied. Clean all surfaces to be fireproofed of materials which would impair bond. Confirm compatibility of surfaces to receive fireproofing material. Verify that clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items required to penetrate fireproofing are in place. Coordinate fireproofing application with the work of other Sections to minimize subsequent damage to fireproofing. 1.8 INSTALLATION Apply sprayed fireproofing in accordance with the manufacturers printed installation instructions and in accordance with the approved fire rated assemblies to obtain the hourly fire ratings scheduled. Hand patch using UL-approved materials and procedures. Hand patching shall be performed by applicator applying fireproofing only, and at no additional cost to the Owner. After completion of fireproofing work, remove all equipment and clean all exposed wall, ceiling and floor areas of deposits of sprayed fireproofing materials. END OF SECTION 078100 078100 - 72 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 078139— PATCHING EXISTING FIREPROOFING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Patch existing sprayed-on type fireproofing and match existing fire-ratings. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Design Requirements: Provide materials capable of attaining fire ratings as required for construction types; verify construction types with Landlord. Performance Requirements: Provide materials listed by UL or independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to applicable authorities. 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: Comply with required ratings based on tests in accordance with ASTM E119. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25 flame spread and 25 smoke density when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of applicator: Firm acceptable to manufacturer of fireproofing materials, with minimum five years' successful experience on projects of similar scope. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS Ensure structure to which fireproofing is applied is not enclosed and surfaces are open to view until application is reviewed. Provide ventilation in areas to receive fireproofing during and 24 hours after application, to properly dry material and maintain nontoxic, unpolluted working area. 1.6 FIREPROOFING A. Products: Subject to compatibility with existing systems to be patched, available products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 GCP Applied Technologies "Monokote Mk-6" or "Retro-Guard.' 2 Albi Manufacturing Division, Stanchem, Inc. "Duraspray. 3. Mandoval Vermiculite Products Inc. "Mandolite P-20." B. Sprayed on Fireproofing: Mill mixed cementitious formulation for sprayed on application; other types of material subject to prior Architect and Owner approval. 1. Materials: Compatible with existing materials and systems; blended for even texture; with no asbestos. C. Water: Clean, free of materials harmful to fireproofing. 1.7 PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions for preparation of surfaces to receive sprayed on fireproofing. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fallout, and dusting; mask adjacent work as required. Provide temporary enclosure to prevent spray from contaminating air. Close off and seal duct work in areas where fireproofing is being applied. 078139 -73 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Clean substrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, paints, primers, and other matter which affects bond of sprayed fireproofing. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond by scraping, brushing, scrubbing or sand blasting. Verify bond requirements and compatibility of surfaces to receive fireproofing before application of sprayed on fireproofing. Ensure ducts, piping, equipment and items that would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned until fireproofing work is completed. Ensure clips, hangers, support sleeves and other attachments required to penetrate fireproofing are in place prior to application of fireproofing. 1.8 APPLICATION Mix and apply fireproofing in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions. Apply fireproofing in sufficient thickness and density to achieve required fire ratings. Apply fireproofing over substrate, building to required thickness with as many passes or stages necessary to cover with monolithic blanket of uniform density and texture. Remove excess and overspray, droppings and debris. Remove fireproofing from materials and surfaces not required to be fireproofed. Protect applied fireproofing from damage by subsequent operations; repair damaged fireproofing before fireproofing is enclosed. 1.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site tests and inspections: Testing and inspection will be required to ensure applied thickness and density meets fire rating requirements and reviewed test reports. Correct unacceptable work and pay for further testing required to prove acceptability of installation. Patch test areas as required to reestablish fireproofing integrity. END OF SECTION 078139 078139 -74 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Firestopping systems for sealing penetrations through fire-rated construction. 1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Penetrations: Provide and install firestopping systems that are produced to resist the spread of fire, and the passage of smoke and other gases according to requirements indicated, including but not limited to the following: Where penetration firestopping is used to seal penetrations through floors with waterproof membranes, system shall be selected for compatibility with membrane material. Provide products that upon curing, do not reemulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and after construction. Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings. provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of insulation utilized. Openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate voice, data and video cabling shall be provided with re-enterable products specifically designed for retrofit. 6.. Penetrants passing through fire-resistance rated floor/ceiling assemblies contained within chase wall assemblies shall be protected with products tested by being fully exposed to the fire outside of the chase wall. Systems within the UL fire resistance directory that meet this criterion are identified with the words chase wall optional". 7. provide and install complete penetration firestopping systems that have been tested and approved by third party testing agency. B. F - rated through penetration firestop systems: Provide through penetration firestop systems with f ratings, as determined per ASTM E814, but not less than one hour or the fire-resistance rating of the construction being penetrated. C. T - rated through penetration firestop systems: Provide firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E814, where indicated by code. D. L - rated through penetration firestop systems: Provide firestop systems with L ratings, in addition to F and T ratings, as determined per UL 1479, where indicated by code. E. VI- rated through penetration firestop systems: Provide firestop systems with W water resistance ratings, in addition to F, T and L ratings, as determined per UL 1479, where indicated by code. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) (www.fscus.org) STD-40-004 - Chain of Custody Standard. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. Sustainable Design Submittals: Low-emitting materials. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type Ill with third party certification. 078413 - 75 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 3. Letter of Certification (s) for Sustainable Forestry: Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): Provide letter of certification signed by lumber supplier. Indicate compliance with FSC Principles for Natural Forest Management" and identify certifying organization. Submit FSC certification numbers; identify each certified product on a line-item basis. Submit copies of invoices bearing the FSC certification numbers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Verification: Prior to installation of fire stopping systems obtain approval from the jurisdictional code authorities for the fire stopping systems and applications proposed. B. Firestopping: Tested in accordance with ASTM El 19 or UL 1479 to meet the hourly fire ratings of the construction being sealed. Provide F rated assemblies, except where T rated assemblies are required by the code authority. C. Firestopping systems shall be UL listed assemblies. D. Contractor qualifications: Acceptable installer firms shall be: UL qualified firestop contractor. Firestop Contractors International Association contractor member in good standing. Licensed by the state or local authority, where applicable. Shown to have successfully completed not less than five comparable scale projects. E. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single primary firestop systems manufacturer. 1. Materials of different manufacture than allowed by the tested and listed system shall not be intermixed in the same firestop system or opening. 2. Tested and listed firestop systems are to be used before an engineering judgment (EJ) or equivalent fire resistance rated assembly (EFRRA) is installed. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Project coordination is essential to inform and educate all the parties involved with the firestopping process of their role and how they can affect firestopping on the project. Schedule a mandatory preconstruction meeting for all parties involved prior to the start of construction. Do not cover up firestopping installations until authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation. 1.7 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Systems and products meeting the requirements specified and suitable for the conditions indicated as manufactured by one or more of the following. 3M Fire Protection Products. GCP Applied Technologies. Hilti, Inc. Nelson Firestop Products. Rectorseal. Specified Technologies, Inc. Tremco Inc. United States Gypsum Company. 1.8 MATERIALS A. Firestopping: One or more of the following: 1. Silicone elastomer compound: Single or multiple component, low modulus, moisture curing silicone sealant. 078413 -76 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Ceramic sealant: Single component, moisture curing ceramic sealant. Intumescent sealant: Single component, water based intumescent sealant. Acrylic sealant: Single component acrylic sealant, suitable for painting. Putty: Single component ceramic fiber base putty or intumescent elastomer putty that expands on exposure to surface heat gain. Mortar: Hydraulic cementitious mortar. Pillows or blocks: Formed intumescent or mineral fiber pillows or blocks. Intumescent strips: Solvent free intumescent wrap strips. Mechanical devices: Incombustible fillers or silicone elastomer covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. Cast-in-place devices: Containing intumescent material and smoke/water seals. 1.9 ACCESSORIES A. Forming and Damming Materials: As recommended by firestopping manufacturer for intended use. Permanent: Mineral fiber board, mineral fiber matting, or mineral fiber putty; ultra-low emitting material; Greenguard Gold. a. Basis of Design Product: USG Micore Brand Mineral Fiber Board 300 or Owner approved substitute. Temporary: Plywood; certified to FSC STD-40-004; ultra-low emitting formaldehyde. a. Basis of Design Product: Roseburg PourMor Plywood or Owner approved substitute. B. Electrical Box Inserts: Manufacturer: Rectorseal (Houston, TX; 800-231-3345). Fire Rated Pads: "BioFireshield Lectra-Stop"; 1/4 inch-thick intumescent pads; sized to fit electrical boxes; classified by UL; minimum 1 hour rating. 1.10 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 1.11 INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPPING Provide firestopping at mechanical, electrical, and plumbing penetrations through fire rated floors, walls, and ceilings, and other locations as indicated on the drawings. Install firestopping in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as necessary to meet the specified fire rating requirements. Where firestopping is used to seal around penetrations through waterproof membranes, install to maintain integrity of waterproof barrier. For sealing electrical boxes, coordinate installation with electrical, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for preparation and installation, install in locations as required by code for protection of openings through fire rated partitions. Trim excess material flush with adjacent surface. Remove spills, leave area in undamaged, clean condition. END OF SECTION 078413 078413 - 77 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joint sealers, for interior joints not specified elsewhere, with backing rods and accessories as required for complete installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Submittals for Review: 1. Samples: For each sealant type indicated for color as selected" or for which no color is indicated, submit Manufacturers color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. Sustainable Design Submittals: Low-emitting materials. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type Ill with third party certification. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years' successful experience on projects of similar type and size, using specified products. 1. Installers shall be familiar with proper application procedures to ensure maximum joint sealer expansion and contraction capabilities. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, cure time, and mixing instructions. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as intended, because of leaking, crumbling, hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging, staining and loss of adhesion. 1. Warranty period: Two years. 1.6 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. C. Elastomeric joint sealants: Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. Stain-test-response characteristics: where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for project. D. Interior Locations: Joint sealants containing mercury, butyl rubber, neoprene, SBR, or nitrile not allowed. E. Joint sealants formulated with aromatic solvents (organic solvent with benzene ring in its molecular structure), fibrous talc or asbestos, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, or their components not allowed. 079200 - 78 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS A. Acrylic Latex (Designation AL): ASTM C834, Type P, Grade NE. Class: joint movement range without cohesive/adhesive failure: plus 7.5 percent to minus 7.5 percent of joint width. Sealants shall meet the requirements of the Southern California South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168. (maximum VOC content of 250 grams/liter) Acceptable Products: Pecora Corporation; AC-20. BASE Sonneborn, Division of Chemrex Inc.; Sonolac. Tremco; Acrylic Latex 834. B. Silicone - Sanitary (Designation S-S): ASTM C920, Type 5, Grade NS. Class: 25. Uses: NT, M, G, A, and 0. Neutral or acid curing, nonstaining, nonbleeding, fungicide containing. Sealants shall meet the requirements of the Southern California South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168. (maximum VOC content of 250 grams/liter) Acceptable products: Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. Pecora Corporation; 898 Silicone Sealant. Tremco; Tremsil 200 white. C. Urethane - Multicomponent (Designation U-MC): ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS. Sealant containing mercury not allowed. Class: 25. Joint movement range without cohesive/adhesive failure: plus 25 percent to minus 25 percent of joint width. Uses: NT, M, A, and 0. Chemical curing, nonstaining, nonbleeding. Acceptable Products: Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. Tremco; Dymeric 240FC. D. Urethane - Traffic Bearing (Designation U-TB): ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P. 1 Sealant containing mercury not allowed. Class: 25. Joint movement range without cohesive/adhesive failure: plus 25 percent to minus 25 percent of joint width. Uses: 1, M, and 0. Chemical curing, nonstaining, nonbleeding. Shore A Hardness: 40 minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. Acceptable products: Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. Tremco; THC-901. E. Silicone - RTV (Designation S-RTV): ASTM C920, Type 5, Grade NS. Class: 25. Joint movement range without cohesive/adhesive failure: plus 25 percent to minus 25 percent of joint width. Uses: NT, G, A, and 0. Room temperature vulcanization. Acceptable products: a. Tremco; Trem pro 644 RN. 079200 - 79 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Sealant Primers: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; Primers for interior sealants shall meet the requirements of Greenguard Gold and the Southern California South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168. (maximum VOC content of 250 grams/liter for non-porous surfaces; 750 grams/liter for other surfaces). B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Backer Rod: Closed or open cell foam as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the application; round profile; thickness approximately 130 percent of joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 1.9 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. Verify joint dimensions and conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this Section. 1.10 PREPARATION Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. Apply masking tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealant. Prime as required for proper bond to substrate materials. Backing Materials: 1. Place backer rod to achieve proper sealant width/depth ratios and to prevent sealant sag. Use bond breaker where there is insufficient depth to use joint filler. 1.11 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. C. Install bond breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 079200 - 80 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5a in ASTM Cli 93, unless otherwise indicated. F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. G. Clean adjacent surfaces free of excess sealant as the work progresses. Use cleaning agents recommended by the sealant manufacturer. H. Upon completion, remove and dispose of masking. I. Protect sealant in joints subject to dirt, moisture, and traffic during the sealant curing process. protection shall be able to resist traffic while remaining securely in position. [Spec Note: Retain paragraph below only if revolving door is used on the project.] 1.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas of the revolving door assembly shall take place as installation proceeds to determine compliance of installed assemblies with specified requirements. 1 Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. Report all visible uncontrolled water. a. Test Area: All joint sealants that are part of or adjacent to the revolving door assembly. 1.13 SCHEDULE A. Items not to be sealed: Joints, perimeter, and penetration in fire rated assemblies. Use firestopping specified in Section 078413. Joints, perimeter, and penetration in sound rated assemblies. Use acoustical sealant specified in Section 098100. B. Joints sealant for interior locations exposed to view in final assembly: Wall and ceiling joints subject to movement: Designation U-MC. Wall and ceiling joints not subject to movement: Designation AL. Joints at dissimilar materials not subject to movement: Designation AL. Joints at dissimilar materials subject to movement: Designation U-MC. Interior side of exterior openings: Designation U-MC. Floor joints: Designation U-TB. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and their rough openings: Designation AL. Wall and ceiling joints between frames and adjoining surfaces: Designation AL. 079200 - 81 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Interior Sanitary Joints: joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining floor, wall and ceiling surfaces; joints between back splashes and wall substrates and between back splashes and countertops: Designation S-S. Interior joints at similar and dissimilar nonporous materials: Designation AL. Glass. Aluminum. Stainless steel. Other. END OF SECTION 079200 END OF DIVISION 07 079200 - 82 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 08— OPENINGS SECTION 080500 - COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR GLAZING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Design and performance requirements for structural glass assemblies and glazed openings. Materials and fabrication for structural glass assemblies and glazed openings. Installation of structural glass assemblies and glazed openings. B. Objective of this Section: Provide universal conservative and dependable design performance criteria for constructed building exterior glass and glazing system that achieve cost-effective, maintainable, optical, and tolerance requirements applicable to glass and glazing systems for long- term performance, taking into consideration the constraints brought by the design intent. Water management. Air infiltration/exflltration management. Vapor diffusion management. Thermal bridging management. Glass performance. Structural loads, including seismic. C. Related requirements: Work specified elsewhere which is included in requirements of this Section, and which shall be coordinated with the work of this Section, includes the following: 084226 - All-Glass Entrances. 084233 - Revolving Doors. 084413 - Sloped Glazing Assemblies. 088000 - Interior Glazing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: Glass Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. The Works: Comprises the design, drawing, manufacture, testing, and installation of all building envelope systems and interfaces described herein. Cavity: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard, as well as defects that are sign of diminished adhesion between glass panels. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. Punctual Defects: Defects defined as: associated distortion, n—alteration of viewed images caused by variations in glass flatness or inhomogeneous portions within the glass. bevel, n—angled surface at the edge of a lite of glass. blemish, n—imperfection in the body or on the surface of the glass; for the purpose of this specification, blemishes are divided into two categories: 080500 - 83 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS linear blemish, n—scratches, rubs, digs, and other similar imperfections. point blemish, n—crush, knots, dirt, stones, gaseous inclusions, and other similar imperfections. chip depth, n—measured distance of a chip from the face of the glass into the thickness. chip length, n—distance parallel to the edge of the glass from one edge of a chip to the other. chip width, n—perpendicular distance from the edge of the glass to the inner edge of the chip. crush, n—lightly pitted condition with a dull gray appearance. dig, n—deep, short scratch. dirt, n—small particle of foreign matter embedded in the surface of flat glass. fire crack, n—small, sometimes microscopic fissure in the edge of wired or patterned glass. flare, n—protrusion on the glass edge or corner of an otherwise rectangular surface. I. gaseous inclusion, n—round or elongated bubble in the glass knot, n—inhomogeneity in the form of a vitreous lump. line, n—fine cords or string, usually on the surface of flat glass. anisotropy n—The thermal toughening process produces areas of different stress in the cross section of the glass. These areas of stress produce a bi-refringent effect in the glass, which is visible in polarized light. When thermally toughened soda lime silicate safety glass is viewed in polarized light, the areas of stress show up as colored zones, sometimes known as 'leopard spots'. Polarized light occurs in normal daylight. The amount of polarized light depends on the weather, the grade of air pollution, and the angle of the sun. The bi-refringent effect is more noticeable either at a glancing angle or through polarized spectacles. Primary View Area is defined for facades as the area between 30 inches (750mm) and 96 inches (2,000mm) on elevation as measured from the floor finish. Primary View Area is defined for glass structures (staircases, balustrades etc.) as the part of the structure that falls within 5 feet (1.5m) of expected viewing position. For the Non-Primary viewing area, in instances where the expected viewing distance at install is greater than the distances specified here below for defect rating, the expected viewing distance at install will be used to rate the defects. B. Reference Standards: Reference standards cited in this Section represent minimum standards. Specific requirements herein are more stringent than industry standards. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) (www.aamanet.org) 800 - Voluntary specifications and Test Methods for Sealants, or EN-1 3022 - Glass in Buildings; Structural Sealant Glazing. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) (www.ansi.org) Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings, or EN ISO 12543— Glass in Buildings, Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) (www.asce.org) 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. ASTM International (ASTM): (www.astm.org), or from EN codes: A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel, or EN 10025— Hot Rolled Products of Structural Steel. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality, or EN ISO 16120 Non-Alloy Steel Wire Rod for Conversion to Wire, or EN 10017 Steel Rod for Drawing and/or Cold Rolling. A307 - Standard Specification for Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. A325 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, Including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers. 080500 - 84 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, And Flat Bar, or EN 10088 Stainless Steel, Technical Delivery Conditions. C509 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material, or ISO 5892 /ISO 3934 I ISO 3302. C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants, or EN ISO 11600 Building Construction, Jointing Products. C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, And Spacers, or ISO 5892 I ISO 3934 I ISO 3302. C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants, or EN ISO 11600 Building Construction, Jointing Products. C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass, or EN 572 Glass in Buildings. C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind Hs, Kind Ft, Coated and Uncoated Glass, or EN 1863— Heat Strengthened Soda Lime Silicate Glass. I. Clii 5 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories, or ISO 5892 IlS0 3934 IIS0 3302. C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass, or EN ISO 12543 -Glass in Buildings, Laminated Glass and Laminated Safety Glass. Cii 84 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants, or EN 13022 - Glass in Buildings; Structural Sealant Glazing. E527 - Standard Practice for Numbering Metals and Alloys, or EN 10027 - Designation Systems for Steels. 5. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) (www.cpsc.gov) 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 6 Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (IGMA) (www.igmaonline.org): a. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units, or EN 1279. International Building Code (IBC) and related standards, including seismic forces, per project location Country, State and City local amendments where applicable. Local Energy Code (edition per project filing); as amended by local Country, State and City where applicable. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) (www.naamm.org): AMP 503 - Finishes for Stainless Steel. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), or International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) or EN ISO I IEC 17025— General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination: Coordinate installation of glass and glazing systems with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 01. Power Assist (Push & Go) for Swing Doors: In all instances, submit an extract of shop drawings showing door assembly to appletormaxusa.com for approval by the door assist system manufacturer. If Tormax closer cannot be used due to site floor conditions or local code, communicate with Apple for review of alternative systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 080500 - 85 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metals. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Shop Drawings: a. Submit comprehensive, detailed and dimensioned shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a professional engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project location, to indicate set out and construction details indicated and not indicated in the Contract Documents, adjacent work by others, and for proprietary products where required details are not indicated in manufacturer's product data. Submit in complete packages so that individual parts and assembled unit may be reviewed together. Include cladding and glazing panels schedule. Detail fabrication and assembly of glass and glazing systems. Include optical and thermal performance values for glass panels. Shop drawings to be signed and sealed by the licensed professional engineer in responsible charge. b. At minimum, indicate the following: 1) Set-out of all work, including reference points, edge conditions and joint pattern, indicated on plans, elevations and sections as applicable. 2) Full size sections of all members, including descriptions of structural properties and specifications of materials. 3) All structural connections, including splicing of steel framing elements 4) Indicate welds by standard welding symbols in the AWS "Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction". 5) Show size, length, and type of each weld. 6) Framing, anchorages and fixings supported from base structure, and embedment in base-structure, if required. 7) Movement joints and their movement capabilities. 8) Methods of assembly at junctions, including sealing and fixing, indicated by three- dimensional and exploded views if requested. 9) Methods of installation, including: Erection tolerances: Machined slots, keyholes and other methods for handling and connecting components. Junctions and trim to base-structure and adjoining surfaces. Fully dimensioned setout drawings and templates. Access and materials handling equipment and requirements. Calculate for temporary unsupported elements, which should be stable maintaining stresses within limits under dead load and other relevant loads. Submit proof when requested for approval. 10) Machined glazing details, including: Access and materials handling equipment and requirements. Glazing materials including sealants, gaskets, tapes, setting and spacer blocks. Rebate depth, and edge restraint. Clearances and tolerances. Methods of in-service glass replacement. Hardware, fittings and accessories. Method of in-service cleaning. Connection details. c. For all facades that contain swinging doors submit shop drawings showing the door assembly to apple@tormaxusa.com for the door assist system manufacturer approval. If 080500 - 86 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Tormax closer cannot be used due to site floor conditions or local code, communicate with Apple for review of alternative systems. 3. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard sizes, accompanied by descriptive data sheets for each sample. When specified, include typical frame sections showing wall thickness and configurations. For coated glass assemblies, provide a 1,000mm x 2,000mm (39 inch x 79 inch) sample of the full glass buildup specified, unless directed otherwise by the owner. 4. Glass Replacement Strategy, including all necessary material, equipment, and labor resources. 5. Calculations: Submit comprehensive calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer responsible for their preparation, licensed in the project jurisdiction, that show compliance with the performance requirements and design criteria. Calculations should include detailed finite element analysis of both the global structural system as well as all critical structural components, unless specifically directed otherwise by the design team. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Piece/Fabrication drawings for all glass components. 2. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products cerlifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 3. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating the following products comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: Insulating glass. Glazing sealants. Glazing gaskets. 4. Mill Reports: Furnish certified copies of mill reports covering the chemical and physical properties of stainless steel and carbon steel used. Prior to commencing the erection of steel, deliver certificates to Architect, in number and form as may be required by local and state agencies having jurisdiction. Obtain certificates from the mills producing the steel certifying that steel meets minimum requirements as to physical properties, inspection, marking and tests for structural steel as defined by ASTM A36 or EN 10025. 5. Test and Evaluation Reports by Façade Contractor: a. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. 6 Qualification Data: Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 7. Source Quality Control Submittals: Reports. [Spec Note: Retain paragraph below only if this Section requires Contractor to be responsible for field quality-control testing or to engage a testing agency to perform testing. Delete if by Owner- engaged testing agency.] C. Field Quality Control Submittals: Reports. D. Closeout Submittals: Maintenance Contracts. Manufacturer's Certification: Upon completion of the installation, if required, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect two copies of the certification that: The materials installed complied in all respects with the requirements of the Section of these Specifications. The materials were installed in complete accordance with the manufacturer's current recommendations. 080500 - 87 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Include the following: Parts list and catalogs for replaceable parts, including ordering forms and instructions. Instructions on operation, adjustment, servicing, and lubrication. Warranty Documentation. Record Documentation: Provide a complete numbering system and schedule for cladding and glazing panels. Individually number each panel in a way that manufacturing and installation history can be traced. If required design and implement an approved permanent concealed marking system showing correct location and orientation when installed. Submit details. Indicate location of each individual panel on shop drawings. Submit record drawings progressively indicating the location of each individual panel. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Glass Manufacturers: Factory with independently-maintained quality control procedures complying with ISO 9001 and are independently maintained. Glass Fabricators: Manufacturer of glass, or fabricator complying with requirements for manufacturer and approved by manufacturer for fabrication of glass types required for project. Façade Contractor: Minimum 5 years documented experience in work of this Section. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 for testing indicated; member company an NRTL. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 and ANSI Z97.1 or more stringent local requirements. Mock-Ups: Architect shall specify size, location, orientation, and viewing conditions for glazing mockups. Specify that glass not matching range represented by mock-up may be rejected by Owner or Architect. The mock-up is to remain available for viewing for duration of construction. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Façade Contractor shall design and fabricate to agreed tolerances in relation to surrounding structures and all interfacing areas. Façade Contractor shall indicate these measurements and tolerances on shop drawings. Façade Contractor will perform a site survey at the works' interface before installation for verification of fit. The Architect and Owner are to be informed immediately if there is a discrepancy of tolerances. Unless specified differently, base building tolerances will follow: Steel: AISC tolerances. Concrete: ACI tolerances. 1-inch offset in design location in any direction. [Spec Note: When warranties are required, verify with counsel that special warranties stated in this article are not more than remedies available under prevailing local laws. Coordinate with Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." If installer is included as signer of the warranty, the maximum warranty period that sureties will allow is two years.] 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warranty in any event to be backed by a guarantee from the parent company (or companies) agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship during the warranty period. In case the design, engineering or supply of any part of the Contractor works are to be done by a manufacturer other than the Contractor, the Contractor's warranty shall be backed by a guarantee from those manufacturers for repairing or replacing defective material and workmanship during the warranty period. 080500 - 88 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Warranty does not include damage caused by vandalism or natural conditions exceeding the performance requirements. The warranty and its enforcement shall not deprive the Owner of other action, right or remedy available to him. Warranty: Ten years from date of Owner acceptance of storefront installation, unless a longer warranty term is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Extended Warranty: Owner reserves the right at any time during the material warranty period to negotiate a further extended warranty period with vendor. 1.8 PERFORMANCE! DESIGN CRITERIA Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding all loads and actions, normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASCE 7 or approved local code by a qualified professional engineer where required. Contractor is not relieved from responsibility for: 1. Adequacy of connections and required detailing. 2.. Proper fitting and construction of work in strict accordance with Contract Documents or from the necessity of furnishing material and specifications which may not be indicated in the approved shop drawings. Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing project loads and in-service conditions and in strengths (annealed or fully tempered, heat strengthened, or chemically strengthened). Only low iron glass shall be used, sourced from Apple-approved suppliers only as listed in this section. Minimum thickness allowed for Float glass is 10mm, except if used on the non-structural side of an insulated glazing unit. For structures where tight bending radius is necessary 8mm thickness can be used following approval by Apple. All Glass structures shall consist of a minimum of two Float glass panels laminated together with an a3proved interlayer. Roller waves: Run same direction relative to final install for the complete project. Horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed,, unless otherwise indicated or approved. Façade contractor shall advise if this this criterion cannot be met. SentryGlas® lonoplast interlayer shall be used without exception for all doors, sidelites, skylights, balustrades, and glass stringers. Combination of SentryGlas® lonoplast interlayer on doors and sidelites with Trosifol® polyvinyl butyral (PVB) thermoplastic film on facade is recommended only in instances when a portal frame is present. SentryGlas®XtraTM ionoplast interlayer could be accepted as an alternative product on items I and J, provided all proper warranties and tests are documented and delivered to the Owner. Apply ceramic frit on IGU units, at perimeter of the glass panel, from the glass panel edge to 2mm past the spacer and primary sealant line (whichever is furthest from the panel edge). Ceramic frit to show a straight and crisp edge. 1. Apply ceramic frit to both inside and outside view on the glass face as close as possible to the spacer as recommended by the glass manufacturer and structural engineer. 080500 - 89 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Apply Structural silicone skin in factory before delivery to site on glass surfaces that will be in contact with metals such as steel captures. Specific product, color and application tolerances shall be discussed and agreed with the project team. Apply Structural silicone skin in factory before delivery to site on glass edges, recessed 6mm from glass panel surface. Necessary structural thickness to be verified by Façade Contractor. Specific product, color and application tolerances shall be discussed and agreed with the project team. 0. Apply Structural silicone skin in factory before delivery to site on glass surfaces that will be concealed from sight, to end at the level of the cladding internal face. Specific product, color and application tolerances shall be discussed and agreed with the project team. Components shall be assembled, secured, anchored, reinforced, sealed and made weather tight in a manner not restricting thermal, wind or building movements of the glass and glazing system. Free and silent movement of all components due to thermal, structural, wind pressure, seismic, or dead loads, shall be achieved without strain to glass or other components, without buckling of any component and without excessive stress to any members or assemblies. Construction Tolerances of Building Structure: Make provision in design for erection tolerances of existing building structure. Safety Glazing Performance: CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 and ANSI Z97.1 or more stringent local requirements. Structural Performance: Structural Movement: Make provisions for design of glass and glazing systems to accommodate differential structural movements, deflections, interstory drift and thermal movement of the building structure due to all actions and loads, including gravity load, wind loads, seismic loads, and temperature, and Owner usage-specific loads (i.e. large crowds during special product launch events). 2. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated thicknesses are minimums; select actual glass thicknesses by analyzing loads and conditions. Size glass to withstand in accordance with Local Building Code requirements. Provide glass in thicknesses and strengths to meet or exceed the design values in ASTM E1300, EN 16612: 2019 or DIN 18008, depending on project location. 3. Deflection Criteria - framing members shall be designed to limit their deflection under imposed loads so as to not affect the performance of the system or induce second order affects: a. Deflections for members supporting edges of insulated units shall be limited to 1/175 of the glass edge dimension for spans up to 13 foot 6 inches (4,100mm), and 1/240 +1/4 inch (1/240+6mm) for panels greater than 13 foot 6 inches, as per AAMA TIR-li. More stringent requirements shall be taken into account as required by the glass supplier or glass retaining system manufacturer. 1) Deflections of glass and framing under barrier loading shall be to BS 6180: 2011 or local code as required. b. Unframed vertical glass shall meet the following deflection limits: H/1 50 as a standard, or if the glass supplier and Apple's structural engineer agree a deviating value may apply. For cable span walls, deflection shall me limited to a maximum of span/60. c. Horizontal/sloped glass in skylights shall meet the following deflection limits unless specified elsewhere in contract documents: L/600 under self weight, or as required to prevent ponding of water on the glass. L/360 under imposed loads 080500 - 90 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS T. Thermal Performance Properties: Provide glass meeting specified performance properties, based on manufacturer's published test data for units of thickness indicated: U-factor: Per NFRC 100 expressed as btu/square foot x hour x degree F, or DIN EN 673 expressed in W/(K m2) depending on project location. If local codes do not specify which standard to follow, calculate it as per NFRC. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Per NFRC 200, or DIN EN 410 depending on project location; if local codes do not specify which standard to follow, calculate it as per NFRC. U. Optical Performance Properties Solar Optical Properties: Per NFRC 300, or DIN EN 410 depending on project location. 2. Anisotropy (also known as "Leopard Spots" or "Quench Marks"), a multi-color pattern known to be associated with heat-treated glass under certain polarized light conditions, shall be kept to an absolute minimum. Anisotropy which is very localized in defined geometrical patterns has also been linked to the cooling process of Sentry Glass interlayer in the Autoclave. Control over anisotropy will comprise continuous monitoring and adjusting of the tempering and quenching equipment for uniformity in heat treatment across the entire glass surface. At agreed stages in fabrication, benchmark panels of full-size fabricated assemblies will be required to represent the acceptance limit and be used for inspection of all project glass panels. Glass manufacturer if necessary, will adjust the tempering and lamination process parameters to minimize any visual defect. The benchmark panels should be viewed in conditions representative of the final install conditions. The Glass Manufacturer is to provide a large black fabric sheet that can be placed behind the viewed panel for detailed analysis. Factors that affect acceptance are the consistency of the quench marks and lack of patchy or cloudy concentrations of anisotropic effects. The Glass supplier may use a previous project as a benchmark at Owners' discretion. Otherwise, a benchmark should be included within the proposal. Requests to void the benchmarking process will be dealt at a per project basis and requires written permission from Apple. SentryGlas® ionoplast interlayer related anisotropy in well-defined localized geometrical patterns shall be avoided whenever possible. 3. Energy Performance: Follow guidelines per Reference Standards listed in Section 080500, and adjust to be more stringent where required in extreme climates or by stringent local energy codes. V. Water Infiltration: Defined as uncontrolled water, exclusive of condensation, that penetrate to interior side of work. Water infiltration shall not occur under the following design conditions: Static pressure of 20% of the maximum design positive pressure for a time of 15 minutes per local codes if more stringent. Dynamic pressure of 20% of the maximum design positive pressure for a time of 15 minutes per local codes if more stringent. Performance should be verified by testing according to ASTM E331 and AAMA 501.1 respectively if required by the local authorities having jurisdiction. W. Air Infiltration: Averaged over frontal area of exterior surfaces having fixed components, shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of frontage when subjected to 6.24 psf of positive pressure. Performance should be verified by testing according to ASTM E283 if required by the local authorities having jurisdiction. X. Condensation resistance: Condensation is defined as water, ice or frost occurring inboard of air barrier. Design façade system to prevent condensation on interior under the following conditions: a. Condition 1: (Spec note: Insert value options below provided by your Engineer.) 080500 - 91 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Outdoor ambient air temperature of [23] degrees F. Indoor ambient air temperature of [70] degrees F (+1- 2 deg F) with 50 percent relative humidity. Y. Failure Modes: Defective materials and workmanship include, but are not limited to: Water leakage under conditions equivalent to, or less severe than, those specified. Air leakage exceeding specified limits. Failure of operating parts to function normally. Structural failure due to pressures and forces up to specified limits. Sealant (including structural silicone): Loss of adhesions, loss of cohesion, cracking or discoloration. Disengagement of gaskets or weather strips. Deterioration or discoloration of finish. Glass breakage due to pressures up to specified values, thermal breakage, defective glass or damaged glass, resultant damage and breakage caused by falling glass. Spontaneous breakage of tempered glass. Staining of glass or other building components by sealant or primer or both. Corrosion of any component materials or corrosive streaking on component materials or both. Loss of effective glass bearing of setting blocks due to shifting of glass and/or blocks. 1.9 MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS A. The following have been approved for use by Apple. It does not relieve the Façade Contractor or Supplier from responsibility for meeting the Specification. B. Apple may qualify additional vendors/suppliers upon request. C. Float suppliers: NSG Pilkington (www.pilkington.com) Saint Gobain Glass (www.saint-gobain-glass.com) AGC (www.agc.com) Guardian (www.guardian.com) Glastroesch (www.glastroesch.com) China Southern Glass (CSG) (www.csgglass.com) Apple will qualify additional vendors upon request. D. Glass Processors: Sedak (www.sedak.com) Tianjin North Glass (http://en.northglass.com) Agnora (www.agnora.com) Cristacurva (www.cristacurva.com) Cricursa (http://cricursa.com) Isoclima (www.isoclima.net) E. Interlayer Manufacturer: 1. Kuraray (www.kuraray.com) F. Coatings: AGC Interpane (www.interpane.com) Saint Gobain Glass (www.saint-gobain-glass.com) Tianjin North Glass (http://en.northglass.com) G. Acceptable Manufacturers - Facade Contractors: Seele (www.seele.com) Frener & Reifer (www.frener-reifer.com) Bellapart (www.bellapart.com) 080500 - 92 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Albertini (www.albertini-iwd.com) Blue Water Glass (www.bluewaterglass.net) Josef Gartner GmbH - Germany (www.josef-gartner.de) H. Power Assist for Swing Doors 1. Tormax "push and go" (www.tormaxusa.com; email: apple@tormaxusa.com) 1.10 MATERIALS A. Source limitations for glass, interlayer, metals, and accessory materials: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of material or product from one source with resources to provide materials or products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. B. Obtain from single source and from single production batch or batches that maintain the same physical and aesthetic properties. C. Low-iron Glass: 1. DIN EN 572, ASTM Cl 036, Type I, Class 1, quality qi clear except where more stringent requirements are specified. Iron content Fe2O3 to be maintained below 120ppm and Visible Light Transmittance of 91 percent or greater in all cases. Thermal and Chemical treatment as per following codes except where more stringent requirements are specified: Annealed: DIN EN 572, ASTM C1036. Heat Strengthened: DIN EN 1863, or ASTM C1048. Tempered: DIN EN 14179, or ASTM C1048. Chemically Tempered: DIN EN 12337, or ASTM C1422 I C1422M - 15. Tempered Glass, Heat Soaked: BS EN 14179. 2 Surface compression must be verified to meet ASTM C1279 "Standard Test Method for Non- Destructive Photoelastic Measurement of Edge and Surface Stresses in Annealed, Heat- Strengthened, and Fully Tempered Glass" requirements. Alternatively: 4-point bending flexural strength 70 MPa Heat Strengthened. 4-point bending flexural strength 120 MPa Fully Tempered. Chemically tempered - defined on a per-project basis. D. Laminating InterIayer: Trosifol® polyvinyl butyral (PVB) thermoplastic film with thickness compliant with project specific structural calculations by Facade Contractor. Never to be used on Doors or Sidelites. SentryGlas® ionoplast interlayer with thickness compliant with project specific structural calculations by Facade Contractor. Only interlayer approved to be used on Doors or Sidelites. E. Ceramic Frit: Black: Equivalent to RAL # 9005, CASS 0001 White: Equivalent to RAL # 9016, CASS_0002 Gray: Equivalent to RAL # 7045, for Skylights subject to approval by the Apple design team in the context of project specific aesthetics. F. Insulating Glazing Unit Spacers: Black colored, unless specified otherwise by Architect, TGI stainless steel spacer subject to calculation and visual approval by the Architect. Black colored, unless specified otherwise by Architect, pre-desiccated, structural foam spacer of the type SuperSpacer from Edgetech. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. G. Stainless Steel: 1. Bars and Shapes: AISI 316L, UNS S31603, 1.4404 to EN10088-41-5, Type 316; tensile strength Fu=70 ksi, yield strength Fy=29 ksi and 25 ksi for type 316L. 080500 - 93 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Plate, Sheet and Strip: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316; tensile strength Fu=72.5, yield strength Fy=29 ksi. Rollable Temper: ASTM A666, Type 316; tensile strength Fu=72.5 ksi, yield strength Fy=29 ksi. When necessary, use higher grade stainless steel, Super duplex S32760, for extreme weather conditions, particularly pitting. In all cases, Type 316L may be used instead of Type 316 for improved weldability. H. Mild Steel (Substructure): 1. Type Grade 50 ASTM A572 or 5355J2+N to EN1 0025-2. Blast Cleaning: SA2,5 (EN ISO 12944-4). Primary Coat: Gehopon-e24r-primer; two-component epoxy, dft 80m. Secondary Coat: Gehopon-e8-zb two-component epoxy, dft 80m. Final Top Coat: Benjamin Moore DTM acrylic, jet black, dft 80m. 1. Fasteners: Stainless Steel: 1.4401, grade K70. a. Bolts, screws, nuts, washers, anchors. Mild Steel: 8.8 hot-dipped galvanized. Medium quenched and tempered. a. Bolts. Non-Metal Materials: 1. Sealants: High modulus structural silicone designed for structural glazing meeting ASTM C1184 Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Provide adhesives, sealants and caulks that comply with the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168 including prohibition on the use of certain toxic compounds. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/l. Architectural Sealant Primers - Nonporous: 250 g/l. Architectural Sealant Primers - Porous: 775 g/l. Sealant Color: Black or otherwise approved. Manufacturers: Dow. Sika. 2. Non-Shrink Grout: Sika. Hilti. 3. Silicone Gasket: Black; 40 shore a, 60 shore a, 80 shore a. 4. Polymer Blocks: 70-90 durometer hardness. 5. Sliding Foil: Norglide MP3, 0.48mm (stainless steel) OR Chem-Stik. S. Fluid-Applied Waterproofing a. Primary Membrane: Procor fluid applied membrane by GCP Applied Technologies; two- part, self-curing, synthetic rubber-based material. Cured Film Thickness: 0.060 inch nominal. Color: As selected by Architect. b. Miscellaneous Materials: Bituthene liquid membrane by GCP Applied Technologies. c. Sika Membranes (Water and Vapor Barrier, or equivalent) Door Hardware: As indicated; furnished under Section 087100. Power Assist for Swing Doors: Available products: Tormax US802410 iMotion TN 110 In-Floor Swing Door Operator Kit for Apple Entrances. HEAVY DUTY pivot door arm is to be specified in all instances. 080500 -94 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.11 GLASS COATINGS AND FILMS A. Coating shall be applied on Architect recommended glass face. The Glass Manufacturer shall review the technical feasibility and confirm to Architect. B. Facades will have one single-sourced coating type regardless of configuration. C. External facades will have one of the following coatings subject to approval by the Apple design team in the context of project specific aesthetics and thermal requirements, when sourced in Europe: Flat Facades: Interpane Ipasol Grey 70; iPlus Top 1.1; Bright White and Bright White Low Reflection. These coatings could be combined in one single glass composition depending on the thermal requirements. Skylights: Interpane Ipasol Neutral 73/42 or 70/37. This requires approval by Apple. Curved Tempered and Annealed: Interpane iPlus Top 1.1; Bright White; Bright White LR. Curved Annealed, Second Choice: Saint Gobain Planitherm XN II. D. External facades will have one of the following coatings subject to approval by the Apple design team in the context of project specific aesthetics and thermal requirements, when sourced in China: 1 Flat Facades: TNG SC70; TNGSC80; TNG01 89-E; TNG16-625. These coatings could be combined in one single glass composition depending on the thermal requirements Flat 2. Curved Tempered and Annealed: TNG01 89-E; TNG16-62S. E. Post glass install films can be used on existing skylights subject to approval by the Apple design team in the context of store specific aesthetics: 1. 3M Prestige Series - Ultra PR S50. F. Crash Dots: 1. Apply vinyl opaque crash dots to store interior glass surface at fixed façade panels, sliding and swing doors. 2.. Apply crash dots after glass facade has been installed, in order to ensure alignment. 3. Vinyl crash dots are to be provided by Retail Supply team and their approved supplier. The installation will be decided by the project specific team. 1.12 POWER ASSIST FOR SWING DOORS A. Tormax U5802410 iMotion TN 110 In-Floor Swing Door Operator Kit for Apple Entrances. 1.13 FABRICATION A. General Guidelines: Glass shall be cut clean, without edge faults such as feathered edges, shells or other imperfections. Glass shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability, or appearance. Manufacturing tolerances: Minimum as set out by DIN EN 572, ASTM C1036. Minimum actual glass thickness for nominal specified glass thickness not less than those specified in ASTM E 1300 table A4.1, or DIN EN 572. Use tighter tolerances whenever noted in this Specification. Glass shall be prefabricated and delivered in the required sizes. No on-site cutting, nipping or drilling will be allowed. B. Glass Inspection: 1. Pre-Marking of Punctual Defects: a. Glass Panels will be inspected clean, with a bright background and 20W LED tube lamps with diffuse light placed 1 Meter in the background of the glass. No additional lighting or flashlights will be used. In the instance that the required set up is not available, glass panels will be inspected clean at close range with the aid of a flashlight (MIN 270 Lumens) against a dark background. Mark defects found on the glass surface with a black felt-tip 080500 -95 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS marker, then their location, size and defect nature will be recorded on the glass fabrication drawing corresponding to the panel being reviewed. Defects visible at a distance of 12 inch (300mm) will be marked. Defects within 4 inch (100mm) of fittings will be marked. Criteria for Acceptance of Punctual Defects: Criteria for Doors and Sidelites Primary View Area: Defects visible under natural light from a distance of 12 inch (300mm) are not allowed. Criteria for Doors and Sidelites Non-Primary View Area: Defects visible under natural light from a distance of 79 inches (2,000mm) are not allowed. Criteria for Facade Primary View Area: Defects visible under natural light from a distance of 79 inches (2,000mm) are not allowed. Criteria for Glass structures (staircases, balustrades etc.) Primary View Area: Defects visible under natural light from a distance of 12 inches (300mm) are not allowed. Criteria for Facade and Glass structures (staircases, balustrades etc.) Non-Primary View Area: Defects visible under natural light from a distance of 79 inches (2,000mm) are not allowed. For confirmation, the defects to be rejected will be assessed a second time after a pause of no less than 10 minutes and the defect markings having been erased from the glass surface. Concessions can be made for defects located in very low transit areas or if located at extreme distance from expected viewing location. Contact Apple in a timely manner to review defects that fall in this category, they will be addressed on a case per case basis. All markings will be erased once the glass review has concluded. Aesthetics: In the event that a defect might negatively affect the aesthetics of the project, an open dialog is to take place between all parties and more elaborate viewing conditions can be arranged in order to reach a resolution. Defect Nature and Detection: a. Defects with high possibility of being detected under different light conditions: 1) Defects that generate a deformation: Glass Bubbles, Glass Inclusions (Stones), Tin defects from hot zone of Float (Top Spec), Excessive Seam of SentryGlas® ionoplast interlayer. b. When assessing these types of defects, take into consideration core size, deformation, and brightness under direct light. Defects that shine" by transmission of reflection: Tin defects from Float exit (Top Tin, Tin Pick-up). Defects from biological sources (insects, lint, hairs, etc.) c. Defects with some possibility of being detected under different light conditions: 1) Opaque Defects: Contaminants trapped in the interlayer or IGU cavity such as silicone, butyl, paint, adhesive tape etc. d. Defects with low possibility of being detected under different light conditions: 1) Thin, semi-opaque and translucent Defects: Contaminants and scratches trapped in the interlayer or IGU cavity such as fibers, thin scratches, smudges, fingerprints, and the like. Surface Defects: a. To avoid rejection of surface defects, correct whenever possible, by means of Cerium Oxide and soft buffing. Some surface defects that can be attenuated or fully corrected are: Thin scratches. Water corrosion (irisation). Top tin. Tempering dimples. b. Optical deformations caused by surface polishing or buffing are not allowed. 080600 - 96 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS C. Glass Labeling: Provide manufacturers label (easy peel type) on each light, indicating part number, type, and thickness of glass. Comply with local code requirements for identification and labeling of safety-impact glazing materials in hazardous locations subject to human impact loads. Approval by the project Design team is required in instances where labeling is required within view at post-install conditions. D. Edges: Polish to a transparent finish with no polishing wheel traces (lines), except otherwise indicated. Chamfer edges 1 m x 45 degrees, except provide 1.5mm radius edges at chemically strengthened glass. Corners: Rectangular Panel: Arris 1.5mm x 1.5mm. Parallelogram: Rounded, radius = 2mm. E. Holes and Cut-Outs: All notches and holes to have polished edges with no polishing wheel traces (lines), except otherwise indicated. No visible defects shall be permitted. Laminated Glass: General: DIN EN 12543 orASTM C1172 orANSI Z97.1. Internal Glass Facades, sidelites and doors will consist of minimum two-ply laminate using 10mm (3/8 inch) Glass. 3 External Glass Facades, sidelites and doors will consist of minimum two-ply laminate using 12mm (1/2 inch) Glass. 4 SentryGlas® or SentryGlas® XtraTM ionoplast interlayer will always be used for doors and sidelites. 5. Laminated glass shall be assembled under controlled temperature and humidity conditions in a pressurized clean room rated minimum ISO 146441 Class 7 or FED STD 209E Class 10,000. 6. Place panels in vacuum bags and laminate in an autoclave under heat and pressure. 7. Autoclave should include enough air circulation and adequate spacing between glass panels in the autoclave to avoid Anisotropy and Haze imprinting from support frames onto SentryGlas® ionoplast interlayer. 8. Interlayer edge finish: Condition A: Heat strengthened, chemically toughened and fully tempered glass panels: interlayer joints: smooth straight clean bright finish recessed from the edge. Condition B: Annealed finished glass panels: Polish after lamination to a smooth straight clean bright finish flushed with the glass edge. 9. Interlayer seams shall be visually undetectable and fabricated by an approved glass manufacturer. G. Insulated Glazing Units: Insulated glass units: DIN EN 1279, ASTM E2190. Spacer is to be of a consistent color and finish, free of imperfections. Sealed units shall have a primary butyl seal of minimum 2mm width, and a secondary structural silicone seal, sized to structural and atmospheric loads in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's guidance and project specific engineering recommendation. . Wherever possible, and with exception to the approval of the Architect, insulated glass units on vertical facades shall utilize a stiffer outer pane to minimize pillowing. Warranty: Minimum 10 years. Where argon filled insulating glass units are proposed, the supplier of the units will provide written evidence that the units have undergone accelerated aging tests. 080500 - 97 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 7. Spacer Joints: Do not locate within a primary view area. H. Coatings: Where soft coatings are applied to glass panes they shall be suitably protected until time of assembly into the Insulated Glazing Unit and all handling of glass shall be carried out using protective cotton or surgical gloves so as not to damage the coated surface or leave fingerprints. After protection is removed from the coated surface, the IGU assembly and sealing must take place within the recommended time period as per the coating manufacturer. Evaluation of color range between coated glass panels shall be measured using calibrated equipment following the L*a*b* color space system as defined in GEPVP guidance. Acceptable color differences between coated panels are as follows: 0. E':53 EL:53 L?a*:52 L.b:52 Coatings as part of an Insulated Glazing Unit: Low-E and high-performance coatings shall be stripped from the glass surface at the edge (Edge Deletion). Straightness tolerance ±0.04 inch (1.0mm). Overlap of Butyl 0<tol<0.08 inch (2.0mm). Excess edge deletion leading to visible clear line between butyl and coating is not permitted. Fabrication size availability; consult manufacturers for most current capabilities: Flat Glass: Sedak I Interpane - MAX 125 inch x 787 inch (3,180mm x 20,000mm) Tianjin North Glass - MAX 129 inch x 708 inch (3,270mm x 18,000mm) Agnora - MAX 129 inch x 295 inch (3,270mm x 7,500mm) Cristacurva - MAX 129 inch x 314 inch (3,270mm x 8,000mm) 2. Curved Glass - Tempered: a. Tianjin North Glass: Type I - MAX Arclength 129 inch x StraightEdge 709 inch x MIN Radius 197 inch (3,270mm x 18,000mm x 5,000mm) Type II - MAX Arclength 110 inch x StraightEdge 504 inch x MIN Radius 59 inch (2,800mm x 12,800mm x 1,500mm) Type III - MAX Arclength 165 inch x StraightEdge 129 inch x MIN Radius 79 inch (4,200mm x 3,270mm x 2,000mm) Type IV - MAX Arclength 94 inch x StraightEdge 197 inch x MIN Radius 59 inch (2,440mm x 5,000mm x 1,500mm) b. Cricursa I Isoclima - MAX Arclength 96-inch x StraightEdge 197 inch (2,440mm x 5,000mm): Type I - MAX Thickness 1/4 inch x MIN Radius 39 inch (6mm x 1,000mm) -Also available Heat Strengthened. Type II - MAX Thickness 1/2 inch x MIN Radius 47 inch (12mm x 1,200mm) -Also available Heat Strengthened up to Thickness 3/8 inch (10mm) Type Ill - MAX Thickness 5/8 inch x MIN Radius 59 inch (15mm x 1,500mm) Type IV - MAX Thickness 3/4 inch x MIN Radius 79 inch (19mm x 2,000mm) c. Cristacurva - MAX Arclength 126 inch x StraightEdge 197 inch x MAX Raise (Depth) 30 inch x MAX Bending Angle 122 degrees (3,200mm x 5,000mm x 770mm x 122 degrees) or MAX Arclength 96 inch x StraightEdge 236 inch (2,400mm x 6,000mm): Type I - MAX Thickness 1/4 inch x MIN Radius 39 inch (6mm x 1,000mm) Type II - MAX Thickness 5/16 inch x MIN Radius 47 inch (8mm x 1,200mm) Type III - MAX Thickness 3/8 inch x MIN Radius 59 inch (10mm x 1,500mm) Type IV- MAX Thickness W4 1/2 inch x MIN Radius 71 inch (12mm x 1,800mm) 080500 -98 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS d. Sedak/Sunglass - MAX Arclength 126 inch x StraightEdge 197 inch (3,200mm x 5,000mm): Type I - MAX Thickness 1/4 inch x MIN Radius 59 inch (6mm x 1,500mm) Type II - MAX Thickness 5/16 inch x MIN Radius 59 inch (8mm x 1,500mm) Type Ill -MAX Thickness 3/8 inch x MIN Radius 59 inch (10mm x 1,500mm) Type IV - MAX Thickness 1/2 inch x MIN Radius 71 inch (12mm x 1800mm) 3. Curved Glass -Annealed: a. Cricursa / Isoclima - MAX Arclength 125 inch x StraightEdge 394 inch (3,180mm x 10,000mm) Type I - MAX Thickness 1/4 inch x MIN Radius 4 inch (6mm x 100mm) Type II - MAX Thickness 5/16 inch x MIN Radius 6 inch (8mm x 150mm) Type III -MAX Thickness 3/8 inch x MIN Radius 10 inch (10mm x 250mm) Type IV— MAX Thickness 3/8 inch x MIN Radius 12 inch (10mm x 300mm) b. Cristacurva - MAX Arclength 130 inch x StraightEdge 314 inch (3,300mm x 8,000mm) 1) Consult manufacturer for capabilities on glass thickness MIN bending radius. c. Sedak/Sunglass - MAX Arclength 130 inch x StraightEdge 433 inch (3,300mm x 11,000mm) 1) Consult manufacturer for capabilities on glass thickness MIN bending radius. 4. Curved Glass - Cold Bent and Laminated ('Warm Bent"): a. Sedak - MIN Radius 1,500mm x Glass Ply Thickness - MAX 138-inch x 787-inch (3,510mm x 20,000mm) Type I - MAX Thickness 1/4 inch x MIN Radius 354 inch (6mm x 9,000mm) Type II - MAX Thickness 5/16 inch x MIN Radius 472 inch (8mm x 12,000mm) Type III -MAX Thickness 3/8 inch x MIN Radius 590 inch (10mm x 15,000mm) 5. Chemically Strengthened: a. Tianjin North Glass - MAX 98 inch x 142 inch (2,500mm x 3,600mm) b. Isoclima - MAX 98 inch x 157 inch (2,500mm x 4,000mm) c. Sedak/Sunglass - MAX 94 inch x 193 inch x 44 inch (2,400mm x 4,900mm x 1,120mm) 1.14 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Monolithic Tempered Flat Glass: 1 Edge length tolerance: For edge length tolerance :540 inch (1,000mm) ±0.04 inch (1.0mm) :5120 inch (3,000mm) ±0.08 inch (2.0mm) 200 inch (5,000mm) ±0.12 inch (3.0mm) >200 inch (5,000mm) ±0.16 inch (4.0mm) Diagonal length tolerance For edge length tolerance 40 inch (1,000mm) ±0.06 inch (1.5mm) 120 inch (3,000mm) ±0.12 inch (3.0mm) :5200 inch (5,000mm) ±0.18 inch (4.5mm) >200 inch (5,000mm) ±0.24 inch (6.0mm) Glass thickness For edge length tolerance :50.24 inch (6mm) ±0.008 inch (0.2mm) :50.48 inch (12mm) ±0.012 inch (0.3mm) :50.59 inch (15mm) ±0.020 inch (0.5mm) Polish edges unless noted otherwise. Chamfers 450 Approx. 080500 - 99 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 5. Corner edge: Arris (square edge panel): 1.5mm by 1.5mm. Rounded (parallelogram panel): Radius = 2mm. 6. Panel bow: For pane dimension <6,000mm, Max allowable bow = 2mm. For pane dimension > 6,000mm, Max allowable bow = 0.1% of pane dimension. 7. Depth of roller waves = maximum) 0.004 inch (0.1mm) over 12 inch (300mm). 8. Edge dip =:50.01 inch (0.25mm). 9. Holes and Cutouts Hole position from Datum or Edge ±0.08 inch (2.0mm) Hole diameter ±0.06 inch (1.5mm) Notch size ±0.08 inch (2.0mm) Notch position from Datum ±0.06 inch (1.5mm) Milled Radius to notches ±0.08 inch (2.0mm) Holes and Cutouts? 0.50 inch (13mm) polished KPO Holes and Cutouts < 0.50 inch (13mm) smooth ground KGN B. Monolithic Curved Glass: Comply with requirements for monolithic flat glass and the following: 1. Shape tolerance: ±0.12 inch (3.0mm) 2. Panel bow: For pane dimension <6,000mm, Max allowable bow = 2mm. For pane dimension > 6,000mm, Max allowable bow = 0.1% of pane dimension. 3. Panel twist = ±0.12 inch (3.0mm) - measured at crossing diagonal string intersection. 4. Local bow = ±0.04 inch (1.0mm) 5. Edge dip over length = <4 inch (100mm) C. Laminated Glass: Comply with requirements for monolithic flat glass and the following, according to composition of laminated glass. Place panels in vacuum bags and laminate in an autoclave under heat and pressure: 2. Annealed glass plies: Adjacent edge shift: Edge length Max shift >0 inch (0mm) ±0.004 inch (0.1mm) Global edge shift from most inner to most outer edge for three or more plies: Edge length Max shift >0 inch (0mm) ±0.004 inch (0.1mm) 3. Concealed edges at heat-strengthened, heat-tempered, or chemically-strengthened plies: Adjacent edge shift: Edge length Max shift :5230 inch (6.0m) ±0.06 inch (1.5mm) :5472 inch (12.0m) ±0.08 inch (2.0mm) >630 inch (16.0m) ±0.10 inch (2.5mm) Global edge shift from most inner to most outer edge for three or more plies: Edge length Max shift :5230 inch (6.0m) ±0.06 inch (1.5mm) :5472 inch (12.0m) ±0.08 inch (2.0mm) >630 inch (16.0m) ±0.10 inch (2.5mm) 4. Exposed edges at heat-strengthened, heat-tempered, or chemically-strengthened plies: a. Adjacent edge shift: Edge length Max shift >0 inch (Om) ±0.04 inch (1.0mm) 080500 - 100 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Global edge shift for four or fewer plies: Edge length Max shift >0 inch (Om) ±0.04 inch (1.0mm) Global edge shift for five or more plies: Edge length Max shift <79 inch (2m) ±0.04 inch (1.0mm) <236 inch (6m) ±0.06 inch (1.5mm) <630 inch (16m) ±0.08 inch (2.0mm) >630 inch (16m) ±0.10 inch (2.5mm) Overall thickness tolerance: a. The maximum permissible thickness of a laminated glass unit will be the result of the thickness tolerance for single glass panes plus 0.004 inch (0.1mm) of each lamination interlayer. Interlayer edge finish. Condition A) - Heat strengthened, chemically toughened and fully tempered glass panels: interlayer joints: smooth straight clean bright finish recessed from the edge. Condition B) - Annealed finished glass panels: polish after lamination to a smooth straight clean bright finish flushed with the glass edge. Insulating glazing units: Comply with requirements for monolithic flat glass and the following, according to composition of laminated glass: Panel shift from most inner to most outer edge considering all plies of IGU: Edge length Max shift :5230 inch (6.0m) ±0.06 inch (1.5mm) :5472 inch (12.0m) ±0.08 inch (2.0mm) >630 inch (16.0m) ±0.10 inch (2.5mm) Overall thickness tolerance: Sum of single tolerances ± 0.004 inch (0.1mm) per 1.0mm thickness of edge seal. Offset of the edge seal: Edge length Max shift :5230 inch (6.0m) ±0.12 inch (3.0mm) :5472 inch (12.0m) ±0.20 inch (5.0mm) 1.15 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. Visible Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. Samples of each finish type used on project to be submitted for approval. Finishes should be as noted below unless specified otherwise in contract documents. [Spec Note: Retain first subparagraph below for directional finishes.] Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece, unless specified otherwise in contract documents. When finishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. Directional brush satin finish: No. 4. High polish mirror-like reflective, nondirectional polish: Super No. 8. 1.16 INSTALLATION Install according to accepted shop drawings and to comply with specified performance and tolerances with adequate provision for settling, expanding, and contracting to occur without breaking glass. Prior to start of installation, inspect building and verify all conditions and dimensions as being acceptable to receive the work of this Section. 080500 - 101 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS C. If conditions are found that might prohibit proper execution of the work, Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect in writing of these conditions. Do not proceed with installation until remedial action, acceptable to the Architect, has been executed. D. Joint widths as noted in the Contract Documents are the design joint width at an ambient temperature of 75 degrees F. Installation procedures should be adjusted to take into account the ambient temperature at the time of installation. E. Exercise care to properly brace and reinforce units against racking during hoisting and installation. F. Corrosion Protection: Ensure by design that no metals, including alloys of the same base metal, are placed together in a manner, combination or location likely to give rise to damage by electrolytic action or other corrosion. In particular, avoid metal-to-metal contact between aluminum and metals other than appropriate grade and composition of stainless steel as per the recommendations of the material manufacturer and to the approval of the Architect. Ensure that dissimilar aluminum alloys in contact with each other are compatible with each other or isolated. Other dissimilar materials are to be treated or protected in such a manner as necessary to prevent corrosive action. 2. Accomplish isolation of dissimilar metal surfaces to prevent electrolytic action by materials that are impervious to moisture and non-absorptive. 3. Steel parts shall receive a protective treatment commensurate with their respective functions and locations. 4. Sliding Doors: Install sliding glass door assemblies after other finishing operations have been completed. Coordinate installation of recesses housings with installation of adjacent finishes. Secure sliding glass door track to building structure using manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application. Install floor guides and track stops. Attach sliding glass door glass panels to track carriers and adjust panels to level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform clearances as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 5. Fluid-Applied Waterproofing a. Refer to manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the following: Step 1 - Metal Surfaces: Apply 60 mil pre-coating of Bituthene liquid membrane over the metal and bolts first followed by fluid-applied waterproofing over that and everywhere else. Step 2: Apply minimum 60 mil coating of fluid-applied waterproofing over all areas to be waterproofed. b. If area to be waterproofed is in direct sunlight and temperature is rising, apply "scratch coat" (a thin application of fluid applied waterproofing) prior to the full application of the waterproofing membrane. c. In applications where a minimum slope of 0.13 inch/ft. cannot be achieved, apply a two- coat application of membrane to achieve the total thickness. d. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials which would be exposed in the completed work. e. Protect completed membrane waterproofing from subsequent construction activities as recommended by manufacturer. G. Anchors and Connectors: 1. Provide anchors and connections to fully satisfy their required purpose of adjustability, movement, and load transfer. 080500 - 102 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Design connections between different materials to allow for the differential thermal movement of the respective materials. Anchors and connections that do not provide for movement shall prevent such movement by appropriate means. Anchors and connections that are designed for movement shall be of such construction that friction is low enough to allow for such movement without buckling and other damage and without causing binding and noises. Ensure that no load is transferred to any connected elements during sliding. If necessary or requested, Contractor will perform tests to demonstrate frictionless performance. Self-drilling, self-threading fasteners shall not be permitted for use into concrete [or masonry]. Separate metal surfaces in such a manner that metal does not move on metal. materials used for this purpose shall be low friction components, sealants or gaskets as applicable. Ensure that no load is transferred to any connected elements during sliding. If necessary or requested, Contractor will perform tests to demonstrate frictionless performance. Anchorages to structural steel shall not induce rotational forces in supporting members. Anchors, connections, and fixings outboard of the air-seal shall be 300 series stainless steel, galvanized metal not allowed. Avoid excess shimming that may induce additional stress on fasteners. Total thickness (t) of a shim pack shall not exceed a dimension equal to the diameter (d) of the fastener/anchor. Where t>d, the fastener/anchor shall be recalculated to take into account the additional stress from bending on the fastener with the assumption that the shim does not contribute to resistance to fastener bending. Additional stress due to bending shall be added to tension stress and the tension/shear interaction analyzed. All anchors will be checked for bending regardless of shim thickness relative to their diameter. Shim packs that resist compressive forces only may be high-impact plastic, Korolath type or Owner approved equal. Shim packs subject to shear forces shall be stainless steel or HDG steel plates pinned together to form a monolithic shim. Use of powder actuated devices (pad's) is prohibited unless specifically indicated. Fastening: Fasten assembly to building structure in a manner which transmits all loads to main structure without exceeding the capacity of any fastener. H. Panel Alignment Tolerances (Not Including Fabrication Tolerances): 1 Joint Offset from Grid: Do not exceed 5 percent +0.04 inch (1.0mm) of joint width. Joint Width Alignment: ±5 percent from normal joint width; least joint width 1/4 inch. Panel Step: Maximum joint offset from grid not to exceed 5 percent +0.04 inch (1 mm) of joint width. Panel Step at Junction: Not to exceed 5 percent or 0.04 inch (1 mm) of joint width. In cases where joint width is small and glass fabrication tolerances don't allow for compliance with Panel Alignment Tolerances specified here above, substitute the Panel Alignment Tolerances by the summation of the allowed glass fabrication tolerances. 1. Sealants: 1,. Sealants shall be finished flat and recessed 3mm from the glass surface, smooth without imperfections, displaying a non-reflective velvet finish. J. Push and Go Closer for Swing Doors: Maximum leaf aperture shall not exceed 95 degrees in all instances, unless specified otherwise by local code or Architect. Use heavy duty door stop at all installations. Connecting pivot will fall fully underneath the thickness of door assembly in order for it to be hidden from view during all opening stages. Push and go manufacturer shall program and commission work on site prior to Substantial Completion. 080500 - 103 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 5. Consult vendor for technical support and verification of configuration and install requirements (www.tormaxusa.com; email: apple@tormaxusa.com). 1.17 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Panel alignment tolerances: All glass elements shall be erected and installed with ±2mm non-accumulative tolerance from design position in plan and level. Joint Offset from Grid: Do not exceed 5 percent +0.04 inch (1.0mm) of joint width. Joint Width Alignment: ±5 percent from normal joint width; least joint width :5114 inch. Panel Step: Maximum joint offset from grid not to exceed 5 percent +0.04 inch (1 mm) of joint width. Panel Step at Junction: Not to exceed 5 percent or 0.04 inch (11 mm) of joint width. 1.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL [Spec Note: Section is written with the assumption that the Contractor will arrange and pay for all field tests. If the project requirements are different to this then the section should be updated accordingly.] A. Contractor shall engage an independent third party to perform the following field tests. Owner to approve Contractors choice of third party testing agency prior to appointment. Contractor shall make appropriate arrangements to facilitate the testing: Initial Field Water-Leakage Test per AAMA 501.2: Conduct at the first-in-place mock-up area of glass and glazing system once the adjacent wall area is sufficiently completed. Additional testing is to be conducted at completion of the glass and glazing system installation. Testing to be performed on 100% of system unless specified otherwise in contract documents. Should the system fail the testing noted above the contractor shall be responsible for the cost of re-testing the system once remedial action has been taken. B. Manufacturer's I Fabricator's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. 1.19 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, and other operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. 1.20 PROTECTION Protect all finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage during progress of the work. Comply with requirements of GANA and Section 015000. 1.21 CLEANING Comply with requirements of GANA and Section 017423. Clean excess glazing materials from adjacent finished surfaces. Remove labels after work is completed. 1.22 MAINTENANCE A. Service Contract: Propose service contract for inspection, adjustment, repair and replacement of the following components for indicated service life: Fixed aluminum and steel framing: 25 years. Stainless steel framing and cladding: 20 years. Glass and insulated glazing units: 20 years. Structural silicone sealant: 20 years. Manually operated doors and windows: 20 years. 080500 - 104 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Electrically operated doors and windows: 5 years. END OF SECTION 080500 080500 - 105 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 081113— HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Full flush steel doors and pressed steel frames, including anchors and silencers. 1.2 REFERENCES Steel Door Institute (SDI): SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) - Recommended Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Hollow metal manual. Underwriters Laboratories: Standards as applicable to fire rated doors and frames. 1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are acceptable upon approval of authorities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, configuration, jointing methods, reinforcements, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and locations of cutouts. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Greenguard Gold: a. Laboratory Test Reports: Indicating compliance for low-emitting materials. 1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Basis of Design Product: Curries/Assa Abloy "847 Security Door." Equivalent products by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Member of the SDI or of the NAAMM or member of both, subject to compliance with the specified requirements. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Doors: ANSI/SDI A250.8 Grade Ill Extra Heavy Duty. Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8 Grade III Extra Heavy Duty. 1.6 MATERIALS A. Doors: Hollow metal flush steel door, 1-3/4 inch thick. Typical: Full flush with steel channel or welded edge; close top with flush end closer treatment, bottom optional flush or recessed channel; steel stiffened core, insulated at exterior doors with fiberglass batt. Interior Doors: Minimum 14 gage. Exterior Doors: Minimum 14 gage. Vision Lites: As indicated on drawings. Finish: Galvannealed. B. Frames: Exterior Frames: Welded (preassembled) type. Interior Frames: Welded (preassembled) type. Gage: Minimum 12 gage. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for replacement. Mortar Guard Boxes: Minimum 22 gage mortar guard boxes welded in place; provide where frames may be grouted. Finish: Galvannealed. 081113-106 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Glazing Stops: Full flush type with glass centered in opening, unsecured side integral with unit, secured side fastened with flush, countersunk Allen type fasteners; minimum 16 gage. Fire Rated Units: Construct in accordance with requirements for fire rating, IBC 715.3, and NFPA 80. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when doors and frames are in installed, opened position. Fire ratings: Refer to drawings for fire rating requirements. Temperature rise rating: Provide doors with maximum 450 degrees F temperature rise rating in 30-minute fire exposure period at doors into exit enclosures. 1.7 FABRICATION A. Conform to requirements of SDI (ANSI A250 series) or NAAMM. B. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided under Section 087000. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A250.6 and ANSI Al 15 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. C. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied hardware may be done at project site. D. Reinforce doors and frames to receive mortise hardware. Drilling and tapping for mortise hardware done at manufacturer's plant. E. Provide additional vertical stiffeners to doors to receive multi-point locking concealed hardware. F. Locate hardware as indicated on shop drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. G. Frames: Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. Welded Frames: Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames; weld on inside surfaces; grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish. Head Reinforcement: For heavy doors, 200 to 300 lb (90.72 to 136.08 k) up to 8" wide, GA- 600 recommends using 0.0312-inch- (0.79-mm-) thick studs. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud. Provide runner track and typical studs above door openings with studs spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm) on center. Reinforce frames wider than 4'-0" with minimum 12 gage formed steel channels welded in place, flush with top of frames. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Install one additional stud no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from jamb studs at single doors greater than 48 inches (1200 mm) and at all pairs of doors. Closer Reinforcement in Single and Double Door Frames: 14 gage half-sleeve reinforcement minimum 20 inches big for regular and parallel arm closers. Hinge Reinforcement in Single and Double Door Frames: 10 gage plate reinforcement 3x hinge height welded in place centered on each hinge. Backbend to Throat: Per details. Face: 2 inches. H. Door Silencers: Place minimum three single bumpers on single door frames; space equally along strike jambs. Place minimum of two single bumpers on double door frames; place on frame heads. 1. Provide jamb anchors per SDI-1 00 (ANSI/SDI 250.8) and NAAMM; weld floor jamb anchors in place. 081113-107 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS J. Provide double doors tested and approved without astragals. K. Edge Clearances: Between Doors and Frames: Maximum 1/8 inch at head and jambs. Door Sills: Maximum 3/4 inch between bottom of door and bottom of frame. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: Maximum 1/8 inch. Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire ratings. L. Finish: Comply with requirements of Section 099000 for primer including application and compatibility with specified finishes. Interior Units: Apply minimum A60 non-spangle hot-dip galvannealed coating, ASTM A924 and A653; shop primed. Exterior Exposed Units: Apply minimum A60 nonspangle hot-dip galvannealed coating, ASTM A924 and A653; shop primed. a. Surface treat after galvannealling to remove oils and prepare for painting and apply one coat of primer; comply with requirements in Section 099000. 1.8 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) and ANSI/SDI A250.11 or NAAMM "Hollow Metal Manual" and with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions. 1. Install fire rated units in conformance with fire label requirements and NFPA 80. B. Install doors and frames plumb and square, and with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16-inch. Coordinate hardware installation with requirements of Section 087000. Coordinate glass installation with requirements of Section 088000. C. Remove and replace doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage, installation and construction. 1. Paste filler repair shall not be permitted. D. After installation, touch up scratched shop prime paint surfaces. END OF SECTION 081113 081113-108 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 081416 - WOOD CLAD DOORS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Wood Clad Doors. Factory finishing. B. Related Sections: Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements. Section 087100 - Door Hardware. 1.2 REFERENCES Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers of Canada/Woodwork Institute (AWl/AWMAC/Wl)- Architectural Woodwork Standards. American Architectural Manufacturers Association Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) STD-40-004 - Chain of Custody Standard. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA) - I.S.1A - Industry Standard for Architectural Flush Wood Doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Shop Drawings: Show locations, elevations, details, dimensions, and preparation for hardware. Samples: a. 12 x 12 inch composite sample comprised of finish veneer set within perimeter trim showing finish and joinery shall be provided for program approval. Warranty: Sample warranty form. B. Sjstainable Design Submittals: Recycled Content. Regional Materials. Rapidly Renewable Materials. Certified Wood. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Performance Testing: Tested by independent testing laboratory in accordance with AAMA 920 Operating Cycle Performance for Side Hinged Doors; 250,000 cycles. Cycle testing shall conclude without evidence of deleterious effects. Documentation shall be provided at Owner's request. Cimensional Verification: Manufacturer shall provide written documentation recording the dimensional accuracy in accordance with approved Shop Drawings of the final assembly for verification of height, width and depth of door, and shall include but not limited to hinge, operator, and door pull dimensional positions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Package doors in crating comprised of rapidly renewable or recycled materials with identifying marks; slit plastic wrap on site to permit ventilation, but do not remove from plastic until ready to install. Crating shall contain tilt-tip meters and shock watches. Do not deliver doors until building is substantially water and weather tight. Store doors flat and level, with spacers between doors to allow for air circulation, in protected, dry area. 081416 - 109 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS D. Environmental Requirements: Maintain following conditions in building for minimum 7 days prior to, during, and after installation of doors: Temperature: 60 to 80 degrees F. Humidity: 43 to 70 percent. 1.6 WARRANTIES Furnish manufacturer's 2 year warranty providing coverage against: Defects in materials and workmanship. Warpage beyond specified amount. Telegraphing of core construction. Delamination of faces. 1.7 ASSEMBLY 1. Assembly is referred to as "Panelized Door" which is comprised of an engineered metal frame chassis with designated mechanical fixing points for integrating all components including but not limited to Wood Panel, Aluminum Panel, Stainless Steel Trims, Electromechanical Swing Door Operator, Door Pull, as specified in this section herein. 1.8 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hester Fabrication Or alternate approved by Owner 1.9 MATERIALS A. Wood Panel: 1. AWI/AWMAC/Wl Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 9. 2. Designated as 'front' facing. 3. Core type: Solid, non rated: Medium Density Fiberboard Veneer shall be provided by Owner's pre-approved supplier 4. Wood veneer faces: Close grain hardwood, of quality suitable for opaque finish, certified to FSC STD-04-004. 5. Adhesives: Water Resistant type. B. Aluminum Panel: Aluminum, 3000 Series, shall be used in accordance with AAMA guidelines for architectural aluminum. Designated as 'back' facing. Finish: Painted with Color TBD C. Metal Subframe for Door: Aluminum, 6000 Series, shall be used in accordance with AAMA guidelines for architectural aluminum. Frame shall be engineered to support operational loads transferred through concealed hinges, pulls, and electromechanical swing door operator. D. Stainless Steel Trim for Door Cladding and Frames: Stainless Steel, 304, shall be used in accordance with ASTM A240 and ASTM A666 Standards. No. 4 finish or alternate approved by Apple. 081416 - 110 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.10 ACCESSORIES A. Electromechanical Swing Door Operator As indicated on drawings. Operator in accordance with: EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3 EN 60335-1 B. Motion Sensor 1. As indicated on drawings. C. Touchless Actuator 1. As indicated on drawings. D. Door Pull 1. As indicated on drawings. E. Hinges 1. As indicated on drawings. 1.11 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI/AWMACIWI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 9 and American Architectural Manufacturers Association. 1. Dimensional Tolerances: +1- 1/16 inch to finished assembly height, width and depth. 2. Active Door Leaf: Front Face: Finished Wood Veneer Back Face: Painted White Aluminum Edge Type: Stainless Steel, formed 3. Door Frame: a. Cladding: Stainless Steel, formed B. Prefitting; fit doors, hardware and accessories to frames at factory in accordance with specified dmensional tolerances. C. Premachining: Machine doors at factory to receive hardware specified in this Section. 1. Hinges, specified in this Section, shall be mechanically attached to machined steel brackets. a. Hinge brackets shall be 1018 Cold Rolled grade steel or equivalent. Alternatives must be approved by Owner. D. Preassembly: Active Door Leaf shall be assembled at the factory. Praassembly shall include the following components: Front Face with Finished Veneer Back Face with Painted Panel 3.. Exposed Mounting Points for Door Pull 4. Concealed Hinges 1.12 FINISHES A. Factory Finishing: 1. Factory finish veneer panel for doors in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5, and per Owner's approved standards. 1.13 PREPARATION A. Condition doors to average humidity that will be encountered after irstallation. 081416 - 111 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.14 INSTALLATION A. Contact Tormax at apple@tormaxusa.com for panelized door operator installation and commissioning. B. Install doors in accordance with AWI/AWMACIWI Architectural Woodwork Standards and American Architectural Manufacturers Association. C. Install doors plumb and level. D. Field Fitting to Frames: Doors shall not be field fitted to frames. Door system is pre-engineered and fabricated to specified sizes per Submittals; shop drawings. Field cutting of finish door assembly and finish frame cladding is prohibited. E. Install door hardware in accordance with Section 087100. END OF SECTION 081416 081416 - 112 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 083100— ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fire resistive rated and nonrated access doors, frames and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: For each type of product, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Shop Drawings: Include construction details for each type. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where an access door is required in fire rated construction, the access door assembly shall be labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, Warnock Hersey, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code authorities, to meet the hourly fire resistance rating of the construction in which the access door is installed. 1.4 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS DOORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milcor LP. (Lima, Oh; 800-441-6899). The Williams Brothers Corporation of America (Front Royal, VA; 800-255-5515). Nystrom Products Co. (Minneapolis MN; 612-781-7850). Karp Associates, Inc. (Maspeth NY; 718-784-2105). JL Industries (Bloomington, MN; 612-835-6850). B. Door Types: 1. Type 1: Nonrated concealed drywall access door: Flush type design, with integral attachment flange and drywall bead for flush installation. Minimum 16 gage frame; minimum 14 gage door panel. Fully concealed pin type hinges or continuous piano hinge, 175 degree opening. Latches: Type 1: Screw driver operated cam type. Type 2: Key operated cylinder lock with interior release; primary-keyed. C. Sizes: 1. Type 1: As indicated. D. Finish: 1. Type 1: Galvanized steel with wiped coat finish; prime units with manufacturer's standard primer to receive paint coatings as specified in Section 099000. 1.5 EXAMINATION I INSTALLATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 083100 - 113 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Install access doors of sizes and in locations as indicated. Provide access doors for access to balancing and fire dampers, trap primers, valves, fans, terminal units, and other equipment requiring periodic inspection through finished walls and ceilings, whether indicated or not. Coordinate access requirements with other trades. Provide concealed access doors at all locations within gypsum board assembly, except where fire rated doors are required. Install frames plumb and level in wall and ceiling openings, with plane of door surface in accurate alignment with plane of wall or ceiling surface. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 083100 083100 - 114 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 084226 - INTERIOR ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Interior sliding all-glass office entrance doors. Interior all-glass sidelights. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. a. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for all-glass system. 2. Shop Drawings: For all-glass entrances. Include plans, elevations, and sections. Include details of fittings and glazing. Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements. 3. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type Ill - EPD with Third party certification. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For all-glass systems to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ir.staller Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of interior glass door assemblies that demonstrate deterioration or faulty operation due to defects in materials or workmanship under normal use within warranty period specified 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Klein USA (East Rutherford, NJ; 973-246-8181) "Rollglass+ 100 KSC Silver". 1.8 METAL COMPONENTS Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed. Materials: 1. Aluminum: ASTM 6221, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063- T5. a. Finish: Silver. 084226 - 115 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.9 GLASS A. Fully Tempered Float Glass: 1. ASTM C1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3, with visible light transmission of not less than 91 percent; thickness 1/2 inch. 2. Low-iron Flat Glass Material: Ultraclear float glass; ASTM C1036. Locations: As indicated. 3. Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished. 4. Butt Edges: Flat ground. 1.10 SLIDING DOOR ASSEMBLIES A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Door Panels and Sidelights: Glass panels of material and thickness specified, of size indicated on Drawings. C. Sliding Door Track: Full-width extruded aluminum track with end caps, 2-3/4 inch high, designed for operation, size, and weight of glass panel door, with factory-finished track with concealed clamping roller carriers, integrated end-of-travel stops, and floor guide. 1. Finish: Anodic Finish: AAMA611-12, Class 11,0.010mm or thicker. Color: Silver. Track Mounting: 1) Ceiling surface-mounted. Door Panel Carriers: Concealed trolley system designed for operation, size, and weight of glass panel door, with ball-bearing wheels, and with clamp-on attachment to glass panels requiring no glass penetration. D. Sidelites: Captured by U channels integrated with door top track assembly. Bottom of sidelites held within dry gasket glazing channel. 1.11 DOOR HARDWARE AND FITTINGS A. Door Hardware, General: All-glass door hardware units in types, sizes, quantities, and mounting locations recommended by manufacturer for glass door types, sizes, and operation. Pulls and Handles: Back-to-back. a. Design: As indicated on Drawings. Locking: As indicated on Drawings. 1.12 FABRICATION General: Fabricate interior glass door assemblies in sizes, profiles, and configurations shown on Drawings. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessories prior to tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering. 1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite. 1.13 EXAMINATION A. Examine door opening to determine if work is within all-glass entrance manufacturers required tolerances and ready to receive work. Proceed with installation once conditions affecting installation and performance meet manufacturers requirements. 084226 - 116 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.14 DOOR INSTALLATION General: Comply with all-glass entrance manufacturers written installation instructions and approved shop drawings. Install interior glass door assemblies after other finishing operations have been completed. Coordinate installation of recesses housings with installation of adjacent finishes. Secure track to building structure using manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application. Install floor guides and track stops. Attach glass panels to track carriers and adjust panels to level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform clearances as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.15 ADJUSTING Adjust doors and hardware to produce smooth operation and uniform fit. Adjust sliding door installation for smooth operation. Rplace damaged glass panels and accessories. 1.16 CLEANING Clean glass panels in accordance with glass manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use cleaning agents or methods not approved by glass manufacturer. Clean exposed metal surfaces to factory new appearance. END OF SECTION 084226 084226 - 117 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 084429.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes 1. Sliding automatic entrances. Related requirements: Work specified elsewhere which is included in requirements of this Section, and which shall be coordinated with the work of this Section, includes the following: 080500 - Common Requirements for Glazing 088000 - Interior Glazing 084226 - All-Glass Entrances. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Definitions: AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA Al 56.10 for definitions of terms. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified elsewhere. Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrances. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances with hardware required for rest of Project. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with connections to power supplies, access-control system, remote activation devices and remote monitoring systems as necessary. System Integration: Integrate sliding automatic entrances with other systems as required for a complete working installation. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 01. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metals. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Shop Drawings: For sliding automatic entrances. a. In additional to the requirements of section 080500: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices. 084429.23 - 118 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations. Shop drawings to be signed and sealed by the licensed professional engineer in responsible charge. Samples: For each exposed product/material and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard sizes, accompanied by descriptive data sheets for each sample. When specified, include typical frame sections showing wall thickness and configurations. Glass Replacement Strategy, including all necessary material, equipment, and labor resources. Calculations: Submit comprehensive calculations signed and sealed by a professional engineer responsible for their preparation, licensed in the project jurisdiction, that show compliance with the performance requirements and design criteria. Calculations should include detailed finite element analysis of both the global structural system as well as all critical structural components, unless specifically directed otherwise by the design team. B. Inormational Submittals: Product Certificates: For each type of automatic entrance Product Test Reports: For each type of automatic entrance, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Field quality-control reports. Qualification Data: Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties. C. Closeout Submittals: Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Warranty Documentation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with Company Certificate issued by AAADM indicating that manufacturer has a Certified Inspector on staff. Irstaller Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 2 hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. B. Warranty does not include damage caused by vandalism or natural conditions exceeding the performance requirements. The warranty and its enforcement shall not deprive the Owner of other action, right or remedy available to him. C. Warranty Period: 1. Mechanical components and labor: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion 084429.23 - 119 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. All other materials: 10 years, unless a longer warranty term is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Extended Warranty: Owner reserves the right at any time during the material warranty period to negotiate a further extended warranty period with vendor. 1.7 PERFORMANCE I DESIGN CRITERIA A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design automatic entrances. B. Structural Performance: 1. Structural Movement: Make provisions for design of glass and glazing systems to accommodate differential structural movements, deflections, inter story drift and thermal movement of the building structure due to all actions and loads, including gravity load, wind loads, seismic loads, and temperature, and Owner usage-specific loads (i.e. large crowds during special product launch events). 2. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated thicknesses are minimums; select actual glass thicknesses by analyzing loads and conditions. Size glass to withstand imposed loads in accordance with Local Building Code requirements. Provide glass in thicknesses and strengths to meet or exceed the design values in ASTM E1300, EN 16612:2019 or DIN 18008, depending on project location. 3. Deflection Criteria - framing members shall be designed to limit their deflection under Imposed loads so as to not affect the performance of the system or induce second order affects: C. Entrapment-Prevention Force: a. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent stopped door from closing. 1.8 PRODUCTS A. Automatic Entrance Assemblies Source Limitations: Obtain sliding automatic entrances from single source from single manufacturer. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10. B. Telescoping Sliding Automatic Entrances General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances, including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete installation. 2. All-Glass Sliding Telescoping Automatic Entrance: Tormax TX9420FM Utility Configuration: 2ea 3-panel telescoping single-slide door systems synchronized in a biparting configuration; each system consisting of 2 telescoping sliding leaves and a fixed sidelite. Operator Features: Power opening and closing. Drive System: belt. Adjustable opening and closing speeds and forces. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated. 084429.23 - 120 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 5) Integrated concealed electromechanical locking device. Sliding-Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; with integrated anti-lift security clip; consisting of debris- dissipating nylon- or delrin-covered, sealed and lubricated ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous vibration dampened aluminum roller track, or ball- bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly. 1) Rollers: Minimum of four ball-bearing roller wheels and two anti-rise bushings for each active leaf. Sliding-Door Threshold: Custom stainless steel threshold per design drawings that integrates recessed bottom-guide-track system. Controls: Activation and safety devices as indicated on Drawings and according to BHMA standards. 1) Activation Device, Switch: Key switch to activate door operator. C. Linear Sliding Automatic Entrances General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances, including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls, and accessoriesrequired for a complete installation. 2. All-Glass Linear Sliding Automatic Entrance: a. Tormax TX9300FM Utility b. Configuration: Bi-parting slide door system consisting of 2 opposing in-line sliding leaves and fixed sidelites c. Operator Features: Power opening and closing. Drive System: belt. Adjustable opening and closing speeds and forces. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated. Integrated concealed electromechanical locking device d. Sliding-Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of debris-dissipating nylon- or delrin-covered, sealed and lubricated ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous vibration dampened aluminum roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly. 1) Rollers: Minimum of eight ball-bearing roller wheels and four anti-rise bushings for each active leaf e. Sliding-Door Threshold: Custom stainless steel threshold per design drawings thatintegrates recessed bottom-guide-track system. f. Controls: Activation and safety devices as indicated on Drawings and according to BHMAstandards. 1) Activation Device, Switch: Key switch to activate door operator. D. Entrance Components All-Glass Sliding Doors: Fabricated from laminated glass, with polished vertical edges and minimum 3/16" (5 mm) thick, stainless-steel top and bottom rails as indicated on the drawings. Rail Design: As indicated on drawings .. Fixed glazing/sidelights: As indicated on drawings 4. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 084429.23 - 121 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing. Capacity: a. Telescoping Slide Door System: Capable of supporting doors of up to 1,540 lb (700 kg) per leaf Each sliding door leaf shall be further limited in width based on a maximum drive belt span of 16-0" (4877 mm). Final panel sizes shall be determined with an engineering analysis taking into account environmental loading conditions (wind, snow etc) b. Linear Slide Door System: Capable of supporting doors of up to 2,200 lb (1,000 kg) per leaf Each sliding door leaf shall be further limited in width based on a maximum drive belt span of 16-0" (4877 mm). Final panel sizes shall be determined with an engineering analysis taking into account environmental loading conditions (wind, snow etc) Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength plated steel or stainless steel with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. Signage: As indicated in design drawings 1.9 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. Extrusions: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. C. Stainless Steel Bars: ASTM A276/A276M or ASTM A666 D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A554 E. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666 F. Glazing: As specified in Section 080500 and on Design Drawings G. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." and on Design Drawings. H. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM CII 07/Cl 107M; of consistency suitable for application. I. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1.10 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices, according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained remote-mount units (up to 82ft) powered by fraction-horsepower, wear-resistant gearless direct drive permanent magnet AC 084429.23 - 122 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Synchronous motor with a frequency converter to control door speeds and a self-learning closed loop fully programmable solid-state 32 bit! 30 MHz microprocessor controller; with continuously monitored and dynamically controlled speeds in both the opening and closing directions; with integrated distance measuring system to automatically calibrate the opening and closing check positions, and the full open and full closed position of door system; with separate user interface for fault diagnosis, electric lock status, & selection of 6 modes of operation (OFF, AUTO1, AUT02, EXIT, OPEN, MANUAL); complies with DIN 18650, EN 16005, EN 13849-1, EN IEC 60335-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3, UL 325 Key Switch: Camden CM-1220 SPDT Momentary keyswitch on interior and exterior of storefront. Functions: On-off, momentary contact. When door is in the closed position turning key clockwise disengages electromechanical locking device, opens door and maintains door in hold open position allowing free entry and exit. When door is in the open position turning key clockwise closes door and engages electromechanical locking device. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. 1.11 HARDWARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts as directed by architect. B. Automatic Locking: Manufacturers Fully Integrated electromechanical bi-stable locking device with feedback, mounted concealed inside header that automatically locks sliding door in closed position, preventing door panels from sliding manually; with on-board lock position feedback circuit monitored by motor control unit & user interface & wired to ceiling-mounted LED Position Indicator; configured for fail-secure operation if power fails. 1. Power Interruption: Maintain locked or unlocked state prior to power interruption. C. Uninterrupted Power Supply: UL 1778, fully integrated unit mounted at door control location Power Interruption: Allow full operation of door. APC Pro 1 000VA Battery Back Up c/w Surge Protection Once battery has fully discharged the door will lose power and fail secure locks will remain locked D. Emergency Stop Button: Camden CM-4040 PUSH/PULL, N/C Maintained Mushroom Style Emergency Stop Button c/w 1-5/8" Red Mushroom Button and Blank Faceplate. Installed within Fire Extinguisher Cabinet. When this button is pushed, the doors will stop immediately anywhere in their travel cycle If the doors are closed when this button is pushed, the locks will disengage and allow for manual operation of the door. Pulling button out the doors will continue their original path of travel If the doors are closed when the button is pulled out, the locks will engage and the door will no longer be able to be used manually E. Lock Status Indicator LED: Security Door Controls (SDC) Model 400U-LT1 Single Gang Faceplate with (1) Tr-Color LED (Red, Green, Amber) Generic Single Gang Galvanized Steel Utility Box measuring 4in (I) X 2-1/81n (w) X 2-1/8in (dp) Countdown Timer Device (generic) The purpose of the LED Indicator is to provide a momentary visual indication to store personnel alerting them the slide door electromechanical locking device is physically engaged ('LOCKED") or disengaged ("UNLOCKED"). For security purposes, the LED indicator shall 084429.23 - 123 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS turn off after a period of time to avoid alerting non-store personnel if the door is locked or unlocked. LED box assembly shall be installed on interior of building & concealed above ceiling tile using custom bracketry provided by others. Mounting brackets & hardware shall be positioned above ceiling space hidden from view. LED diode will be installed at the joint between ceiling panels, if not ceiling panel shall be drilled with 1/8" diameter thru hole to accept the LED diode. Location to be determined with project's architect. Door installer shall coordinate LED location & ceiling tile prep with general contractor Door Installer shall wire LED Indicator to countdown timer & sliding door control output to function as follows: LED to illuminate in a "RED" color for a timed period of 1 Os beginning at the moment the electromechanical locking device is engaged LED to illuminate in a "GREEN" color for a timed period of 1 O beginning at the moment the electromechanical locking device is disengaged At all other times the LED shall be turned "OFF" 1.12 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws fabricated from stainless steel. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 5. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints, with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from building structure. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units. 6. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. 7. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. 8. Glazing: Refer to 080500 specification 084429.23 - 124 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 9. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes. 1.13 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 1.14 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Refer to 080500 Specification. 1.15 EXAMINATION Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tclerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performane of automatic entrances. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic entrance installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.16 INSTALLATION A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA Al 56.10 for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, and connection to the building's power supply. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system. D. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect control wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." E. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 080500 F. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 080500 084429.23 - 125 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS G. Wring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturers written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 1.17 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Refer to Section 080500. 1.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Certified Inspector: Engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components, assemblies, and installations, including connections. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. 1.19 ADJUSTING Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 1.20 PROTECTION Protect all finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage during progress of the work. Comply with requirements of GANA and Section 015000. 1.21 CLEANING A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 080500. 1.22 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. Include preventive maintenance every six months: repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper automatic entrance operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. Engage a Certified Inspector to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair andat end of maintenance period. Furnish completed inspection reports to Owner. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 1.23 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances. 084429.23 - 126 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS END OF SECTION 084429.23 084429.23 - 127 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 087000 - DOOR HARDWARE 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Hardware for hollow metal doors. Cylinders for all-glass door locks. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Products: Provide each type of hardware (hinges, pivots, locksets, latchsets, closers, trim) from single manufacturer unless otherwise indicated in drawing Door Legend. 1. Provide products by manufacturers specified and manufacturers listed in drawing Door Legend, with references to catalog numbers and designations. B. Fire Rated Doors: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 and applicable codes for fire rated door hardware; provide hardware bearing Underwriters Laboratory (UL) labels. Doors indicated in fire rated partitions and walls shall be positive latching and self-closing, with smoke gaskets. Smoke control in pressurized areas: Provide automatic door bottoms in addition to standard smoke gaskets for fire and smoke rated doors in pressurized areas such as stair wells; comply with applicable code requirements. C. Access for Persons with Disabilities: Comply with applicable building code and Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts for each type of hardware. a. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and mounting heights of hardware. a. For electrified door hardware: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. 3. Furnish templates to door and frame manufacturers for proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut outs for hardware. 4. Keying Schedule: Coordinate directly with Owner's representative. a. Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Closeout Submittal: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and primary key codes on project record documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Supplier Qualifications: Recognized builder's hardware supplier with minimum five years' successful experience in scheduling and furnishing hardware. 1. Provide services of architectural hardware consultant to supervise hardware supply. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene preinstallation meeting prior to commencing work of this Section. include persons involved with installation of doors, frames, and hardware. 087000 - 128 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver hardware in manufacturer's original packages, marked for intended opening and use. 1. Pack complete with necessary screws, bolts, keys, instructions, and installation template, if necessary, for spotting mortising tools. Upon delivery, furnish complete list of hardware for checking, clearly marked to correspond with marking on each package. 1. Review list for completeness and accuracy. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. 1.7 MATERIALS A. General: Review drawings for hardware group locations and door types; where not fully covered in hardware schedule, comply with following general requirements; inform Architect where conflicts occur. provide hardware items with accessories complete to function as intended. B. Hinges and Butts: ANSI A156.1; comply with following unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers: As listed in the drawing Door Legend. a. Substitutions not permitted. Doors 1-3/4-inch-thick: 4-1/2 inches' heavy weight, extra heavy weight ball or oilite bearing where doors over 40 inches wide; furnish widths sufficient to clear trim projection when door swings 180 degrees. 3 See drawings for hinge quantities and locations. Provide nonferrous butts with non-removable pins at exterior and locked out swinging doors, nonrising at interior doors; stainless steel where labeled; steel butts at labeled interior doors. Provide ball bearing or oilite bearing hinges at doors with closers. Tips: Flat button tips with matching plug. C. Locking Devices: Provide of metal matching specified finish; interior parts of steel and zinc dichromate plating, to resist rusting and corrosion; do not supply plastic, die-cast or aluminum mechanisms. 1. Manufacturers: As listed in the drawing Door Legend. a. Substitutions not permitted. 2. Type: Mortise Locksets: ANSI Al 56.13, series 1000, grade I, mortise type with 6 pin tumbler cylinders, except where otherwise indicated in drawing Door Legend. Exit/Panic Devices: ANSI Al 56.3, grade 1, with 6 pin tumbler cylinders, except where otherwise indicated in the drawing Door Legend. Type: Mortise device with concealed vertical rods unless otherwise indicated. Style: Modern. 3. Lockset and Latchset Design: Solid lever with rose, as scheduled in the drawing Door Legend. 4. Backset: 2-3/4 inch. 5.. Strikes: Furnish standard strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt; verify type of cutouts provided in metal frames. D. Cylinders, Keys, And Keying: Hardware manufacturers shall provide for grand primary, primary key alike or key different keying as directed by Owner. Manufacturers: As listed in the drawing Door Legend. a. Substitutions not permitted. Provide cylinders of extruded brass bar material. 087000 - 129 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Provide construction cylinders for doors requiring locking during construction; construction cylinders shall be removed and replaced just prior to Owner occupancy. Submit keys for final use to Owner; provide not less than two keys for each lockset, six of each type and level of primary key, two grand primary keys, and five percent extra blanks. Hardware manufacturers shall key and register lock cylinders. Key Control System: Provide complete key control system with identification and storage capacity suitable for project. E. Closers: ANSI Al 56.4, furnish products of one manufacturer; full rack and pinion type with steel spring and non-freezing hydraulic fluid. 1. Manufacturers: As listed in the drawing Door Legend. a. Substitutions not permitted. 2. Provide controls for regulating closing, latching, speeds and back check. 3. Arm types shall suit individual conditions, as approved; supply parallel arm closers at reverse bevel doors and where doors swing full 180 degrees. 4. Mount closer body on door leaf on room side or pull side unless otherwise indicated. 5. Sizes: Adjustable to following maximum door operating pressures: Typical doors: 5 pounds. Fire rated doors: 15 pounds. Make labeled doors self-closing. Closers shall be adjusted by factory representative. 6. Design: As indicated in the drawing Door Legend. F. Thresholds, Stops, Trim, And Miscellaneous Hardware: Provide as indicated, as specified, as included in hardware schedule, and as required for complete installation. Manufacturers: As listed in the drawing Door Legend. a. Substitutions not permitted. Weatherstripping: Provide continuous weather-stripping at top and sides of exterior doors. Fire Rated Gaskets: Provide continuous fire rated gaskets at top and sides of fire rated doors. Kick Plates: Height indicated by 1 inch less than door width; minimum 0.050 inch thick. Pulls: Provide with bolts to secure from opposite door face; provide with pull plates unless otherwise indicated. 1.8 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide complete hardware with accessories as required for doors and applications indicated. B. Templates: Furnish templates or physical hardware items to manufacturers concerned sufficiently in advance to avoid delay in work. C. Reinforcing Units: Furnished by door manufacturer, coordinated by hardware manufacturer. D. Fasteners: Furnish as recommended by manufacturer and as required to install secure hardware. Finish: Match hardware. Furnish screws for items applied on gypsum board sufficiently long to provide solid connection to framing or backing. E. Through Bolts: Through bolts and grommet nuts shall be avoided on door faces in highly visible areas, unless no alternative is possible, as directed and approved, and shall not be used for solid wood core doors. F. Electrical and Mechanical: Make provisions and coordinate requirements for mechanical and electrical devices in connection with hardware. 087000 - 130 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.9 FINISHES A. Provide finishes in the drawing Door Legend. 1.10 INSTALLATION Install finish hardware specified under this Section; coordinate with manufacturer and installation of doors and frames. Fit hardware prior to painting. Remove for painting of doors and frames before final installation of hardware. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturers instructions. No extra cost will be allowed because of changes or corrections necessary to facilitate installation of hardware. 1.11 MOUNTING POSITIONS A. Heights given are center line heights from finished floor. Locks and Latches: 36 inches to center of lever unless otherwise noted on drawings. Door Pulls: 42 inches to center of grip unless otherwise noted on drawings. Push Plate: 42 inch; coordinate with pull location unless otherwise noted on drawings. Top Hinge: To jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 10 inches from head of frame to center line of hinge. Bottom Hinge: To jamb manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 12-1/2 inches from floor to center line of hinge. Intermediate Hinges: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges and from each other. Hinge Mortise on Door Leaf: 114 inch to 5/16 inch from stop side of door. Dead Bolt: Not more than 44 inches from floor to operating lever unless otherwise noted on drawings. B. Comply with recommendations of Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, subject to approval, for heights of items not indicated. 1.12 ADJUSTING A. Qualified hardware supplier's or manufacturer's representatives shall inspect installation and make adjustments. Adjust closers, locks, and critical operational hardware. Deliver instructions for maintenance and future adjustments to Owner's representative. 1.13 DOOR LEGEND The drawing Door Legend establishes a type and standard of quality. Examine drawings and specifications and furnish proper hardware for door openings, whether listed or not. Bring omissions to attention of Owner prior to bid opening for instructions; otherwise, list will be considered complete; no extras will be allowed. END OF SECTION 087000 087000 - 131 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 088000— INTERIOR GLAZING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Miscellaneous glass and glazing not provided elsewhere including accessories as required for complete installation. Refer to section 080500 for common requirements for glazing including Manufacturers, Materials, Fabrication, and Installation. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Safety Glass Standard: CPSC 16 CFR 1201, ANSI Z97.1, category II. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review 1. Product Data: Furnish for each type of glass other than clear glass, and each type of exposed glazing material. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS A. As specified in Section 080500. 1.5 MATERIALS A. As specified in Section 080500. 1.6 PREPARATION Clean glazing channels and framing members to receive glass immediately before glazing; remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrate. Apply primer to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer. 1.7 INSTALLATION A. Comply with GANA glazing manual and sealant manual and glazing manufacturer instructions. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces. Comply with NFPA 80 for glass in fire rated openings. B. Place setting blocks at quarter points in thin course of sealant. C. Sealant Glazing: Fill gap between glass and stops with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not more than 3/8 inch below sightline. 1. Apply sealant to uniform and level line, flush with sightline; tool or wipe sealant surface for smooth appearance; at exterior locations tool sealant so water is carried away from glass. END OF SECTION 088000 .4 088000 - 132 OF 220 1011012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 088323 - GLASS MIRRORS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Changing room framed mirrors. Restroom mirrors. Accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions. Include installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment details. 3. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. B. C oseout Submittals: 1. Cleaning Instructions: Submit manufacturer's cleaning instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years' experience manufacturing mirror. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver mirror to site in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Deliver mirror in manufacturer's or fabricator's original containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Storage: 1 Store mirror in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Store mirror in clean, dry area indoors. 3. Protect from exposure to direct sunlight and freezing temperatures. 4. Apply temporary coverings loosely to allow adequate ventilation. 5. Protect from contact with corrosive chemicals. 6. Avoid placement of mirror's edge on concrete, metal, and other hard objects. 7. Rest mirror on clean, cushioned pads at 1/4-points. C. handling: Handle mirror in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect mirror from damage during handling and installation. Do not slide 1 lite of mirror against another. Do not use sharp objects near unprotected mirror. 1.5 WARRANTY Furnish 5 year manufacturer's warranty, executed to Owner, under provisions of Section 017700. Warranty: Include coverage of glass and coating against discoloration, silver spoilage (including telegraphing of mastic), and manufacturing defects. 088323 - 133 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.6 MATERIALS A. Ultraclear Float Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality-Q3; and with visible light transmission of not less than 91 percent. 1. Acceptable Products: Guardian Glass, LLC; "UltraClear." Pilkington North America; "Pilkington OptifloatTM Clear." Vitro Architectural Glass; Starphire." B. Frameless Mirror: ASTM C1503, with fabricator's standard full-silver coating applied to minimum average dry film thickness of 1.4 mils. Grade: Mirror Cut Size. Color: Clear. Thickness: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). Size/Shape: As detailed. Edge: Arrised flat polished edges. C. Framed Mirror: ASTM C1503, with fabricator's standard full-silver coating applied to minimum average dry film thickness of 1.4 mils. Grade: Mirror Cut Size. Color: Clear. Thickness: 6.0 mm (1/4 inch). Size/Shape: As detailed. Edge: Aluminum J channel framed edge at top and bottom Frame Finish: Satin Anodized finish D. Accessories 1. Mounting Adhesive: One of the following Palmer Products Corporation (800-431-6151) "Mirro Mastic"; "Mirro Mastic Bond" primer. Royal Adhesives and Sealants (South Bend, IN; 800-227-6181) Gunther Mirror Mastic "ULTRA/BOND"; "Prim e-N-Seal" primer. Royal Adhesives and Sealants (South Bend, IN; 800-227-6181) Gunther Premier Plus Mirror Mastic"; VOC log/L. 2. Mounting Retainers - Changing Room Mirrors: Manufacturer: C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. (Union City, CA; 510-475-1000). Top Channel: Predrilled and dimpled for screw attachment; No. D58BA 5/16 inch Deep Nose "J" Channel. Bottom Channel: Predrilled and dimpled for screw attachment; No. D516BA 5/16 inch Standard "J" Channel. Finish: Brite anodized aluminum. Screws: Stainless steel flathead wood or sheet metal screws; #8 x 2 inches. 3. Mounting Retainers - Restroom Mirrors: Manufacturer: C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. (Union City, CA; 510-475-1000). Top and Bottom Channel: Predrilled and dimpled for screw attachment; No. L902BA L-Bar Extrusion. Provide black felt pads on bottom angle for setting mirror. Finish: Brite anodized aluminum. Screws: Stainless steel flathead wood or sheet metal screws; #8 x 2 inches. 4. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A Durometer hardness, 1/8 inch thick. 5. Shims: Clear softwood, milled to thickness as necessary for installation of mirrors according to detail, and to hold mirrors in contact with front of mounting retainer recess 088323 - 134 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are sound, smooth, plane, dry, and ready for mirror installation, and are within the tolerances specified for metal framing and gypsum board construction. B. Verify that continuous backing is present for fastening of mounting clips. C. Verify the following substrate finish requirements prior to installation: Paint has been applied to substrate as detailed at gaps between mirrors. Substrate surfaces to receive adhesive are unpainted. D. Beginning of installation constitutes Contractor acceptance of conditions. 1.8 PREPARATION Verify areas to receive mirror are correct size and within tolerance. Verify areas to receive mirror are clean and free of obstructions. Install temporary block to support bottom edge of mirror, if necessary. 1.9 INSTALLATION, CHANNEL SUPPORTED MIRRORS A. Installation of Mounting Channels: Install mounting channels at bottom edge. Fasten with specified screws at 6 inches on center along the channel, with minimum 4 screws per mirror panel. Fasten top channel at 12 inches on center. Provide adequate clearance in the deep-nose channel at the top for installation of mirror. Install channels continuous in longest practical lengths; where splices are required, install for tight fit; locate joints at approximate midpoints of mirror edges. B. Use mirror adhesive to install shims. C. Insert setting blocks in bottom channel at mirror quarter points. D. Adhesive Installation: Apply primer to substrate in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's printed instructions. Allow primer to dry. Apply adhesive in pats to thickness that will ensure adequate contact of mirror back with each pat and provide an airspace behind mirrors to allow air circulation. E. Lift mirror into the top channel then tip mirror into adhesive and lower into the bottom channel. 1.10 INSTALLATION, L-BAR EXTRUSION SUPPORTED MIRRORS A. Installation of L-Bar Extrusion: Install extrusion at bottom edge. Fasten with specified screws at 6 inches on center along the extrusion, with minimum 4 screws per mirror panel. Install extrusion continuous in longest practical lengths; where splices are required, install for tight fit; locate joints at approximate midpoints of mirror edges. B. Install black felt pads extrusion at mirror quarter points. C. Adhesive Installation: Apply primer to substrate in accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's printed instructions. Allow primer to dry. Apply adhesive in pats to thickness that will ensure adequate contact of mirror back with each pat and provide an airspace behind mirrors to allow air circulation. D. Lift mirror into the extrusion then tip mirror into adhesive. 088323 - 135 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify mirror is free of chips, cracks, and other defects that could inhibit structural or aesthetic integrity. 1.12 CLEANING Remove labels from mirror surface. Clean mirror promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage mirror. 1.13 PROTECTION A. Protect installed mirror from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION 088323 END OF DIVISION 08 088323 - 136 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 092200 - NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Nonloadbearing interior partition framing. Steel backing. Structural design of light gage metal support framing systems. Fire rated construction joint assemblies in fire-rated construction, including joints at the following locations: a. Where steel stud partition heads meet the underside of overhead floor and roof construction. Security Mesh. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Environmentat Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Design: Structural design of light gage metal framing systems shall be furnished by the Contractor. Select framing systems, gages, supports, bracing, and connections as necessary to meet the structural requirements specified below. Conform to partition framing widths indicated, unless approved otherwise. provide thicker gages and decreased stud spacing as necessary to meet the design requirements. Select framing members based on the manufacturer's published span tables. Splicing of members is not permitted; unless splice connection is engineered for adequate strength and stiffness to meet design loads for each instance. B. Design Loads: Interior partitions without wall mounted casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral load. Partitions with wall mounted casework: 25 pounds per linear foot per shelf; 100 per linear foot per counter. Seismic loads: Conform to the requirements of currently enforced edition of the International Building Code (IBC). C. Deflection Requirements: 1. Maximum deflection of L/240 for flexible finish materials such as gypsum board and veneer plaster. 2.. Maximum deflection of L1360 for rigid finish materials including tiles. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Listed by Underwriters Laboratory, Gypsum Association (GA) file no's in GA-600 fire resistance design manual or other listing approved by applicable authorities. E. Systems Responsibility: Provide products manufactured by or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board to maintain single source responsibility for system. F. Openings: Obtain dimensions and locations from other trades and provide openings and enclosures for accessories, specialties, equipment, and ductwork. G. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to the seal. 092200 - 137 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS H. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of movement and tested for this purpose in accordance with a cyclic movement test criterion as outlined in standards, ASTM El 399, ASTM El 966 or ANSI/UL 2079. 1. Provide fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test conducted in accordance with standard, ANSI/UL2079 with published L-ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of the ability of the fire-resistive joint system to restrict the movement of smoke. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Framing Materials: Comply with ASTM C754, 20 gage and lighter, coordinate with Section 054000; where not otherwise indicated, provide gages as recommended by manufacturer for spans and loads indicated and as required by applicable codes. I. Studs: ASTM C645, screw type, cee shaped. 2. Runners: Match studs. 3. Furring Members: ASTM C645, screw-type, hat-shaped. 4. Partition head compensating track (non-rated): Design for minimum ±1/2-inch deflection. profiles as indicated; one of the following: 30m11s (20 gage) deep leg track; minimum 2 112 inch legs. Cemco "Slotted Track (CST)" or Brady Construction Innovations, Inc. "Slip Track Systems" 5. Partition head compensating track (fire rated): "Fire Trak" by fire Trak Corporation, Kimball, MN; 612-398-7800. Based on UL assemblies listed on the drawings. B. Fire Rated Construction Joint Assemblies: 1. Metal stud I gypsum board partition head construction joint assembly: Based on UL assemblies listed on the drawings. Forming Material: Preformed mineral fiber as listed in the UL assembly; minimum 4 pounds per cubic foot density. Manufacturers: Fibrex Insulations Inc. Owens Corning HT Inc. Div. of Owens Corning. Rock Wool Manufacturing Co. Rockwool. Thermafiber LLC. C. Channels: Hot or cold rolled channels; rust inhibitive paint coating; sizes in accordance with ASTM C754. D. Hangers: ASTM A641, Class I wire not less than sizes in Table No. 5 of ASTM C754 and as required by applicable codes; hanger rods, flat hangers, and angle type hangers as required. E. Suspension System: ASTM C635, suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members interlocking to form supporting network; recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer. F. Fasteners and Anchorages: As recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer. G. Security Mesh: McNichols #5500340948 expanded stainless steel, flattened, Type 316; 3/4-inch, No. 9, 66% open area; 48 inches by 96 inches. Attachment: Flat washers and standard framing fasteners. Optional: Amico "Secura-Clips" with #8 shank, fine thread fasteners. 092200 - 138 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.5 INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing Erection: Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10-0" in any direction. Door Opening Framing: install double studs at door frame jambs; install runners on each side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs. Use minimum 30mi1s (20 gage) studs at partitions to receive wall mounted shelving, counters, or other casework. Install metal framing backing where required for support of fixtures, cabinets, accessories and hardware. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing; allow items to be installed after framing is complete. B. Ceiling Framing Installation: Erect in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate location of hangers with other work; provide trapeze supports and steel bracing as required to support ceiling. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. Space main carrying channels at maximum 48 inch on center, not more than 6 inches from perimeter walls. a. Lap splices minimum 12 inch and secure together 2 inches from each end of splice. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at maximum 24 inch on center and not more than 2 inches from perimeter walls. Lap splices minimum 8 inch and secure together 2 inches from each end of splice. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing; extend bracing minimum 24 inch past each end of openings. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 1.6 INSTALLATION OF FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION JOINT ASSEMBLIES Install construction joint assemblies in accordance with the fire rated assemblies listed, and as necessary to meet the specified fire rating requirements. Coordinate installation of integral components as necessary to ensure the fire rating of the assemblies. END OF SECTION 092200 092200 - 139 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 092713 - QUARTZ 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Installation of OFCI Quartz. 1.2 MANUFACTURER A. As specified in drawings. 1.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and approved shop drawings. END OF SECTION 092713 092713 - 140 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Gypsum board, joint treatment and general accessories for complete installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. Material Ingredient Reporting Certifications - Health Product Declaration (HPD). Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate responsibility report for each manufacturer. Greenguard Gold. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with GA-216, unless specified otherwise. or required otherwise to meet fire rating requirements. Manufacturer Qualifications: Gypsum board manufactures shall be current member(s) of the Gypsum Association. Regulatory Requirements: Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. assemblies shall be approved by the local jurisdictional authorities. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the conflict has been resolved. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C840; maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges on boards to be finished. 1 Typical: ASTM Cl 396, type x, fire rated gypsum board, unless otherwise indicated. a. Basis of Design Product: USG Sheetrock EcoSmart Panels Firecode X. 2. First layer at double layer applications: ASTM C1396 or ASTM C442, Type X, fire rated gypsum backing board. 3. Tile Backer Board: Glass mesh reinforced cement board; Greerguard Gold. a. Board Material: 1/2 inch nominal thickness aggregated portland cement panel, reinforced with glass fiber mesh; one of the following. Basis of Design Product: National Gypsum Company (Charlotte, NC; 800-628-4662) "Permabase." FinPan (Hamilton Oh; 800-833-6444) "Util-A-Crete." USG Corporation (Chicago, IL; 312-436-4000) "Durock." b. Tape for glass mesh board: Open weave glass mesh joint tape, self-adhesive; 2-1/2 inches wide. c. Fasteners: As recommended by the backer board manufacturer; thread forming self- drilling wafer head screws; polymer coated or zinc plated; USG "Durock Screws," "Rock On," or Owner approved. B. Gypsum Board Accessories: Comply with ASTM C840. Provide protective coated steel corner beads and edge trim; type designed to be concealed in finished construction by tape and joint compound. Corner Beads: Manufacturer's standard metal beads. Edge Trim and Casing: "J", "L", "LK", or "LC" casing beads in accordance with GA-216. 092900 - 141 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, fasteners: Types recommended by systen manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C475. a. Typical Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type for bedding and filling, ready mixed or powder vinyl type for topping. Control Joints: Back to back casing beads. a. Back control joints with 4 mil thick polyethylene air seal. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Board Installation: Install in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring and to framing. C. Allow a gap where gypsum board extends to overhead structure and deflection provisions are incorporated into light gage metal framing. Do not fasten gypsum board to top runner. D. Hold gypsum board 1/2-inch from top of slab. E. For fire rated systems comply with requirements for fire ratings. F. Fire-Rated Construction Joints: At heads of fire rated metal stud and gypsum board partitions, install gypsum board in accordance with UL assemblies listed on the drawings. Where proprietary fire rated compensating channels are used at heads of fire rated metal stud and gypsum board partitions, install gypsum board in accordance with the track manufacturer's instructions. Arrange gypsum board to allow for deflection of overhead structure without damage to components. Fill joints between gypsum board surfaces and adjacent construction with fire rated joint compound in accordance with the requirements of the fire rated construction joint assembly manufacturer. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed by Owner and drawings. Provide where system abuts structural elements. Provide at dissimilar materials. Wings of "L", "U" and "1" shaped ceilings. Lengths exceeding 30-0" in partitions. Ceiling areas exceeding 50-0" or 2500 square feet. G. Place corner beads at external corners; use longest practical lengths. H. Place edge trim and casings where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. I. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners and openings to produce surface ready to receive finishes; feather coats onto adjoining surfaces. J. Levels of Finish: [Level 5: Required for surfaces indicated to receive lime-based venetian plaster, and at other rooms scheduled to receive flat sheen ceiling paint.] Level 4 - Typical: Provide three coat finishing and sanding is required for surfaces indicated to be painted; provide flush, smooth joints and surfaces ready for applied paint finishes. Level 3: Provide at the following locations. Storage rooms. Mechanical rooms. Janitors closets. 092900 - 142 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 4. Level 2: Provide at surfaces of non-fire rated assemblies concealed from view in the finished work, including surfaces to be covered by casework and wall paneling. 5. Level 1: Provide at the following locations: Surfaces of fire rated assemblies concealed from view in the finished work (fire-taping"). Surfaces of acoustical assemblies concealed from view in the finished work 6. Level 0: Not used. END OF SECTION 092900 092900 - 143 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Floor/base and wall/wainscot tile installations with accessories, as required for complete installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of material to be provided for project. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. Sustainable Design Submittals: Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. Material Ingredient Reporting Certifications - Health Product Declaration (HPD). Greenguard Gold. 1.3 MATERIALS A. Tile, Floor/Base and wall/wainscot: Types as indicated on Finish Legend. B. Latex Thin Set: ANSI Al 18.4; thin set bond coat, consisting of latex cementitious mortar. Manufacturers: a. Basis of Design: Laticrete International Inc. "Laticrete 253 Gold." Acceptable Options: Subject to compliance with Contract Document requirements and Owner's approval of conformance to sustainable design intent: Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment. Mapei Corp. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. C. Epoxy Grout: ANSI Al 18.3; 100 percent solids epoxy type, color match as scheduled. D. Waterproof Membrane: ANSO A118.10 Type: Load bearing, single component, cold liquid applied type, with reinforcing fabric. Source: Waterproofing Membrane by Laticrete International, Inc. (www.laticrete.com) or Owner approved substitute. E. Joint Sealant: Sanded sealant for use at floor to wall joint. Color match to the scheduled grout. F. Cleaning and Sealing Materials: As recommended by tile and grout manufacturers, such as Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment CeramaSeal. G. Special Tile Trim Pieces: Provide where required and as indicated on drawings. 1. Manufacturers: SchlUter Systems L.P. 1.4 PREPARATION Prior to installing tile, ensure surfaces are level. 1. Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch in 10-0". Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation; apply latex leveling material where necessary to meet required tolerances. 093013 - 144 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.5 INSTALLATION A. Install waterproof membrane in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Methods: Walls: ANSI A108.5, thin set with latex-Portland cement mortar. a. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A108.6. Floors: ANSI Al 08.5, thin set with latex-Portland cement mortar over waterproofing membrane. a. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A108.6. C. Place tile in accordance with patterns indicated on drawings or as directed by Owner; carefully plan tile layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through doorways. 1. Apply latex thin set to back of tile where necessary to ensure 100 percent bond between bond coat and substrate; replace tiles which break due to voids between tile and substrate. D. Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains; accurately form corners, base, intersections and returns. 1. Base, Coves: Flush cove type with base grout joint on wall, cove tile on floor, unless otherwise indicated. E. Ensure tile joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout. F. Sound tile after setting, remove and replace hollow sounding units. G. A low tile to set for a minimum 48 hours prior to grouting. H. Grout tile to comply with recommendations of TCNA. I. Clean tile surfaces free of foreign matter upon completion of grouting. J. Seal all tile surfaces where recommended by manufacturer for materials and applications involved; comply with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 093013 093013 - 145 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 093033 - STONE TILING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Stone tile. Crack isolation membranes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: Furnish manufacturers literature for each type of material to be provided for project. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. Sustainable Design Submittals: Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. Material Ingredient Reporting Certifications - Health Product Declaration (HPD). Greenguard Gold. 1.3 PERFORMANCE! DESIGN CRITERIA: A. Performance Requirements: 1. Slip Resistance: Unless approved otherwise, measured average Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF) of each type of floor tile shall be as follows, when measured using a Regan Scientific Instruments Bot-3000 Tribometer, in accordance with ANSI A326.3. Typical (Except as Noted): Not less than 0.32 (WET), with no individual result less than 0.30 (WET). Tile for Installation in Interior Entrance Areas Within 12 Feet of the Interior Entrance Door: Not less than 0.45 (WET), with no individual result less than 0.42 (WET). Restroom Interiors: Not less than 0.45 (WET), with no individual result less than 0.42 (WET). Ramps Which May be Wet in Service: Not less than 0.48 (WET), with no individual result less than 0.45 (WET). 1.4 STONE PRODUCTS A. Stone Tile Type per drawing Finish Legend. 1. Granite: Complying with ASTM C615/C615M. 1.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANES A. General: Manufacturer's premium product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI Al 18.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch (0.76-mm) nominal thickness. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by The Noble Company. C. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: 1. System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and fabric reinforcement. 093033 - 146 OF 220 10!10!2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corporation. 1.6 WATERPROOF MEMBRANES A. General: Manufacturer's premium product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Noble Company (The). Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch. C. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: 1. System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corporation. 1.7 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Setting Mortar: ANSI Al 08.02, Al 18.4. Product: Ardex Americas "X 32 Microtec" Universal Rapid Setting and Drying Thin-to-Thick Bed Mortar Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which water must be added at Project site or dry- mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive at Project site. Refer to manufacturer's recommendations for thick bed (cured mortar bed) in excess of 1-1/4 inches. B. Accessories: 1. Decoupling/Cleavage membrane; polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D-4397, 6 mils thick. 2.. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded-wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 1/16 inch in diameter; comply with ASTM Al 85/Al 85M and ASTM A82/A82M except for minimum wire size. 3. Expanded Metal Lath: Diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C847, for Portland cement plaster scratch coat. Base Metal and Finish for Interior Applications: Uncoated or zinc-coated galvanized steel sheet, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath. Configuration over Studs and Furring: Flat. Configuration over Solid Surfaces: Self furring. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd. 4 Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex additive manufacturer for use with field mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed. 1.8 GROUT MATERIALS A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A108.10, A118.7. 1. Product per drawing Finish Legend. 093033 - 147 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. Compressive Strength: 3925 psi. Tensile strength: 500 psi. Service Rating: Passing ASTM C627 cycles 1-14 TCA "Extra Heavy". 1.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Patching Compounds: Latex modified, Portland cement based formulation specified in Section 035416. B. By manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match stone tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless steel, ASTM A276/A276M or ASTM A666, 300 Series exposed-edge material. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Blanke Corporation. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc. Schluter Systems L.P. D. Protective Coating: Grout stain protection may be needed. Determine the staining potential of the stone/grout combination during pre-construction testing and make recommendations grout release protectant. Liquid grout release coating that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of stone tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with stone, mortar, and grout products; easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or stone tile; and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for stone tile. Floor sealer complying with "Floor Sealer" Paragraph below may be used provided it is recommended by manufacturer for use as a grout release. E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming stone tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by stone tile producers and grout manufacturers. Concentrated neutral detergent (pH: 7.2, 10 percent solution in water, density: 1 .005 kg/L) with a base of anionic surfactants not exceeding 5 percent, non-ionic surfactants more than 5 percent but less than 15 percent; used for the initial cleaning of the stone surfaces. Shall not damage aluminum or metal trims. Design product: a. Fila Chemicals USA, Corp., CLEANALL; Miami, Florida (305) 513-0708. Sealant for Soft Joints: 1. Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." 2. Basis of Design: Laticrete International, Inc. "Latasil'; color 88 Silver Shadow. Acceptable options from the following manufacturers (subject to compliance with Contract Document requirements and Architect's approval of color and conformance to design intent) will also be considered: MAPEI Corporation. 3. Primer for Joint Sealant: "Latasil" 9118 applied to stone edges sealed for stain protection. 093033 - 148 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS G. Surface Protection: Colorless, breathable impregnator, prevent damage to stone from soiling and stains. Product shall not affect the color and physical properties of stone initially and over time. Floor Sealer: Stain and water proofing protector without hydrocarbon solvents, based of water suspension of organic resins (density: 1.004 kg/L; pH: 9.9), penetrating sealer (it does not form surface film) natural effect, non-yellowing, breathable, certified food-safe. Basis of Design Product: 1) Sealer: Fila Chemicals USA, Corp.; MP90 Eco Plus, water based, high performance penetrating sealer; Miami, Florida, (305) 513-0708. 2. Floor Finish: Matte finish protective wax, to maintain unpolished natural stone. a. Protective Wax: Natural effect water-based filming finish based on an emulsion of hard waxes and polymers with the addition of a matting agent (density: 1.004 kg I L, water soluble). Anti-dust effect. Anti-dirt action on the floor. Removable. 1) Basis of Design Product: a) Wax: Fila Chemicals USA, Corp.; "Matt" matte finish protective wax. 1.10 FABRICATION A. Facial Dimensions of Stone Tiles with Polished or Honed Faces: Do not vary facial dimensions from specified dimensions by more than plus or minus 1/64 inch (0.4 mm). B. Facial Dimensions of Stone Tiles with Thermal-Finished Faces: Do not vary facial dimensions from specified dimensions by more than plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). C. Backs of Tiles: Gage units by dressing backs of tiles smooth and flat. When tested with a 24-inch (600-mm) straightedge, gap shall not exceed 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). Natural-cleft stone need not be gaged if gap does not exceed 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) when tested with a 24-inch (610-mm) straightedge on backs of units. D. Thresholds: Fabricate to size and profile as indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel edges of thresholds at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. Where difference in floor levels exceeds 1/2 inch, a ramp with a slope not exceeding 1:12 shall be used to accommodate people with disabilities. 1.11 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where stone tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting stone tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 093033 - 149 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Verify that concrete substrates for stone tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thin set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI Al 08.01 for installations indicated. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.12 PREPARATION Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for stone tile floors installed with thin set mortar with trowelable patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproof membrane by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI Al 08.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains. 1.13 INSTALLATION OF STONE TILE A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in stone tile installation schedules. B. Comply with parts of the ANSI Al 08 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods specified in stone tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI Al 08 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: Stone tile floors in wet areas. Stone tile floors consisting of stone tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. C. Extend stone tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of stone tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of stone tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit stone tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap stone tile. E. Finish cut stone tile edges that will not be concealed by other construction by grinding and honing cut surfaces and easing edges to match factory-fabricated edges unless otherwise indicated. F. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. G. Jointing Pattern: Lay stone tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out stone tile work and center stone tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out stone tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. H. Match stone tiles within each space by selecting tiles to achieve uniformity of color and pattern. Reject or relocate stone tiles that do not match color and pattern of adjacent tiles. I. Mix stone tiles to achieve a uniformly random distribution of color shadings and patterns. J. Pattern Orientation: For stone varieties with directional pattern, orient pattern as indicated K. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and stone tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing stone tiles. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in stone tile surfaces directly above them. 093033 - 150 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS L. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated where exposed edge of stone tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of stone tile. 1.14 INSTALLATION OF CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANES A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. 1.15 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical joints, external corners, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8 ft. (3 mm in 2.4 m). B. Variation in Level: For horizontal joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 ft. (3 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm). C. Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 ft. (3 mm in 3 m)from level or slope indicated when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed the following differences between faces of adjacent units as measured from a straightedge parallel to stone tiled surface: Units with Polished Faces: 1/64 inch (0.4 mm). Units with Honed Faces: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). Units with Sand-Rubbed Faces: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). Units with Thermal-Finished Faces: Depth of thermal finish or 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is less. Units with Natural-Cleft Faces: Depth of natural-cleft finish or 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is less. E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. 1.16 SEALANT-FILLED SOFT JOINTS Apply approved stone sealer to tile edges to prevent staining caused by joint sealants. Apply sealant manufacturer's recommended primer to sealed stone edges prior to sealant application. 1.17 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean stone tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Wash the floor surface with tile cleaner (Subparagraph 1.9E.). Diluted each 6.76 fl. oz (200mL) of cleaner with 169.07 fl. oz. (5L) of water. Spread over the floor as recommended by manufacturer and leave to act for five minutes. Work with single disc professional cleaner. Use wet/dry vacuum to remove residues and then rinse thoroughly with clean water. Allow floor surface to completely dry, but for not less than 24 hours. B. Apply sealer to cleaned stone tile flooring in accordance with sealer manufacturer's written instructions. On a clean and dry floor surface (24 hours after), apply the floor sealer (Subparagraph 1.9G.1.) with a paintbrush or lamb's wool applicator, making sure to fully saturate the surface Let sit for 10 minutes, then wipe and rub the surface to allow the product to completely penetrate, and remove any excess with a dry cloth, lamb's wool pad or sponge. After five hours, apply the floor wax. Dilute each 33.81 fl. oz. (1 L) of floor wax (Subparagraph 1.9G.2.) with 6.76 fl. oz (200mL) of water. On a clean, dry floor surface, apply one even coat 093033 - 151 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS of wax using a clean cloth or lamb's wool applicator. Wait until completely dry, but not less than one hour, before walking on the surface. 1.18 PROTECTION A. Installed stone paving shall be protected from scratching, chipping, spills, stains, and any other threats to the finished stone payers. Protection shall be installed by qualified workers wearing clean white gloves. Protection shall be installed using new, clean, non-staining materials. Care shall be taken to minimize the attachment of any protection materials directly to the stone. Any such connecting materials shall be non-staining. No protection material shall be attached to the stone using screws, clips or any other device requiring holes and / or any kind of modification to the stone or stone joint material which comes in contact with the stone. Prior to commencing the installation of protection, survey the status of the project with the designated Apple, Inc. Development Manager to determine the extent of protection that can be installed so as not to interfere with other installations. a. If applicable, use wood blocking and rigid insulation to protect exposed corners and edges of the stone cladding prior to installing any other protection materials. b. Ensure that surfaces of the stone paving are covered and protected after each of the following material installations: Install one layer of polyethylene sheeting of 6 mil thickness over the entire area to be protected. Overlap joints by a minimum of 12 inches. Tape the sheeting joints. Install one layer of minimum 1/2-inch thick rigid insulation on top of the polyethylene sheeting. Butt the insulation panels tight to one another. Tape the insulation panel joints. Install one layer of minimum 1/2-inch thick plywood on top of the rigid insulation. Butt the plywood panels tight to one another. Tape the plywood joints. c. Cut protection to fit reasonably tight around any penetrations or areas designated not to be covered. Tape joints, edges, and around penetrations. d. Coordinate with the designated Apple, Inc. Development Manager to inspect the protection installation for the stone paving and document issues requiring corrective action. e. Correct items requested by the designated Apple, Inc. Development Manager until final acceptance of protection installation is obtained. f. Inspect protection daily and maintain integrity until time of removal. Remove and replace protection as required to maintain protection in areas affected by spills or other threats to the finished stone paving. B. When directed to do so by the Apple Development Manager, remove protection. Removal prior to authorization by the designated Apple, Inc. Development Manager is prohibited. Ensure that protection is removed only after construction, installation, cleaning, and acceptance of other materials and/or installations are completed. Protection shall only be removed when necessary to have access to the stone paving for final applications or installations. Remove protection materials as follows: Personnel that will come into contact with the stone paving must wear clean white gloves. Remove materials in such a manner to capture for removal any dust, dirt, sawdust, or other debris. Immediately dispose of removed material in a designated area. 1.19 INTERIOR STONE TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. TCNA Fill STONE and ANSI A108.lC: Cement mortar bed (thickset) with cleavage membrane. 093033 - 152 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Bond Coat for Cured-Bed Method: Modified dry-set mortar. Grout: High-performance sanded grout. 2. TCNA F125-Full STONE: Thin set mortar on crack isolation membrane. Thin set Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar. Grout: High-performance sanded grout. END OF SECTION 093033 093033 - 153 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 095100 —ACOUSTICAL CEILING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Acoustical panel ceiling systems with exposed suspended metal grid system, trim, and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: For each type of product and accessory. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum three years' successful experience in projects of similar type and scope; acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Suspension System: Comply with ASTM C635, as applicable to type of suspension system required for type of ceiling units indicated. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Provide product specified in drawing Finish Legend. a. Substitutions not permitted. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1, direct hung. Hanger Wires: Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A641, soft temper, pre-stretched, yield stress load of at least three times design load, but not less than 12 gage. Straps, Tubes and Angles: Provide galvanized steel as required to meet state and local requirements for seismic design loads. Structural Class: Minimum intermediate duty system. Edge Molding: Manufacturer's standard shadow molding or angle molding as indicated in the drawings. Finish of Exposed Items: Manufacturer's standard white baked enamel. Maximum Allowable Deflection: L1360. B. Acoustical Panels: ASTM E1264 Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E unless otherwise indicated. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Provide product specified in drawing Finish Legend. a. Substitutions not permitted. Edge Detail: As indicated in drawing Finish Legend. Size: As specified in drawing Finish Legend. Finish: Standard washable painted finish. Color as scheduled in drawing Finish Legend. 1.5 INSTALLATION Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM C636. 1. Finished Ceilings: True to lines and levels and free from warped, soiled or damaged grid or acoustical units. Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting superimposed loads, with maximum permissible deflection of 1/8 inch in 10-0". Install after major above ceiling work is complete; coordinate location of hangers with other work. 1. Ensure suspension system is located to accommodate fittings and units of equipment which is to be placed after installation of ceiling grid. 095100 - 154 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span required distance. E. Install ceiling suspension system to resist seismic loads where project is in seismic zone; comply with state and local codes, including extra hanger wires and compression supports for ceilings and light fixtures. F. Hang system independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where suspension system members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members. G. Do not support lighting fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if weight of fixture causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 1. Support fixture loads independently or provide supplementary hangers located within six inches of each corner. H. Do not install fixtures so main runners and cross runners are eccentrically loaded; where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer bars. I. Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum lengths, straight, true to line and level; miter corners. 1. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes. J. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or defects detrimental to appearance and function. Lay directionally patterned units one way with pattern as directed. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces. K. Install system level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp and dents. L. Install suspension grid main beams in maximum lengths, avoid joints mid-tile. If joints are necessary, locate as close to tiles intersection as possible. END OF SECTION 095100 095100 - 155 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 095446 - FABRIC-WRAPPED PANEL CEILING SYSTEM 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes site-upholstered ceiling systems. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include fabric facing, frame edge, and trim, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each acoustical fabric panel system. Include reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and installation and system details. Include details at joints and corners; and details at ceiling intersections and intersections with walls. Indicate frame-edge profile and core materials. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. Show sewn-seam locations, types, and methods. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fabric facing. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color or finish selection. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products: Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch- (900-mm-) long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric. Frame System: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample(s) showing each edge profile and corner. Core Material: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample at corner. Assembled System: Approximately 36 by 36 inches (900 by 900 mm), including joints in mockup. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Electrical outlets. 2. Suspended ceiling components above acoustical fabric panel systems. 3. Structural members to which suspension devices will be attached. 4. Items contained in troughs between acoustical fabric panel systems including the following: Lighting fixtures. Air outlets and inlets. Speakers. Alarms. Sprinklers. Access panels. 5. Show operation of hinged and sliding components covered by or adjacent to acoustical fabric panel systems. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of acoustical fabric panel system. D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 095446 - 156 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For acoustical fabric panel systems to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturer's written cleaning, stain-removal, restretching, and reupholstering instructions. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, furnish length equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 sq. yd. (9 sq. m), full width of bolt. Framing and Related Installation Items: Furnish manufacturer's full-length units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 units, including unopened adhesives. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. Build mockup of typical ceiling area. Include intersection of wall and ceiling, corners, and perimeters. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Comply with fabric and acoustical fabric panel system manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver materials in unopened bundles and store in a temperature-controlled dry place with adequate air circulation. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical fabric panel systems until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Lighting: Do not install acoustical fabric panel systems until a permanent level of lighting is provided on surfaces to receive acoustical fabric panel systems. Air-Quality Limitations: Protect acoustical fabric panel systems from exposure to airborne odors, such as tobacco smoke, and install systems under conditions free from odor contamination of ambient air. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of acoustical fabric panel systems that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: Acoustical performance. Fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge. Warping of core. 095446 - 157 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 MANUFACTURERS Kvadrat Soft Cells Design Studio (Copenhagen, Denmark; +45 8953 1866) contact Niels Foged Therkildsen 516-242-9239; no substitutions. Source Limitations: Obtain acoustical fabric panel ceiling systems specified in this Section and acoustical fabric panel wall systems specified in Section 097713 'Acoustical Fabric Panel Wall Systems" from single source from single manufacturer. 1.12 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: acoustical fabric panel ceiling systems shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency on systems prepared according to ASTM E2573. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286. 1.13 ACOUSTICAL FABRIC PANEL CEILING SYSTEMS A. Acoustical fabric panel Ceiling System <Insert drawing designation>: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of facing material stretched tightly over a frame and core material and secured in the frame. Core: Mineral-fiber board. a. Nominal Core Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Frame Edge: Chamfered (beveled) profile. a. Nominal Frame Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm). Frame Color: Insert requirement. Facing Material: As indicated on Drawings. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of Insert range or single value according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795. 1.14 RECESSED CEILING TROUGH A. Manufacturer: PARC, a Price Company (London, UK; +44 0 203 879 9850) infoparc-ceiIings.com B. Product: Apple Retail Recessed Trough. C. General: The trough shall provide mounting locations for all specified ceiling devices, including, but not limited to, lighting, security cameras and sprinklers. All fixings shall be concealed. The manufacturer shall provide coordinated shop drawings, including device locations. D. Ceiling Trough, Including Levelling Features and Alignment Features: 1. Description: The trough shall be constructed from aluminum extrusions. The trough shall be recessed in design, with a device mounting surface 60mm (2.36 inches) above the ceiling surface. The trough shall be specified in section lengths of up to 3 meters (9.84 feet) and alignment devices shall be provided to align sections. 095446 - 158 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS The trough shall be provided with architectural end caps with a knife-edge' profile. The trough shall have an opening width of 69.85mm (2.75 inches). Performance: The trough shall perform the function of an air distribution device, capable of a horizontal throw pattern. Testing of the air distribution performance shall be to ASRAE 70-2006 standards. The trough shall be compatible with mechanical plenums provided by PARC, which can be installed anywhere along the trough's length. The plenum should not be seen from the occupied space. Finish: a. The channel shall be finished in (select one): RAL 8019 - Custom powder coat. Other, including anodized finishes, by agreement with the manufacturer. b. Powder coat finish shall have the following properties: Thickness shall be a minimum of 2.0 mils. The finish shall have a hardness of ~: H when tested to ASTM D3363. An impact resistance of a 4.52 Newton Metres (40 inch-pounds) when tested to ASTM D2794. c. Anodized finish shall have the following properties: Architectural grade anodizing. Performed by the channel manufacturer. Secondary finishing process applied to mitigate die lines. 1.15 MATERIALS Core Materials: 1. Mineral-Fiber Board: Manufacturer's standard: maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 10, respectively; minimum density of minimum 13 lb/cu. ft., and with perforated surface. Facing Material: 1. Manufacturer: Kvadrat (Ebeltoft, DK; +45 8953 1866). 2. Fabric: Lower Floating Ceiling Panels: As indicated on Drawings. Upper Ceiling Panels and Wall Fabric Panels: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as indicated on Drawings. 1.16 EXAMINATION Examine fabric, materials, substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical fabric panel systems. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.17 PREPARATION Measure each area and establish layout of panels and joints of uniform size with balanced borders at opposite edges or otherwise indicated on Drawings within a given area. Before installation, allow fabric to adjust and become stable in spaces where it will be installed according to acoustical fabric panel system manufacturer's written instructions. Acclimatize fabric for minimum of 24 hours at ambient temperature and humidity conditions indicated for spaces when cccupied for their intended use. 096446 - 169 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.18 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical fabric panel systems according to system manufacturers written instructions. Provide continuous perimeter frames of each profile indicated, designed to be inconspicuous when covered by fabric facing, with smooth edges, and with surface finish that will not telegraph through fabric facing. Install framing around penetrations. Tightly fit framing to adjacent construction and securely attach to substrate. Install core material with full coverage, flush with face of acoustical fabric panel system frame. Attach frame and core to substrate with adhesive or fasteners, or both, to support system and prevent deformation of components. Install acoustical fabric panel systems true in plane and with fabric square to the grain. Install jointed panels with butt joints as indicated. B. Fabric Installation: Apply fabric monolithically in continuous run over area, without joints or reveals, except where panel joints or midspan frames are indicated. Fabric Direction: Run fabric as indicated on Drawings. Fabric Sequence: Maintain sequence of fabric drops; match and level fabric pattern and grain. Fabric Alignment: Install fabric with patterns or directional weaves so pattern or weave aligns with adjacent panels. Fabric Seams: Sewn seams are not permitted. Core Overlay: Evenly stretch over core face and edges; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, and sags. Stretch and secure fabric to frame edges and so frame and frame attachment method are concealed by fabric unless otherwise indicated. Stretch fabric tightly and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions. Acclimatize and re-stretch if recommended by acoustical fabric panel system manufacturer. Repair distortions, wrinkles, and sagging. 1.19 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A Edge Straightness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches. B. Variation from Alignment with Surfaces: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 48 inches, noncumulative. C. Variation from Level or Slope: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. D. Variation of Joint Width: Not more than 1/16 inch in 48 inches from hairline or line recessed trough, noncumulative. 1.20 CLEANING Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 095446 096446 - 160 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type lii - EPD with Third party certification. Ingredients Cradle to Cradle. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate sustainable report for each manufacturer. FloorScore. CDPH Certification. 1.3 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: One unopened carton of each profile and color. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Product: Tarkett Johnsonite Baseworks." 1.5 MATERIALS A. Resilient Base: 1 Type: ASTM F1861, thermoset vulcanized rubber. 2 Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3 Profile: Cove or straight, per notes in drawing Finish Legend. Height: 4 inches. Length: 120 foot rolls. Color: As indicated in drawing Finish Legend. Finish: Matte. 1.6 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Water based, waterproof, recommended by base manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design Product: Mapei: Ultrabond Eco 575. 1.7 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1.8 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces to receive base: Remove materials that could interfere with adhesion. Fill low spots with patching compound; finish flush with adjacent surface. 13 . Remove high spots, ridges and nibs. 1.9 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive continuously to back of base. 096513 - 161 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Maintain top edge true to line and bottom edge in continuous contact with floor. Butt joints tight; butt base tight to adjacent construction. Do not install pieces less than 24 inches long. Miter and butt inside corners. At outside corners, "V' cut back of base to 2/3 of its thickness and bend around corner. Scribe to door frames and other interruptions. Install straight and level to maximum variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet. 1.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096513 096513 - 162 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 096813— TILE CARPETING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tile carpeting. 2. Edgings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Shop Drawings: Indicate carpet tile locations, direction of carpet tile in each room or area, and type and location of edgings. Warranty: Sample warranty form. Sustainable Design Submittals: a. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type Ill - EPD with Third party certification. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates of Compliance: Certification from an independent testing laboratory that carpet tiles meet fire hazard classification requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Irstaller Qualifications: Minimum 3 years' experience in work of this Section. F re Hazard Classification: Class II rated, tested to NFPA 253. F re Hazard Classification: Pass flammability requirements of ASTM D2859. Preinstallation Conference Call: 1 Conduct conference call 2 weeks prior to beginning work of this Section. 2 Attendance: Owner, Architect, Contractor, carpet tile installer, carpet tile manufacturer's representative, and related trades. 3. Review and discuss: Contract Documents, carpet tile manufacturer's literature, project conditions, scheduling, protection after installation, and other matters affecting application. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS Co not begin installation until painting and finishing work have been completed. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature of spaces and subfloor between 65 and 90 degrees F. 2.. Humidity in spaces to receive carpet tiles between 20 and 65 percent. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Furnish manufacturer's lifetime warranty providing coverage against: Defective materials and workmanship. Excessive fading. Loss of static control. Edge raveling. Runs. Loss of tuft bind strength. Loss of face fiber. a. Excessive wear. G. Backing resiliency loss. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: One unopened carton of each tile. 096813 - 163 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturers - Carpet Tiles: As indicated. Substitutions not permitted. 1.8 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive, Pressure Sensitive: Tandus Centiva C-EX. Waterproof, latex based cement formulated specifically for installing carpet tiles; recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) content: 3.2 grams per liter; compliant with SCAQMD Rule 1168. Meet CR1 Green Label requirements. B. Edgings: Preformed metal, profile as indicated to suit conditions. C. Leveling Compound: Premixed, latex based. 1.9 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1.10 PREPARATION Clean substrate to ASTM 04258. Fill cracks, voids, and depressions with leveling compound. Grind ridges and high spots smooth. Test Substrate: Moisture vapor: Test to ASTM Fl 869; do not install carpet tiles until moisture emission level is acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer. Humidity: Test to ASTM F2170; do not install carpet tiles until relative humidity is acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer. Alkalinity: Test to ASTM F710; do not install carpet tiles unless pH is acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer. 1.11 INSTALLATION OF CARPET TILES Install in accordance with CR1 104. Install carpet tile and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Blend carpet tiles from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. Lay out each room or area to minimize tiles less than one half size. Cut tile clean. Fit tiles tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. Lay carpet tile per Finish Legend notes on drawings. Fully adhere carpet tiles to substrate. 1.12 INSTALLATION OF EDGINGS A. Install strips where carpet tiles abut dissimilar flooring materials; secure to subfloor. 096813 - 164 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Center strips under doors where carpet tiles terminate at door openings. Install in longest practical lengths; butt ends tight. Scribe to abutting surfaces. 1.13 CLEANING Clean spots as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Cut off loose threads flush with top surface. Clean with commercial vacuum cleaner. END OF SECTION 096813 096813 - 165 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes wall coverings and accessories necessary for a complete installation. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: Include location and extent of each wall covering type, seam locations and termination points. Samples: Submit wall covering samples in full width by 36-inch- (1000-mm-) long sections of wall covering for each wall covering indicated and for each color, pattern, and texture required. Samples shall show complete pattern repeat. 1. Wall-Covering Sample: Submit samples from same production run to be used for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: Product certificates. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has specialized in the installation of wall coverings similar to that required for this project. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at the levels indicated when the site is occupied for its intended use. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace wall covering that does not comply with requirements or that fails within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of wall covering from failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, blistering, fading, fraying, seam delamination, and discoloration. 097200 - 166 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates in accordance with test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286. 1.10 WALL COVERING PRODUCTS Finish Schedule, Sheet A-812 General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot. Color and pattern matching Architect's samples. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Unika Vaev Ecoustic Acoustical Panel 1.11 ACCESSORIES Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, non-staining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, primer/sealer recommended in writing by the wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. Metal Primer: Interior ferrous metal primer recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate. Wall Liner: Nonwoven, synthetic underlayment and adhesive as recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. 1.12 EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.13 PREPARATION Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. 097200 - 167 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine sandpaper. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. 1.14 WALL LINER INSTALLATION A. Install wall liner, without gaps or overlaps. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried. 1.15 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks and corners. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. 1. For solid-color, even-texture, or random-match wall coverings, reverse every other strip. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without overlaps or gaps between strips. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. 1.16 CLEANING Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 09 72 00 097200 - 168 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 097713— ACOUSTICAL FABRIC PANEL WALL SYSTEMS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes site-upholstered wall systems. 1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: For each acoustical fabric panel system. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Elevations and other details, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: Product certificates. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. lrstaller Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of acoustical fabric panel systems that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Acoustical fabric panel wall systems shall comply with "Surface-Burning Characteristics" or "Fire Growth Contribution" Subparagraph below, or both, as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified testing agency on systems prepared according to ASTM E2573. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Fire Growth Contribution: Comply with acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 286. 1.9 ACOUSTICAL FABRIC PANEL WALL SYSTEMS A. Acoustical Fabric Panel Wall System: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of facing material stretched tightly over a frame and core material and secured in the frame. Manufacturer: Kvadrat Soft Cells Design Studio (Copenhagen, Denmark; +45 8953 1866) contact Niels Foged Therkildsen 516-242-9239; no substitutions. Core: Mineral-fiber board. 097713 - 169 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Frame Edge: Chamfered (beveled) profile. a. Nominal Frame Thickness: 2 inches. Reveals between Panels: Reveals as indicated on Drawings. Facing Material: As indicated on Drawings. Acoustical Performance: Sound absorption NRC of Insert range or single value according to ASTM C423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E795. 1.10 MATERIALS Core Materials: 1. Mineral-Fiber Board: Manufacturers standard; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 10, respectively; minimum density of 13 lb/cu. ft., and with perforated surface. Facing Material (as indicated on Drawings): Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as indicated on Drawings. 1.11 PREPARATION Measure each area and establish layout of panels and joints of sizes indicated on Drawings within a given area. Before installation, allow fabric to adjust and become stable in spaces where it will be installed according to acoustical fabric panel system manufacturer's written instructions. Acclimatize fabric for minimum of 24 hours at ambient temperature and humidity conditions indicated for spaces when occupied for their intended use. 1.12 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical fabric panel systems according to system manufacturer's written instructions. Provide continuous perimeter frames of each profile indicated, designed to be inconspicuous when covered by fabric facing, with smooth edges, and with surface finish that will not telegraph through fabric facing. Install framing around penetrations. Tightly fit framing to adjacent construction and securely attach to substrate. Install core material with full coverage, flush with face of acoustical fabric panel system frame. Attach frame and core to substrate with adhesive or fasteners or both to support system and prevent deformation of components. Install acoustical fabric panel systems level and plumb unless otherwise indicated, true in plane, and with fabric square to the grain. B. Fabric Installation: Apply fabric monolithically in continuous run over area, without joints or reveals, except where panel joints or midspan frames are indicated. Fabric Seams: Sewn seams are not permitted. Stretch and secure fabric to frame edges and so frame and frame attachment method are concealed by fabric unless otherwise indicated. Stretch fabric tightly and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions. Acclimatize and restretch if recommended by acoustical fabric panel system manufacturer. Repair distortions, wrinkles, and sagging. 1.13 CLEANING A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. 097713 - 170 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 097713 097713 - 171 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 098100 -ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Acoustical insulation in walls, Type 1. Acoustical insulation in ceilings above acoustic walls, Type 1. Acoustical sealant. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type Ill - EPD with Third party certification. 1.3 MATERIALS A. Type 1 Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; unfaced mineral fiber batts or blankets; minimum fire hazard classification rating of 0/0 per ASTM E84; minimum 3-1/2 inches thick, unless required otherwise to meet the STC requirements indicated or specified; formaldehyde free. Same as Owens Corning Thermafiber sound attenuation fire blanket (SAFB) or Rockwool AFB. For installation in stud walls: Widths to friction fit between studs. For installation at acoustically insulated door frames: Continuous strips, full width of partition or frame, as detailed. B. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, low-shrinkage; for use in conjunction with gypsum board; similar to: Basis of Design Product: USG "Sheetrock Brand Acoustical Sealant." Tremco "Acoustical Sealant 30CTG." Quiet Solution (Sunnyvale, CA 408-541-8000) "Quietseal QS-350." Or Owner approved equivalent. 1.4 INSTALLATION A. Verify that mechanical and electrical services within spaces to insulate have been installed and tested. B. Type 1 insulation in stud cavities: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. Coordinate with other trades as necessary to complete acoustical barriers at wall penetrations. Install insulation without gaps or voids. Carry insulation around pipes, wiring, boxes, and other components. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use insulation materials free of damage. C. Type 1 acoustical insulation at ceilings: Lay acoustical insulation over each acoustically insulated partition which terminates at the ceiling. Insulation shall extend a minimum of 48 inch each side of the centerline of the acoustical partition. Tightly butt acoustical insulation batts. Cut and fit neatly around mechanical and sprinkler drops. Fill spaces between wall batts (at top plate line) and ceiling batts to ensure complete sound closure. Omit insulation over tops of recessed fluorescent light fixtures; and within 2 inches of recessed incandescent fixtures. 098100 - 172 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS D. Sealant: Install acoustical sealant continuously around perimeter of all acoustically insulated partitions; one continuous bead at each side of framing member interface with substrate. Except for penetrations in fire rated construction to receive firestopping or fire rated construction joint assemblies, seal all penetrations through acoustical assemblies, including cutouts for lighting fixtures, cabinets, pipes and plumbing, HVAC ducts, and electrical boxes. END OF SECTION 098100 098100 - 173 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 098129 - SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sprayed cellulose acoustical insulation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance requirements: 1. Surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84): Flame spread: 5, maximum. Smoke developed: 5, maximum. 2. R-value: ASTM 0518; 3.8 per inch. 3. Bond Strength: Greater than 100 psf per ASTM E736. 4. Flame Spread: Class 1 class a per ASTM E84/UL 723. 5. Non-corrosive: ASTM C739. 6. Bond Deflection: ASTM E759; 6 inch; deflection in 10-foot span - no spaDing or delamination. 1.4 BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER A. International Cellulose Corporation "K-13 Spray-On-System" (800-444-1252). Color: Manufacturer's standard white. Material testing: ASTM E1042; testing laboratory must be NVLAP Accredited. Minimum fiber recycled content; 75 percent. Contains no asbestos. Contains no urea-formaldehyde resins. Comply with [IBC 803.3 803.10] [insert other code] stability requirements for interior finishes. B. Other acceptable manufacturers: Monoglass Spray-On Insulation. Thermacoustic Industries International Ltd. 1.5 EXAMINATION Examine surfaces and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Verify surfaces to receive spray insulation to determine if priming/sealing is required to ensure bonding and/or to prevent discoloration caused by migratory stains. 1.6 PREPARATION Provide masking, drop cloths or other satisfactory coverings for materials/surfaces that are not to receive insulation to protect from over-spray. Coordinate installation of the sprayed cellulose fiber with work of other trades. Prime surfaces as required by manufacturer's instructions or as determined by examination. 1.7 INSTALLATION Install spray applied insulation according to manufacturer's recommendations. Install spray applied acoustical insulation to achieve a minimum overall NRC of 0.75. Cure insulation with continuous natural or mechanical ventilation. 098129 - 174 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Remove and dispose of over-spray. Protect finished installations under provision of Division 01. 1.8 SCHEDULE A. Locations: Backstage where underside of exposed structure is greater than 8-0" above floor stucture, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. END OF SECTION 098129 098129 - 175 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 098433 - FIXED SOUND ABSORBING WALL UNITS 1.9 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed Acoustical PET panels used as acoustic wall panels. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each product type and installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. Include details at panel head, base, joints, and corners; and details at ceiling, floor base, and wall intersections. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials. Include details at cutouts and penetrations for other work. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. 3. Samples: Submit 2 samples of 6 inch by 6 inch, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate sustainability report for each manufacturer. Material Ingredient Reporting Certifications - Health Product Declaration (HPD). CDPH Compliant. C. Test Reports: Upon request submit certified test reports from recognized test laboratories. D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.11 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING Delivery: Deliver material in the manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact Provide labels indicating brand name, source of procurement, style, size and thickness. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1.13 MAINTENANCE Extra Materials: Provide 7 percent for use by Owner in building maintenance and repair. Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels. 1.14 WARRANTY Warranty Period: One year. 1.15 SOUND ABSORBANT ACOUSTICAL PANEL Basis of Design Product: Material: Manufactured from recycled 100% PET plastic, which shall be capable of being recycled upon completion of its useful life; impact resistant. Thickness: .47 inches [12 mm]. 098433 - 176 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS C. Color: As indicated on drawings. D. Edge: Square. E. Sizes: Nominal 47.24 inches x 110.24 inches [1200mm x 2800mm] unless indicated otherwise on drawings. F. Density: 6 pounds/cubic foot. G. Mounting Style: Type A. Provide fasteners and manufacturer recommended adhesives for complete single source installation. H. Accessories: 1. Adhesive: Gun-grade and spray-on as recommended by manufacturer; compatible with substrate and insulation. I. Flammability: ASTM E84, Class A; Flame spread: 5. Smoke Developed: 35. J. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) Rating: NRC 0.85 for direct adhesive mounting. 1.16 EXAMINATION P-ior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. Environmental Requirements: Do not install acoustical panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational. 1.17 INSTALLATION A. General: Do not begin installation until materials sufficient to complete an entire room are received and are ready for installation. Field cut acoustical panels as required, in accordance with manufacturers recommended procedures and equipment. Install acoustical wall panels in accordance with the following: Butt and run panels in a landscape orientation. Bottom of panel above floor finish (AFF): 10-feet for the entire length of the run when possible. If both open-to-structure (OTS) and AFF ceiling height is less than 14 feet, start the top of the panel at the ceiling. Minimum height at bottom of panel shall be 8 feet AFF. 3.. Acoustical wall panels shall be adhesively or mechanically mounted in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and/or as detailed on the drawings. B. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the acoustical panel manufacturer. Install materials in accordance with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements and industry standards applicable to work. Adhesive application: Apply adhesive in continuous beads. Install boards horizontally unless otherwise indicated. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. a 098433 - 177 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.18 CLEANING Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel to comply with manufacturers instructions for cleaning. Remove and replace tiles, which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 1.19 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 098433 S 098433 - 178 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 098436 - FIXED SOUND ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Custom fabricated acoustical ceiling sound control panels. 1.2 SUMBITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation: Include reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. Include details at joints and corners; and details at ceiling intersections and intersections with walls. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. 3. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fabric facing. a. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving color or finish selection. 4. Samples for Verification: For the following products: Delete "Fabric" Subparagraph below if fabric is Owner furnished or preselected and specified; revise to suit Project. Fabric: Full-width by approximately 36-inch <Insert dimension> long Sample, but not smaller than required to show complete pattern repeat, from dye lot to be used for the Work, and with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of fabric. Panel Edge: 12-inch long Sample(s) showing each edge profile, corner, and finish. Core Material: 12-inch square Sample at corner. Mounting Devices: Full-size Samples. Assembled Panels: Approximately 36 by 36 inches, including joints and mounting methods. B. Sjstainable Design Submittals: For each product. Greenguard Gold. Material Ingredient Reporting Certifications - Health Product Declaration (HPD). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1 Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Flame Spread: 25, maximum. Smoke Developed: 450, maximum. 1.4 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS Basis of Design Product: Crane Composites "Sequentia FRP" Ceiling Panels. Equivalent products by the following manufacturers are acceptable: Ceilume "AcoustoTherm Backpanels". Nudo "FiberLite FRP" Ceiling Panels. 1.5 IMPALING PINS A. Manufacturer: AGM Industries, Inc. (Brocton, MA) Tactoo Insul-Hangers". 1. Impaling Spindle: Minimum 12-gauge mild steel with corrosion resistant coating. 1/2 inch longer than thickness of insulation board and as required to suite installation. 2. Base Plate: Galvanized steel, perforated. a. Self-Locking Washers: [Stainless] [Galvanized] steel. Size and type capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation board in place and supporting insulation board weight. Assume 3 pounds' maximum weight per hanger assembly. 098436 - 179 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS B. Impaling pin adhesive: 1. Basis of Design Product: MEl "Eco-Hanger Grip Adhesive 22-15 Lo VOC". 1.6 ACCESSORIES A. Construction Tape: "Bild-R-Tape", nominal 2-inch-wide, waterproof, pressure sensitive, UV resistant sealing tape specified for type and quality. 1.7 FABRICATION A. General: Treat fabric wrapped panels using heat shrink process to develop fully taut facing. 1.8 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1.9 INSTALLATION WITH IMPALING PINS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation. B. Install impaling pins to [concrete] [steel decking] [wood decking]. C. Install impaling pins at maximum 16 inch on center each way, 4 inches from edge of insulation, and as necessary to support weight of insulation board. 1. Panel lengths per number of clips: Up to 24 inches: 4 clips. 24 to 46 inches: 4 clips. 48 to 72 inches: 4-6 clips. 72 to 96 inches: 6-8 clips. D. Apply adhesive to perforated base plate, twist, and press firmly into place. E. Install panels to fit snugly against adjacent panels, framing, and other construction. F. When panel is in place, install retainer clips and slightly compress, as needed to maintain insulation in complete contact with substrate. G. Clip or cut pins within 1/2 inch of retainer pins. 1.10 CLEANING Follow manufacturer's instructions for cleaning panels soiled during installation. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned to as new condition. Keep site free from accumulation of waste and debris. 1.11 SCHEDULE A. Locations: Backstage where underside of exposed structure is 8-0" or less above floor structure, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. END OF SECTION 098436 098436 - 180 OF 220 10/10/2022 e I APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 098439 - SUSPENDED SOUND ABSORBING CEILING UNITS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Suspended acoustical panels. Cable hangers and fasteners. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical data for each type of canopy system required. a. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Shop Drawings: For unit assembly and installation: Include reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and mounting devices and details. Include details of intersections with walls. Indicate panel edge profile and core materials. Include direction of fabric weave and pattern matching. B. Sjstainable Design Submittals: For each product. 1. Greenguard Gold. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Single-Source Responsibility: Provide panels and method of attachment by a single manufacturer. Coordination of Work: Coordinate panel work with installers of related work including, but not limited to suspended ceilings, building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers. Seismic Performance: System seismic performance verified through full-scale testing in accordance with ICC-ES - AC-1 56 acceptance criteria for seismic qualification testing of non-structural components. Acoustic baffles may obstruct or skew the existing or planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern, or possibly delay the activation of the fire sprinkler or fire detection system. Coordinate with a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, and local codes for guidance on the proper installation techniques where fire detection or suppression systems are present. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver to project site in original, unopened packages. Store in a fully enclosed space between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Before installing baffles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. Handle baffles carefully to avoid damaging units in any way. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS Space Enclosure: Areas to receive baffles shall be free of construction dust and debris. Products can be installed up to 120 degrees F with humidity not exceeding 90 percent RH. Following installation, conditions must be maintained below 70 percent RH. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace baffles that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to: 1. Baffles: Manufacturing defects. 098439 - 181 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Attachment Devices: Manufacturing defects. B. Warranty Period: Baffles: One year from date of substantial completion. Attachment Devices: One year from date of substantial completion. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS A. Break Area 1. Unika Vaev Ecoustic Banner Baffles. a. Color and sizes as noted on Drawings. 1.8 RECYCLABLE 100% PET ACOUSTICAL BANNER BAFFLES Basis of Design Product: Unika Vaev Ecoustic Banner Baffle". Material: Manufactured from 100% PET, which shall be capable of being recycled upon completion of its useful life; impact resistant. B. Thickness: 0.47 inch. C. Color: As indicated on drawings. D. Edge: Square. E. Sizes: 12" tall baffles unless indicated otherwise on drawings F. Density: 6 pounds/cubic foot. G. Mounting Style: Type A. Provide fasteners and manufacturer recommended adhesives for complete single source installation. H. Accessories: 1. Adhesive: Gun-grade and spray-on as recommended by manufacturer; compatible with substrate and insulation. I. Flammability: ASTM E84, Class A; Flame spread: 5. Smoke Developed: 35. J. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) Rating: NRC 0.85 1.9 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM A. Break Area: Unika Vaev Ecoustic Ceiling Collar Strap Installation Set. 1.10 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 1.11 INSTALLATION A. Install baffles in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in compliance with the authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 098439 - 182 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS B. Install baffles in accordance with quantity and lay-outs as shown on the Architectural drawings. 1.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Replace damaged and broken panels. Clean exposed surfaces of baffles per manufacturers instructions. END OF SECTION 098439 098439 - 183 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide painting and finishing of exposed items and surfaces. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections of work. Painting and finishing includes field finishing of exterior and interior items not listed as "surfaces not to be painted" unless clearly indicated otherwise. Painting and finishing includes field finishing of select shop finished items where indicated as required to match adjacent surfaces, such as mechanical grilles and registers. Field paint exposed bare and covered pipes, ducts, and hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work in occupied spaces. B. Related Sections: Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various Specification Sections. C. Surfaces not to be painted: Finished items including finished metal surfaces. Walls and ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas. Moving parts of operating mechanical and electrical units. Labels: Keep equipment identification and fire rating labels free of paint. Plastic smoke stops and weatherstripping at doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. 1. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. 2. Material Ingredient Reporting Certifications - Health Product Declaration (HPD). 3. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate responsibility report for each manufacturer. Recycled content. 4. CDPH Compliant, VOC content. 1.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers, Opaque Paints: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Benjamin Moore & Co. Sherwin-Williams Co. Valspar. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Material Quality: Top line quality commercial grade (professional painter) paints; materials not bearing manufacturer's identification as a best grade product shall not be acceptable. Primers: Premium grade primers recommended by paint manufacturer for substrates indicated and for finish systems specified. Undercoats and Barrier Coats: Undercoat paints produced by same manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 099000 - 184 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Finish Coats: Provide finish coats capable of being washed with mild detergent without loss of color, sheen, or pigments. a. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated; no lead content permitted. Finish Coat: Compatible with prime paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used. Review other Specification Sections in which prime paints are provided; ensure compatibility of total coatings systems. Upon request from other trades furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in use of specified coating systems with previously primed substrates. Colors and Finishes: Refer to Drawing Finish Legend. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on site. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Select materials that generate least amount of pollution; consider pollution and VOC emissions generated during manufacturing, transport, installation, use, and disposal. 1. Avoid materials that contain ozone depleting chemicals and that emit potentially harmful VOC; limit as follows: Metal primers: <150g/l. All other interior paint coatings: <50g/l. Transparent coating: <275g/l. 2. Avoid materials that can leach harmful chemicals into ground water; do not allow potentially harmful chemicals to enter sewers nor storm drains. 1.5 PREPARATION A. Irspection: Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied. 1 Start of painting work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of surfaces and conditions within any particular area. 2 Where exposed items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned in schedules, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. B. Remove hardware, accessories, and items in place and not to be painted, or provide protection prior to surface preparation and painting; after painting reinstall removed items. C. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition. 1. Existing painted finishes: Clean existing painted surfaces and remove oil, grease, dust, stains, scale, efflorescence, mildew, mold, algae, blisters, and non-adhering paint. Feather edges of severely deteriorated paint where several coats are removed as part of cleaning, to provide smooth transition for new paint. Fill holes, cracks, and defects and fill and sand smooth, ready for new paint finish. D. Clean surfaces before applying paint; remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning; program cleaning so contaminants from cleaning process do not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces. E. Wood: Clean wood surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances; sandpaper smooth surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. IL Scrape and clean seasoned knots and apply thin coat of recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. 2. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job painted immediately upon delivery to job; prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 099000 - 185 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler; sandpaper smooth when dry. F. Ferrous Metals: Touch up shop applied prime coats wherever damaged using same type of primer as applied in shop or barrier coat compatible with finish paint. Bare Surfaces: Clean surfaces that are not galvanized or shop coated, of oil, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants, using nonpetroleum based solvent; primer and touch up primer to be zinc rich primer. G. Mix painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1.6 APPLICATION A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until paint is a uniform finish, color and appearance. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and prime as required. Provide extra attention to assure dry film thickness at corners and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces; paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with prime coat only. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat and each varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended by coating manufacturer. D. Prime Coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat. E. Finish Coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. Opaque Finishes: Provide opaque, uniform finish, color and coverage; cloudiness, spotting, holidays, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other surface imperfections are not acceptable. Repainting Transparent Finishes: Produce glass smooth surface film of even luster; provide with no cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, and other surface imperfections. 1.7 PAINTING SCHEDULE Colors: See drawing Finish Legend. Sheens: Comply with ASTM 0523, reflectance of paint; 60-degree specular gloss. Flat: 1-10. Satin: 15-30. 099000 - 186 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Eggshell: 30-45. Semigloss: 45-75. Gloss: 75-100. 1.8 CLEAN-UP, PROTECTION, AND REPAIR A. Clean Up: During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each work day. 1. Clean glass and paint spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces. B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not; correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Owner and Architect. Provide "WET PAINT" signs to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. C. Repair: At completion of work of other trades, touch up and restore damaged surfaces or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 099000 099000 - 187 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 099733 - CONCRETE SEALER 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sealing/hardening/densifying of interior on-ground concrete slab surfaces. Semi-rigid filler in joints in the interior concrete floor slabs and low viscosity structural polymer required for narrow crack, surface spall, bolt hole, or defect repair. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's data describing joint filler proposed for use on the project. a. Products and primary equipment used for repair of existing concrete slab defects. Manufacturer's Approved Applicator Certificate. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Slip Resistance: Unless approved otherwise, Measured Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF) shall be not less than 0.30 (WET) at time of testing as measured using a Regan Scientific Instruments Bot 3000 Tribometer, in accordance with ANSI 13101.3. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide adequate ventilation. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive sealer/hardener/densifier finish prior to finishing; prevent damage and staining: Apply concrete treatment when ambient and surface temperatures are between 35 and 90 degrees F. Close areas to traffic during application and for minimum time period after finishing as recommended by manufacturer. Joint Filling and Concrete Slab Repair: Limit and control damage from excessive dust caused by demolition, preparation, and installation of all Work. Limit and control damage from moisture. All replaced concrete shall be cured a minimum of 28 days prior to joint filler installation. Concrete repair area shall be closed to traffic during preparation and repair for a time as recommended by manufacturer 1.5 SEALER FOR BACKSTAGE (BACK-OF-HOUSE) Manufacturer - Sealer, Hardener and Densifier: PROSOCO, Inc., (www.prosoco.com). Product - Sealer, Hardener and Densifier (A.FI.SE.01): "Consolideck LS", lithium silicate treatment. 1.6 SEALER FOR RESTROOMS and janitor room Manufacturer: KreteTek Industries Inc. (Hudson, NH; 855-573-8383). Product (A.FI.SE.02): Ghostshield "Siloxa-Tek 8510". 1.7 PRODUCT -JOINT FILLING AND CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR Manufacturer - Joint Filling and Concrete Slab Repair: Metzger/McGuire (800-223-6680). Product: "Spal-Pro RS 88." 099733 - 188 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS C. Substitutions not permitted. D. Polyurea Joint Filler: Rapid setting, two-component polyurea polymer liquid of 100% solids content, Shore hardness 85-92, compatible with construction materials in contact. Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. E. Joint Filler Stain Preventing Film: (Where preinstallation test proves necessary) SPF by M etzger/McGuire. F. Low Viscosity Rigid Structural Polyurea/Urethane: One of the following: Rapid Refloor. Rapid Refloor XP. Match color of adjacent exposed concrete slab surface. G. Structural Epoxy Mortar: Armor-Hard Extreme. 1.8 EQUIPMENT - JOINT FILLING AND CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR A. 5bject to compliance with project requirements, provide equipment manufactured by the following: U.S. Saws, Santa Ana, CA (866-987-7297). PerfectTrac, Haverill, MA (978-521-5855). Joe Due Blades & Equipment, Mauston, WI (877563:3383). B. Joint Filler Removal and Preparation: U.S. Saws Dust Buggy." PerfectTrac by PerfecTrac. Approved equivalent. C. Crack Repair: Joe Due "5 inch Dustmizer 007." Joe Due "5 inch Crack Attacker." Joe Due 7 inch Handheld Crack Chaser." U.S. Saws 'SawTec 5 inch Tile Vac." U.S. Saws "SawTec 7 inch Crac-Vac." Approved equivalent. D. Surface Grinder: Handheld 5 inch to 7 inch electric surface grinder with dustless shroud/housing. SASE SC 50 with appropriate grinding/polishing pads from #50 metals to #800 resins Dust Avenger 5, by Joe Due. Dust Avenger 7, by Joe Due. SawTec 5 inch Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. SawTec 7 inch Grinder Vac, by U.S. Saws. Approved equivalent. 1.9 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 1.10 JOINT FILLER REPLACEMENT A. If joints have been previously filled and existing filler is loose, easily removed, or able to be forced downward with a hand tool, remove all filler material from joint. 099733 - 189 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Where potential staining from new joint filler application may be objectionable, utilize Metzger/McGuire SPF-P (Stain Preventing Film) following manufacturer installation instructions. Place SPF prior to joint cleanout process commences. 1. An acceptable alternative method is to tape both sides of the joint with painter's tape. Clean existing joints full depth with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw using a slightly oversized concrete diamond blade. 1. The blade width shall be sufficient to encapsulate the widest spall along a given contraction joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through the joint. Remove all existing filler material where present. Clean joint of all debris and laitance. Refill with Spal-Pro RS88 polyurea joint filler per manufacturer's installation guidelines. Fill joints from the bottom up taking care not to entrap large air bubbles. Slightly overfill and shave flush to the slab surface after cure, approximately 1 hr - 4hrs after placement. 1.11 SPALLED JOINT REPAIR (LESS THAN 1 INCH) For joints that are spalled or have radius tooled edges not exceeding 1 inch in width at slab surface. Where potential staining from new joint filler application may be objectionable, utilize Metzger/McGuire SPF-P (Stain Preventing Film) following manufacturer installation instructions. Re-saw the joint edge to a minimum depth of 3/4 inch with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint with a minimum of two passes through joint. Clean joint of loose concrete, joint filler, laitance, dirt, debris, backer rod. Joints must be free of all moisture. Fill joint cavity per manufacturer's instructions, taking care not to entrap large air bubbles. Overfill joint slightly and shave flush to slab surface prior to grinding process. It may be necessary to place a trace layer (1/8 to 1/4 inch) of clean dry silica sand at the joint base to prevent material seepage down through the shrinkage crack. 1.12 SPALLED JOINT REPAIR (GREATER THAN 1") OR LARGE SURFACE REPAIR Where potential staining from new joint filler application may be objectionable, utilize Metzger/McGuire SPF (Stain Preventing Film) following manufacturer installation instructions. Saw lines behind the joint edge or surface spall to a minimum depth of 3/4 inch with a dry-cut, vacuum-equipped saw allowing removal of the widest spall along a given joint segment to produce a sharp corner on each side of the joint repair. 1. Vacuum newly formed channel clean. If repairing joint, place backer rod or sand in original joint below the newly formed shelf to prevent Armor-Hard from running into existing joint. Mix and place Armor-Hard Extreme mortar into repair cavity. Trowel Armor-Hard Extreme mortar flush with floor surface. 1. If repairing joint only: Snap a chalk line over existing joint. Re-saw cut completely through Armor-Hard Extreme repair to the depth of original joint. Fill newly created joint with Spal-Pro RS 88. 099733 - 190 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS d. After Spal-Pro RS 88 cures razor off overfill flush with floor surface. 1) If large surface repair or joint repair, for best match to surrounding polished concrete surface: For initial grind, use #50 metals. After #50 metals, polish repair using the following resin steps: 100, 200, 400. e. Apply thin coat of lithium densifier (Consolideck LS or Ameripolish 3DHSL), then do final polish with 800 resin disc. 1.13 CRACK REPAIR A. Cracks from 1/32 inch to 1/4 inch in width. Clean crack cavity. Remove loose concrete, dirt and debris from crack with a wire brush or hand grinder with wire or Nylalox wheel. Remove any loose segments, including islands formed by crack, with sharp tool. Use methods that will not widen existing crack if possible. Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other Iaitance. Mask slab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill. Choose material color that closely matches the adjacent floor. Install Rapid Refloor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Repeat until all voids are filled and material crowns slab surface. Watch for bubble formation and off gassing as that would indicate that moisture is present in crack cavity and steps will need to be taken to dry area prior to further repairs. Do not allow material to gel before adding additional material. Grind material flush to surface upon full cure, approximately 30 minutes - 1 hour. B. Cracks from % inch - 3/4 inch in width. Saw along crack to provide square edge, minimum 1/2 inch in depth. Use small hand grinder with maximum 5 inch diameter blade with dust attachment. Take care to minimize overall crack width. Clean crack cavity. Vacuum crack to remove all dirt, debris and other laitance. Remove all visible moisture. Mask stab surface along crack as necessary to minimize overfill or utilize Metzger/McGuire SPF-P (Stain Preventing Film) to prevent residual staining from overfill. Install Spal-Pro RS 88 rapid set polyurea joint filler per installation instructions. Wait approximately 35 mins-1 hour, periodically checking for material cure. Check condition of material by shaving with razor scraper. Check condition of material by shaving with razor scraper. Material will shave smooth when cured. Typically 1 hr to 4hrs after placement. 1.14 MULTIPLE SMALL SURFACE PITTING/PIN HOLES Clean pitted sections with 90-degree angle grinder equipped with wire wheel to remove all dirt/laitance. Wheel should be run over defect in multiple directions to ensure proper cleaning. Vacuum prepared pitted sections and entire floor surface per installation instructions. Install and disperse Rapid Refloor Pit Grout over entire floor surface area and work into the surface using a metal smoother or rigid edged trowel or screeding device. Ensure a thin, uniform layer of repair material covers the pitted areas. 1. Monitor surface for air holes resulting from entrapped air and re-apply as needed. In some cases, more than one coat will be required for best results. 2 If two coats are desired, first coat should be ground off prior to installing 099733 - 191 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Grind or polish flush with metal or resin-bond diamonds, ensuring repair material is flush with slab surface. Repeat repairs in areas as required if repair material pulls out of defects. Per Manufacturer's directions, apply required applications of densifier, specified dye and polish smooth to meet specified overall gloss values. 1.15 PREPARATION - SEALER, HARDENER AND DENSIFIER Clean surfaces to receive sealer, using manufacturer's recommended cleaning compounds, and in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces. 1.16 APPLICATION - SEALER, HARDENER AND DENSIFIER Apply sealer materials by airless spray, number of coats as recommended by the sealer manufacturer, in accordance with manufacturer's printed application instructions. Application rate shall be as required for full penetration without puddling or dripping. Perform curing procedures in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.17 PROTECTION Protect surfaces of finished floor. Prohibit traffic until floor repairs have received final approval by Owner. END OF SECTION 099733 END OF DIVISION 09 099733 - 192 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 10— SPECIALTIES SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide general signage powered or otherwise, as indicated complete with attachment devices, and accessories. Installation of Owner furnished logos. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: Furnish manufacturers literature and indicate each sign type, style, color, and method of attachment. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other installers, and accessories. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at full scale. 1.3 MANUFACTURER Stainless Steel and/or Bronze plaques and pictograms, applied vinyl copy, and symbols: 1. Endpoint; London, UK and Dubai, UAE; AppleRetailweareendpoint.com Additional approved vendor for Stainless Steel plaques, pictograms, applied vinyl copy, and symbols: 1. Thomas Swan Sign Company, Inc., Richmond, CA, USA; info@thomasswan.com 1.4 MATERIALS Stainless Steel Plaque: 3/32 inch stainless steel plates, horizontal No. 6 finish. Stainless Steel Pictogram: 1/32 inch stainless steel, horizontal No. 6 finish. [Spec note: Delete bronze plaque, pictograms, and red pictogram if they are not used] Bronze Plaque: 3/32 inch Apple-approved bronze alloy plates, horizontal grain finish. Bronze Pictogram: 1/32 inch Apple-approved bronze alloy, horizontal grain finish. Red Pictogram: Rowmark Reverse Laser Mark 922-601, 0.052 inch thick acrylic; matte finish. [Spec note: Delete Restroom Door-Mounted Symbol if it is not required] Restroom Door-Mounted Symbol Stainless Steel Plaque: 1/4 inch thick stainless steel, horizontal No. 6 finish. a. Provide 1/16" eased edges, or as otherwise required by Building Code or Accessibility Guidelines. Acrylic Symbol: ASTM 04802, finish 1 (smooth or polished), Category A-i (cell-cast sheet); free of blemishes, carbon deposits, bubbles, warps, scratches, casting marks, and other imperfections. a. Product: Evonik Cyro "Acrylite GP." Spartech Polycast "Polycast cell-cast acrylic." b. Owner reserves right to reject acrylic with visual imperfections. c. Thickness: 1/4", or as otherwise required by Building Code or Accessibility Guidelines. 101400 - 193 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Provide 1/16' eased edges and 1/8" radiused vertices, or as otherwise required by Building Code or Accessibility Guidelines. Acrylic Color: Match Charcoal Gray color of letter text on Room Identification and Direction signs G. Applied Copy: Die-cut characters and symbols from opaque vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to metal, glass, doors, wall surfaces as indicated on drawings. Colors: Gray: 3M Scotchcal, Traffic Grey No. 100-038 or Owner approved equivalent, unless otherwise noted. Gray (on locker doors only): 3M Scotchcal, Mountain Grey No. 100-2426 or Owner approved equivalent. Red: 3M Scotchcal, Cardinal Red No. 3650-53 or Owner approved equivalent, unless otherwise noted. White: 3M Scotchcal, White No. 7725-10 or Owner approved equivalent. Black: 3M Scotchcal, Black No. 3650-12 or Owner approved equivalent. 2. Text: Text varies. Refer to Drawings for signage text. Signage applied to exit doors: Verify signage requirements with local codes and Landlord guidelines, and submit proposed signage text to Owner for approval. H. Symbols on Kitchenette cabinet doors: Die-cut symbols from opaque cast vinyl film of nominal thickness of 2 mils with pressure sensitive adhesive backing. Apply symbols surfaces as indicated on drawings. 1. Colors: Green: Arlon Series 2100, Apple Green No. 69, or Owner approved equivalent. Blue: Anon Series 2100, Azure Blue No. 32, or Owner approved equivalent. Black: Arlon Series 2100, Black No. 3, or Owner approved equivalent. 1. Font and signage artwork: [Spec note: Font to be lower case, if permitted by applicable codes/regulations and accessibility guidelines] Font on plaque signage shall be SF Hello in Regular weight in [All Caps] [upper or lower case as indicated on Architect-provided signage artwork files], without tracking, unless otherwise noted in this Section, on drawings, or as required by Landlord. At vinyl applied copy, font shall be SF Hello in Regular weight, upper or lower case as indicated on drawings. Architect will supply General Contractor with necessary font files, signage artwork files, and signage text appropriate for project location. J. General Fabrication: Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. Fabricate signs with unframed square cut edges, mechanically and smoothly finished. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with requirements indicated on drawings, for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with IBC and ICC/ANSI All 17.1, barrier-free design. a. Text to be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: Provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) colored coatings, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface; nonfading. 101400 - 194 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS K. Stainless Steel Plaque Signs: Size and Style: As indicated on drawings. Text: Provide Rowmark brand, W-307 raised in Charcoal Gray, 1/16-inch thick laser cut acrylic letters. Text varies, refer to drawings for signage text. Provide stainless steel Braille characters. Spacer behind plaque: 2mm thick acrylic sheet, color: black. Inset spacer 1/4 inch from each edge of plaque. Mounting Material: Provide double-sided VHB tape, die cut to match dimensions of spacer, 1/32 inch thick, color: black, 3M Scotch Brand or Owner approved equal. Comply with ADA requirements for raised and Braille characters, pictorial symbols, finish, and contrasts requirements. L. Door-Mounted Plaque Signs at Automatic Door Size and Style: As indicated on drawings. Text: Provide Rowmark brand, 3x1 -307 raised in Charcoal Gray, 1/16-inch thick laser cut acrylic letters. Text varies, refer to drawings for signage text. Spacer behind plaque: 2mm thick acrylic sheet, color: black. Inset spacer 1/4 inch from each edge of plaque. Mounting Material: Provide double-sided VHB tape, die cut to match dimensions of spacer, 1/32 inch thick, color: black, 3M Scotch Brand or Owner approved equal. Comply with jurisdictional requirements for pictorial symbols, finish, and contrast requirements. M. Pctograms Size, Style, and Material: As indicated on drawings. Mounting Material: Provide double-sided VHB tape, die cut to match dimensions of pictogram, 1/32 inch thick, color: black, 3M Scotch Brand or Owner approved equal. [Spec note: Delete bronze plaques if they are not used] N. Bronze Plaque Signs 1 Size and Style: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Text: Provide Rowmark brand, LM9x2-734 raised in Brushed Gold, 1/16 inch thick laser cut letters conforming to ADA. Text varies, refer to drawings for signage text. Provide clear epoxy hemisphere Braille characters. Spacer behind plaque: 2mm thick acrylic sheet, color: black. Inset spacer 1/4 inch from each edge of plaque. Mounting Material: Provide double-sided VHB tape, die cut to match dimensions of spacer, 1/32 inch thick, color: black, 3M Scotch Brand or Owner approved equal. Comply with ADA requirements for raised and braille characters, pictorial symbols, finish, and contrasts requirements. INSTALLATION 0. General: Install signs in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, free from distortions and defects. P. Plaque Signage: Install signs on walls after surfaces on which they are to be mounted are painted and finished. Location: As indicated on Drawings. Install level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ADA requirements to allow a person to approach within 3 inches of signs without being within a door swing. Q. Braille Exit Door Signs: Install at doors with lighted "exit" signs; apply after walls are finished. 1. Location: Mount signs centered at 60 inches above finished floor on strike side of door. 101400 - 196 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Install level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ADA requirements to allow a person to approach within 3 inches of signs without being within a door swing. R. Install Owner-furnished Apple logo at sales area back wall, as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 101400 101400 - 196 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 102613— CORNER GUARDS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: [Use first two subparagraphs be/ow with the premanufactured products fisted in subparagraphs 1.3A.1. to 8.1 [Use third subparagraph be/ow for custom fabricated products with nonstandard wing dimensions.] Surface mounted stainless steel corner guards. Surface mounted stainless steel end wall protectors. [Custom sized corner guards and end wall protectors]. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. 1. Material Ingredient Reporting Certifications - Health Product Declaration (HPD). 2. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate responsibility report for each manufacturer. Recycled content. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install guards until after painting and finishing work is completed. 1.4 CORNER GUARDS AND END WALL PROTECTORS Basis of Design Product: Construction Specialties, Inc. "CO-8." Equivalent products by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1 American Floor Products Co., Inc. "Lunar Style L-1 2 Babcock-Davis, "BCGSS". 3. IPC Door and Wall Protection/Inpro Corporation Systems, Inc. Stainless Steel". 4. Pawling Corporation "CG-50." 5. Bobrick/Gamco "CG-4." 6. Bradley Corporation "Model 991 corner guard." 7. IPC Stainless Steel End Wall Protectors. 1.5 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304. 1.6 COMPONENTS Type: Surface mounted, stainless steel, minimum 16 gage. Attachment: Manufacturer's recommended adhesive or double-stick tape, based on wall type. [Use paragraph be/ow with the premanufa ctured products fisted in subparagraphs 1.3 A. 1. to 8.1 Size: 3-1/2 inch by 3-1/2 inch by 48 inches high unless otherwise indicated. [Use paragraph be/ow for custom fabricated products with nonstandard wing dimensions.] Size: As indicated. Finish: No. 4 satin. 1.7 INSTALLATION A. Adhesively or double-stick tape attach stainless steel corner guards in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions. 102613 - 197 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Neatly trim factory cut legs of corner guards as required to completely cover ends of fin walls less than 7 inches wide. Remove all fabrication burrs. Position corner guards to start directly above resilient base at outside corners in Backstage areas. Position end wall protectors to start directly above finish floor. END OF SECTION 102613 102613 - 198 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 102623 - PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid vinyl sheet for wall protection. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: For each type of product. a. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall protection showing locations and extent. a. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. a. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type III - EPD with Third party certification. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Hazard Classification: Tested to ASTM E84 (UL 723) with following results: Flame Spread: Maximum 25. Smoke Density: Maximum 450. Self-Extinguishing: ASTM 0635-74; CCI classification. B. Impact Strength: 30.4 ft-lbs.I inch of thickness as tested in accordance with ASTM D256. C. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Stain resistant when tested in accordance with ASTM 0543. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials in unopened factory packaging to the jobsite after painting and finishing work is completed. Inspect materials at delivery to assure that specified products have been received. Store in original packaging in a climate controlled location away from direct sunlight. 1.5 MATERIALS A. Vinyl: Chemical and stain resistant polyvinyl chloride with the addition of impact modifiers. No added plasticizers permitted. 1.6 MANUFACTURER A. Cesign Basis: Contract Documents are based on products by IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, INPRO Corporation (www.inprocorp.com). Substitutions not permitted. 1.7 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Rigid Vinyl Sheet: I. Item number 405; 4 foot by 8 foot, 0.040-inch thickness, standard. Backing: Unbacked. Color Matched Caulk: 580 color matched Vinylseal 1.8 ADHESIVES A. Nonflammable, high strength, water based adhesive that trowels on and allows approximately 20 minutes working time before firming. 1. Products by following manufacturers are acceptable: a. 3M Fastbond 30. 102623 - 199 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS INPRO Bond Adhesive. Formulated Solutions, LLC "Xt-2000+". 1.9 FINISHES A. Color and surface texture: As indicated on drawings. 1.10 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved, beginning work constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions. 1.11 PREPARATION A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris and loose particles. 1.12 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the rigid vinyl sheet as indicated on the approved detail drawing for the appropriate substrate and in compliance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Installation of rigid vinyl sheet: Adhere to substrate with full bed of adhesive. Smooth roll surface. C. Install level and plumb at the height indicated on the drawings. 1.13 CLEANING A. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's clean-up and maintenance instructions. END OF SECTION 102623 102623 - 200 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 102813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: I. Toilet and custodial accessories with attachment hardware and rough-in frames.. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 1.3 MATERIALS Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, commercial grade, type 302/304, gages as standard with manufacturer of specified items. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded. Sheet Steel: ASTM Al 008, cold rolled stretcher leveled; minimum G90 galvanized coating, ASTM A924 and A653. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement as recommended by accessory manufacturer. 1.4 COMPONENTS Toilet Room Accessories, Custodial Accessories, and Kitchenette Accessories: 1. As scheduled on Drawings. Substitutions not permitted. Under-Lavatory Guards: 1. Listed under Plumbing specifications. 1.5 ACCESSORIES Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. Keys: Furnish universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing and supply. Furnish minimum six keys to tenant representative. Coin Operated Units: Provide locked coin box keyed separately from standard units, coin operated units keyed alike. 1.6 FABRICATION Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled; hang doors and a:cess panels with continuous piano hinges; provide concealed anchorage where possible. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes. Form surfaces flat without distortion; maintain flat surfaces without scratches and without dents; finish exposed edges eased, free of sharp edges where potential exists for physical contact. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes, to prevent electrolysis. 102813 - 201 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Hot dip galvanized ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. Assemble components in shop; package complete with anchors and fittings. Finishes: Exposed Finishes: Stainless steel, #4 satin finish; satin chrome finish acceptable where stainless steel not available for accessory item listed or scheduled. Concealed Surfaces: Treat and clean, spray-apply one coat primer and baked enamel finish. 1.7 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts, templates, and rough in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building in. 1.8 INSTALLATION Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions using fasteners appropriate to substrate. Coordinate installation of blocking and backing as necessary to support wall mounted items. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. Use tamper-proof, security type fasteners. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged and defective items. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels. END OF SECTION 102813 102813 - 202 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Hand held fire extinguishers. Accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. a. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed, semi-recessed, or surface-mounting method and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill, or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Povide fire extinguishers complying with UL 711 [applicable code, and NFPA 10] Cabinets in Fire Rated Partitions: Tested in accordance with ASTM E814 with fire resistance rating equivalent to adjacent construction. Conform to applicable accessibility code for locating extinguishers. 1.4 MATERIALS Provide hand held fire extinguishers rated in accordance with UL and bearing UL label. Hand-Held Fire Extinguishers: Multi-purpose dry chemical type, UL 299 pressure type with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 1. Manufacturers: Ansul. Substitutions not permitted. 2. Sales Area: Ansul/Sentry Model AA10S; UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C; custom cabinet mounted. 3. Back-Of-House Areas: Ansul/Sentry Model AA10S; UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C, cabinet mounted. Cabinet product as indicated on drawings. 1.5 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Hardware: Type best suited to application. 1.6 INSTALLATION Install brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Securely fasten to structure, square and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Wherever exact location of units is not shown, locate as directed by Architect. Place an extinguisher in each cabinet [and on each bracket.] 1. Sales Area and Backstage: Install cabinets in locations and at mounting height to comply with requirements of governing authorities; prepare recesses in walls as required. .4 104400 - 203 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Letter size, style and location as indicated on drawings or as required by local authority having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 104400 104400 - 204 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal storage shelving systems with accessories Rolling carriages and track to increase storage density by compacting rows of shelving into a single aisle configuration. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. a. Include rated capacities, construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for metal storage shelving. 2. Shop Drawings: For metal storage shelving. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Include installation details of connectors, lateral bracing, and special bracing. 3. Sustainable Design Submittals: For each product. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD); Type Ill - EPD with Third party certification. Material Ingredient Reporting Certifications - Health Product Declaration (HPD). Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate responsibility report for each manufacturer. CARB Compliant: Ultra-low emitting formaldehyde. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Design Requirements: Provide metal storage system produced by single manufacturer, including necessary mounting brackets, accessories, fittings and fastenings. Performance criteria: 1. Seismic Loads: Conform to applicable building code seismic requirements for storage and other applicable codes for seismic loading and safety requirements including OSHA, or CAL/OSHA as applicable. Design system, including columns, bases, connections and anchorages to resist minimum lateral seismic force, FP=0.25 WP, in any direction, within allowable working stresses permitted by applicable codes. Maximum Lateral Deflection: 5/8 inch at top of shelving. WP is defined as "total weight of shelving system plus 50 pounds per square foot (psf) of shelving to account for general storage of goods." Investigate stresses and deflections for shelves fully loaded in combination with seismic forces. 2. Overhead bracing between shelf units: Not allowed. 3. Diagonal sway bracing: Not allowed. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Repair Room Shelving Unit: 1. Western Pacific Storage Systems deluxe original box shelf open shelving; refer to FF&E schedule and back-of-house elevations for product information and configuration. Substitutions not permitted. Shelving material: 22 gage steel. Shelf load capacity: 600 lbs. per shelf. Provide all accessories necessary for a complete installation including, but not limited to standard divider, closed base (base cover strip), back panel, side panels, shelf clip, angle post, industrial duty shelf, beaded post upright, back clip. 105613 - 205 OF 220 10/1012022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Module size: 96 inch high by 36 inch wide by 18 inch deep with 10 each 18 inch deep by 12 inch high with full height dividers per unit spaced evenly from ends at same level. B. Shelving unit - secured and open 1. Western Pacific Storage Systems Rivetier boltless with z-beams at intermediate levels. Substitutions not permitted. Beam types: "Z" beam and long span "SS" beam. Post types: Standard duty "LURH" and common post "TUR" (t-post). Shelving material: 5/8 inch FRT particle board shelves standard. If local fire codes or mall restrictions require wire grid, use 1 inch by 4 inch wire grid in place of particle board. 2. Module size: Standard nominal 120 inch high by 48 inch wide by 24 inch deep units. C. Shelving Unit - Rolling Shelving: Same as open shelving unit type. Mechanical-assist (ROE) with heavy duty flat track: Non-welded unitized carriage frames of anodized 6063-T5 3 3/8 inch by 2 inch aluminum angles with powder coated steel corner or center plates and rubber bump cushions joined by four self-tapping 10-32 by 1-1/2 inch machine screws to end and intermediate anodized 6063-T5 3 7/32 inch by 1 7/8 inch extruded aluminum channels with four patented incorporated channel embossments. Each channel houses two or three flanged wheel assemblies, positioned under each shelving upright post or back-to-back posts, transferring the load to the tack. Wheels: 1018 steel, 3 1/2 inch diameter, supported by two, mounted flanged ball bearings. Channels: Drilled with computerized axle drilling at wheel locations. 1) Idler rolling wheels mounted via lubricated and sealed ball bearing race with 3/16 inch sideways movement with both having precision machined steel axles. All wheel channels have drive wheels. Drive wheels attached to drive box sprocket, full length, via 1 inch diameter 0.096 inch wall steel tube. Carriages longer than 144 inch will be shipped in left and right halves with one factory prepared lap splice per carriage. Height from floor to top of carriage angle (shelving mounting surface) shall not be more than 4 5/16 inch. [At projects located within EMEIA (Europe, Middle East, India, Africa), provide solid back panels at double faced rolling shelving.] 2. Flat track mechanical-assist drives: Carriage: Mechanically assisted 16:1 ratio drive system full length of the carriage to eliminate lag. 1) Provide carriage with low profile drive box assembly protruding no more than 6 inches from front of carriage. Cover drive box with durable 1/8 inch-thick abs with texture black cover. Single Prong Handle: Molded of industrial strength polymer, black color with a matte grain finish. 1) Handle assembly includes a large spring loaded "detent" to push for releasing the carriage safety parking/locking mechanism. Chain tensions maintained by use of upper and lower chain steel and nylon idlers attached to drive box assembly. Fully adjustable. One handle turn/drive revolution drives the carriage, approximately 3 1/2 inch. 3. Flat Track: Standard track construction is 3 1/4 inch-wide by 1/2 inch high; 6063 aluminum extrusion base with 3/4 inch by 3/8 inch 1018 cold roll steel wheel rolling insert to provide 3/4 inch wide, matched to wheel hardness, wheel-to-insert contact surface for strength and durability. 105613 -206 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Track: Top of floor mounted, ADA compliant to eliminate need for deck and ramp and designed to carry a minimum load of 900 lbs. per linear carriage foot. Track sections shall have lap splices, no butt joints nor exhibit movement or deflection during operation of movable carriages. Fasten track to floor through factory drilled and countersunk hole in steel rolling insert. Set screw head flush or below top of steel, and matching slot in the aluminum extrusion using 114 x 2 inch Hilti sleeve anchors placed 16 inches apart. Flat Track End Stops: Standard track end stop: 1 1/2 inch diameter rubber cushion reinforced with an internal steel washer. Attach end stop each end of track through factory pre-drilled hole with HILTI 11114 inch by 3 1/4 inch anchor. In-Track Anti-Tip Option: Description: Steel anti-tip arms (attached to the inside of the carriage) travel in the track anti-tip rail as the carriage is moved along the track. Anti-tip rides in exact relationship to the wheel axles, always allowing the anti-tip to float free of drag or binding as it moves along the track. Installed, the track is anchored to the floor with HILTI TZ anchors, and the shelving is secured to the carriage. Employ on carriages up to 12 feet in length. Track size: 5.3 inch wide and 0.6 inch high. Z-Rail Anti-Tip Option: Description: Steel, floor mounted Z" shaped rail provides a lip under which z-rail anti-tip arms (attached to the inside of the carriage) are free to travel as the carriage is moved along the track. Should carriage begin to tip, arm immediately engages Z-rail to prevent tipping. Installed, the Z-rail is anchored to the floor and the storage units are secured to the carriages. The vertical height of the z-rail is 1 1/8 inch. Color: Mechanical-assist drive cover, carriage corner & center plates a. Silver aluminum with black trim. 1.5 MATERIALS 1-ot Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM Al 011/Al 011 M, commercial steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. Cold Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, commercial steel (CS), Type B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A513, Type 2. Steel Wire: ASTM A899. Particleboard: Basis of Design: Arauco North America "Duraflake VESTA ULEF"; ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2; 5/8-inch-thick; fire retardant treated to achieve flame-spread rating of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84. Sheet Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard thermosetting finish; consisting of cleaning, hosphatizing process and thermosetting coating; minimum 1.0 mil thick dry film thickness. II. Color: Gray unless selected otherwise by Owner. Accessories: Provide as indicated on drawings and as required for complete, secure, finished metal shelving system as indicated. 1.6 FABRICATION A. General: Factory formed, field assembled, freestanding, post and beam metal storage shelving system for standard and secured shelving units. 105613 - 207 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1. Type: Manufacturers standard duty system. Verify actual dimensions with space available, including top clearance to ceiling, lighting fixtures, ductwork, sprinklers, and similar items. Do not encroach on required aisles and space for wheelchair turnarounds. Shelves: Manufacturer's standard z-beams or wide beams on front, back and sides to hold particle board shelves or wire grid shelves when necessary. Top shelf fastened to top beams and side and back panels for secured shelving units. 2. Design for shelves to be supported by beams that span between and are supported by corner posts, with shelves adjustable over entire height of unit, on 1-1/2-inch keyhole centers. 3. Provide fixed top and bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves, and accessories indicated. 4. Secured shelving units to include solid steel panels on sides and back, 22 GA sheet metal shelf at top, and doors of welded wire panels welded to tubular steel frames. a. Door Hardware: Provide complete secure door hardware to receive "Best" cores with 7-pin interchangeable core cylinders with "T" latch handle unit for two-point locking, plastic insert cores shipped with door; "Best" cores furnished by Owner. Fabricate work in shop to greatest extent possible, before application of finish; remove sharp and rough edges and corners from cut metal and grind welds smooth. Provide manufacturer's standard design and fabrication designed for loads specified and conforming to applicable codes. 1.7 INSTALLATION, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION Install units and accessories at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions, level, plumb, secure and at proper height. Cooperate with other trades for securing units to finished surfaces. Install shelves at spacing as directed by Owner. Erection Tolerances: Erect metal storage shelving with a maximum tolerance from vertical of 1/4 inch. Clean units and repair or replace damaged units as directed by Architect. Touch up marred finishes or replace component parts as necessary to eliminate evidence of damage or deterioration. Shelving units shall not be used by Contractor for storage of materials, unless directed otherwise by Owner. END OF SECTION 105613 105613 - 208 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 108000 - OTHER SPECIALTIES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Water heater platform, wall mounted. Markerboard panel with writable surface. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data. 1.3 WALL-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PLATFORM: Manufacturer: Holdrite (www. hold rite. com). Components: 1. Wall-Mounted Equipment Platform: Quick Stand #40-SWHP-WM'. Finishes: Steel, galvanized. 1.4 MARKERBOARD PANEL Type: Factory-laminated markerboard panel of three-ply construction, consisting of backing, fiberboard core material, and high-pressure markerboard laminate writing surface. Manufacturer: 1. As indicated on drawings. Color: 1. As indicated on drawings. Face Material: High-pressure markerboard laminate complying with physical testing requirements ofNEMALD 3. Trims & Trays: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's products. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Install specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. B. Field-Assembled Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. Where size of units or other conditions require support, provide structural supports as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's proposed support accessories to suit conditions. C. Factory-Fabricated Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. END OF SECTION 108000 END OF DIVISION 10 108000 -209 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 113100— RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Microwave Ovens (Furnished by Owner). Refrigerators. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 26 - Electrical: Power rough-in. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and finishes for each appliance. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. B. Closeout Submittals: Submit following in accordance with Section 017700. Operation and maintenance data. Warranty: Sample warranty forms. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver appliances with manufacturer's protective coverings in place; do not remove until just prior to installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certification Labels: Provide appliances which bear appropriate labels as follows: 1. Energy ratings: Provide energy guide labels with energy cost analysis (annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission. Electrical appliances shall be Energy Star labeled. 2. UL Standards: UL labels required. 1.5 COORDINATION Coordinate with other trades, supply necessary drawings and information, supervise and field check work of other trades to ensure accurate provisions are made for optimum operation of equipment. Coordinate with Divisions 20, 22, 23 and 26 of Specifications to ensure that proper rough-ins and connections are made for equipment. 1.6 APPLIANCES Microwave Ovens: Furnished by Owner. Refrigerators: As indicated on drawings. No substitutions permitted. 1.7 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 017000. Examine appliances thoroughly upon removal from packing crates and protective wrappings upon arrival at site. Verify that accessories necessary for complete installation have been included with appliance. 113100-210 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 3. Examine installation area to ensure rough-in requirements have been met and area is ready to receive each appliance. 1.8 PREPARATION A. Ensure that appliances are fully assembled and ready for installation in final location. 1. Verify that clearances at final location are adequate for proper functioning and operation of equipment. 1.9 INSTALLATION Install appliances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with mechanical and electrical trades as necessary for proper service connections. Anchor components plumb and level, secured for long life under hard use. Align where necessary with adjacent cabinets, equipment and surfaces. Ensure operating parts work freely and fit neatly. Verify door swing with construction plan. Connect to power supply. 1.10 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION Adjust hardware and moving parts as necessary to ensure smooth, quiet trouble-free operation. Cleaning: Comply with Section 017423. Ensure appliances are wiped clean prior to fnal acceptance. Protection: Protect finished work from damage or defacement until final acceptance. Repair or replace damaged work prior to final acceptance, at no additional cost to Owner. Repair or replace damaged parts, dents, buckles, abrasions, or other defects affecting appearance or serviceability, so appliances are undamaged at time of substantial completion. 1.11 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide test demonstration to Owner to ensure proper control and operation of appliance. END OF SECTION 113100 END OF DIVISION 11 113100 -211 OF 220 10110/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 12— FURNISHINGS SECTION 122413— ROLLER WINDOW SHADES This master specification section is intended for use in the preparation of a project specification section covering electrically operated roller interior window shades. Delete section if not required for project. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrically operated window shades. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: For each type of product. a. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations. a. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Apple Development Manager to confirm whether fabric sample is required per project. [Samples: a. For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 10 inches long] Warranty: Sample warranty form. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experience in work of this Section. Fabric: Pass NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn tests. Electrical Components: Listed by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as system. Include the following for full size mockups for review of construction, coordination of work of several sections or observation of operation. Apple Development Manager to confirm whether mockup is required per project. [Mockup: Size: One typical shade unit. Locate [where directed.] L.] Include window shade [, operator and controls,] and accessories. Approved mockup may [not] remain as part of the Work.] 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS Verify dimensions at site prior to fabrication of shades. Do not install shades until painting and finishing work is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels. 122413 -212 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.6 WARRANTIES A. Furnish manufacturer's warranties providing coverage for: 5 years against deterioration, sag, and warp of shade cloth. 5 years against defective hardware. 5 years against defective motors and controllers. 1.7 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Warema International. Address: Dillberg 14 197828 Marktheidenfeld. Deutschland. E-mail: appleinfo©warema.de Website: http://www.warema.de B. Substitutions not permitted. 1.8 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Window Shades: 1. Warema International Type 1: L-78S Type 2: L-108S [only use for ceilings higher than 15'-6" up to 29'-6"] 2. Operation: Electronic drive unit housed inside head tube. 3. Shadecloth orientation: Regular rolling with shade cloth falling on window side of roller. 4. Mounting: Overhead. 5. Head tube shaft: Extruded aluminum. B. Shade Cloth: 1. Warema International: Custom screen fabric. 2 Openness Factor: 5% [openness for solar radiation control or glare control (solar study determines openness in white color only).] 10% [openness for solar radiation control (solar study determines openness in white color only).] 3. Material: 36 percent fiberglass, 64 percent PVC coating and GREENGUARD GOLD certificate. 4. Maximum Dimension: Type 1: 10'-5" x 164" Type 2: 10-5" x 30-5" 5. Edge conditions: a. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Right/left edges: Straight cut. Upper/lower edges: 1-3/16 inch pocket seam. 6. Fabricate shade cloth to hang flat without buckling and distortion. C. Electric Operator: Guidance: Install shade guide wires and mounting kit per architectural details. [Cable guide kit only required if shades deploy to floor. Shade height will be at top or portal unless a solar study determines shades to deploy to floor.] Motor: UL listed, asynchronous, tubular type, thermally protected, totally enclosed, with built-in reversible contactor. Total hanging weight of shade not to exceed 80 percent of rated lifting capacity of motor and tube assembly. D. Controls: As indicated on Electrical drawings. 122413 - 213 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.9 FINISHES A. Fabric Color: 0202 White [use only with 5% or 10% openness depending on solar study.] 3030 Charcoal [use only with 5% openness if required for glare control.] B. Aluminum: Powder coated, color RAL 7021 matte black, 30 percent gloss. 1.10 EXAMINATION Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions as satisfactory. 1.11 INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Provide adequate clearances to allow for proper operation. Place units to locate shade cloth minimum 1 3/4 inches from interior face of glass. Locate controls where directed. Install conduit and wiring between power supply, controls, and operators. 1.12 ADJUSTING A. Adjust shades for smooth, quiet operation. END OF SECTION 122413 END OF DIVISION 12 122413 - 214 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 14— CONVEYING EQUIPMENT SECTION 142423 - HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATOR 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hydraulic passenger elevator. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Arrange elevator components in machine room so equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced without dismantling or removing other equipment components. Early Operation: Allow temporary use of the elevator by the Owner, when operable, before the elevator is placed in permanent service. Provide temporary enclosures, guards, hoistway opening protection, including elevator operators and other items necessary to permit temporary elevator operation. Early operation does not constitute final acceptance of the elevator. Immediately prior to request for final acceptance, make necessary adjustments and repairs to turn the elevator over to the Owner in new and completed condition. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: Product Data: Submit manufacturer/installer's product data, including installation instructions. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer/installer's sop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating location of equipment, loads, dimensions, tolerances, materials, components, fabrication, fasteners, hardware, finish, options, accessories, and other information to render totally functional elevators. Samples: Submit manufacturer/installer's samples of standard colors and finishes of finish materials. Warranty: Submit manufacturer/installer's standard warranty. B. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer/installer's operation and maintenance manual, including operation, maintenance, adjustment, and cleaning instructions; trouble shooting guide; renewal parts catalogs, and electrical wiring diagrams. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Installer's Qualifications: Specialize in manufacturing and installing elevator equipment, with a minimum of 5-years successful experience. B. Regulatory Requirements: Elevator design, clearances, construction, workmanship, materials, and installation, unless specified otherwise, shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME A17.l, handicap accessibility, Americans with Disabilities Act, and other codes having legal jurisdiction. ANSI/ASME A17.1 shall govern, except where codes having legal jurisdiction include more rigid requirements or conflict with ANSI/ASME Al 7.1. Elevator shall follow design and manufacturing procedures certified in accordance with ISO 9001-2000 to meet product and service requirements for quality assurance for new products. C. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct preinstallation meeting at Project site before start of installation of elevator. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including Contractor, Owner, and elevator manufacturer/installer. Review examination, installation, field quality control, adjusting, cleaning, protection, and coordination with other work. 142423 - 216 OF 220 10/10/2022 J. APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.5 DELIVERY, STORGE, AND HANDLING Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer/installer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer/installer. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage. Project Conditions: 1. Temporary Electricity: Owner will arrange for temporary 3-phase electricity to be available for installation of elevator components. Comply with Section 015000. 2. Temporary Use of Elevator: Owner will negotiate with manufacturer/installer for temporary use of elevator, if required. Temporary use of elevator shall be in accordance with terms and conditions of manufacturer/installer's temporary acceptance form. 1.6 SCHEUDLING A. Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades, for proper timing and sequence to avoid construction delays. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer/installer shall guarantee materials and workmanship of equipment installed under this Section. Defects not due to ordinary use or to improper use, which may develop within 1 year after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE Elevator maintenance service shall be performed by elevator manufacturer/installer. Elevators shall receive regular maintenance on each unit for period of 12 months after completion of work specified herein or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. Trained employees shall make periodic examinations and perform work including necessary adjusting, greasing, oiling, and replacing parts to keep elevators in operation, except parts that require replacement because of accidents, vandalism, misuse, or negligence by parties other than manufacturer/installer. Manufacturer/installer shall perform all work, except emergency minor adjustment call-back service during regular working hours. Should Owner request that examinations, cleaning, lubrication, adjustments, repairs, replacements, or emergency minor adjustment call-back service, unless specified herein, be performed on other than manufacturer/installer's regular working hours of regular working days, manufacturer/installer shall absorb straight-time labor charges and Owner will compensate manufacturer/installer for overtime premium, travel time, and expense at normal billing rates. 1.9 MANUFACTURER/INSTALLER Schindler Elevator Corporation (Morristown, NJ; 973-397-6028). Approve Alternate: Otis. 142423 -216 OF 220 10/10/2022 1 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.10 ELEVATOR SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS A. Hydraulic Passenger Elevators: Model 330A. B. Elevator Equipment Summary: Application: 330A Holeless Dual Jack. Service: General purpose passenger. Quantity: As represented on drawings. Capacity: 4000 pounds. Speed: 100 feet per minute. Travel: 19 feet 8 inches. [Edit per project.] Front Openings: 2. [Edit per project.] Operation: Microprocessor single car automatic operation. 9 Machine Room: Remote from elevator hoistway. Cab Type: 115-Cab with solid walls. Platform Size: 8-0" wide x 6-3" deep. [Edit per project.] Door Type: Single speed center opening. Cab Height: 8-0". Guide Rails: Equivalent to 16 LB. per foot. [Edit per project] Hoistway Entrances: 4'-0" wide x 7-0" high doors. 13. Power Supply: 208 volts 3 phase 60 Hz. C. Elevator Components: Anti-stall feature. Grade 2 braille and audible signals. 3.. Door open and close stall protection. Emergency lighting. Firefighter's service. Independent service feature. Infrared light curtain door protection. Low oil return. Overload sensors. Phase protection. Soft start electronic starting. Locking service panel in car operating panel. Pressure switch. Telephone (accessibility compliant). 1.11 ELEVATOR MATERIALS A. Finish: Stainless Steel: #4 brushed finish. Exposed Aluminum Frames in Suspended Ceilings: Anodized. B. UL Approved: Motors, pumps, valves, fluid tank, hydraulic fluid, microprocessor controller, controls, pushbuttons, and wiring. C. Spring Buffer, Attachment Brackets, and Anchors: Design and size according to building code with safety factors. D. Pump: Positive displacement screw type, design for steady discharge with minimal pulsations. E. Muffler: Reduce noise transmission. F. Telescopic Holeless Jack System: Jack Cylinder: Two jacks, one located at each side of the car and mounted to the elevator car structure. 142423 -217 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 2. Synchronization of Jack Stages: Direct mechanical means to ensure elevator moves at steady speed and provides smooth ride. 1.12 ELEVATOR CABS A. Height: 8-0" from finished floor to underside of canopy. B. Elevator Car Enclosure Wall Sections: [Edit per project] C. Base, Frieze, and Reveals: #4 stainless steel. D. Ceiling: 5C08 stainless steel #4. Suspended with concealed frame finished in #4 stainless steel. Lighting: Nine compact fluorescent downlights with trim rings and protective screens. E. Cab Returns: Integral construction. 1. Finish: #4 stainless steel. F. Transoms: Run full width of cab. Finish: #4 stainless steel. G. Cab Doors: Flush design both sides. Rib construction. Finish: #4 stainless steel. H. Exhaust Fan: Single speed. Mount in cab transom or canopy. I. Handrails: 1/2 inch by 2 inch, flat. Mount on side walls at 2'-8" AFF to center of rail. Finish: #4 stainless steel. J. Crash Rails: 1/2 inch by 2 inch, flat. Mount on side and rear walls at 4" AFF to center of rail. Finish: #4 stainless steel. K. Threshold: Aluminum. L. Cab Finish Flooring: As indicated in drawings. M. Platform Recess: 3/4 inch. 1.13 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. Hoistway Doors and Frames: UL rated with required fire rating. Doors: Rigid flush panel construction with sound-deadening material. Frames: Securely fasten at corners to form unit frame. Frames shall be bolted. B. Exposed Areas of Corridor Frames: Baked enamel primer on all floors. C. Doors: Baked enamel primer on all floors. D. Sills: Aluminum on all floors. 142423 -218 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS 1.14 CAB FIXTURES A. Main Car Operating Panel: Type: Vandal resistance. Finish: #4 stainless steel. Mount in return. Comply with accessibility requirements. Include pushbuttons and illuminating indications for each floor served. Emergency Buttons and Switches: Provide in accordance with code and Architectural details. Switches for car light and accessories. Confirm floor callouts and button configuration with Apple Development person prior to order placement. B. Other Fixtures: Digital car position indicator. Locking service panel in car operating panel. Telephone (accessibility compliant). 1.15 HALL FIXTURES A. Pushbutton Fixture: I Type: Vandal resistant. 2 Finish: #4 stainless steel. 3 Up button and down button at intermediate floors. 4 Single button at each terminal floor. Height: Comply with accessibility requirements. Confirm floor callouts and button configuration with Apple Development person prior to order placement. 1.16 EXAMINATION AND INSTALLATION A. Examination: Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms before starting elevator installation. Verify hoistway, pit, machine room, and openings are of correct size, within tolerances, and are ready for work of this Section. Verify walls and sill supports are plumb, where openings occur. Verify hoistway is clear and plumb, with maximum variation of 1/2 inch at any point. Verify minimum 2-hour fire resistance rating of hatch walls. Notify Architect in writing of dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to proper installation or performance of elevators. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to manufacturer/installer. 1.17 INSTALLATION AND FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Installation: Install elevator by elevator manufacturer. Install elevators in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions and ANSI/ASME A17.1. Set entrances in vertical alignment with car openings, and aligned with plumb hoistway lines. B. Field Quality Control: Perform tests of elevator as required by ANSI/ASME A17.1 and governing codes. 1.18 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust elevator for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions. 142423 - 219 OF 220 10/10/2022 APPLE FORUM AT CARLSBAD 1923 CALLE BARCELONA CARLSBAD, CA 92009 BULLETIN 9.2 SPECIFICATIONS Adjust elevator for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort. Adjust doors to prevent opening of doors at landing on corridor side, unless car is at rest at that landing, or is in leveling zone and stopping at that landing. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to within 1/4 inch of landing. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer/installers instructions and as approved by Apple project representative. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Apple project representative. Clean elevator promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. Protect installed elevators from damage during construction. END OF SECTION 142423 END OF DIVISION 14 142423 - 220 OF 220 10/10/2022 Inland, Air Balance, Inc. Air & Hydronic System Testing and Balancing 465 Borrego Court, Suite C San Dimas, CA 91773 Phone: (909) 305-4881 Lic # 837772 www.lnlandairbalance.com Test & Balance Report Project Name: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad Address: 1925 Calle Barcelona, Carlsbad, CA 92009 Job Number: 2208-19 Technician: D. Jones, A. Nash Contractor: Christian Brothers Date: 10/05/2023 Afl R. JONES 12131124 ic WARRANTY INFORMATION: THE DATA PRESENTED IN THIS REPORT IS A RECORD OF SYSTEM MEASUREMENTS AND FINAL ADJUSTMENTS THAT HAVE BEEN OBTAINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CURRENT EDITION OF THE NEBB, PROCEDURAL STANDARDS FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF ENVIROMENTAL SYSTEMS. THE MEASURMENTS SHOWN, AND THE INFORMATION GIVEN, IN THIS REPORT ARE CERTIFIED TO BE ACCURATE AND COMPETE, AT THE TIME AND DATE INFORMATION WAS GATHERED. ANY VARIANCES FROM DESIGN QUANTITIES, WHICH EXCEED NEBB TOLERANCES, ARE NOTED IN THE TEST - ADJUST - BALANCE REPORT PROJECT SUMMARY. drr~_~ Inland Air Balance, Inc. Air & Hydronic System Testing and Balancing Instrumentation: Instrument Manufacturer Model No. Serial No. Calibration Due Balancing Hood Evergreen Telem, CH-15D 2300106 1/18/2024 Air Temperature W/ Probe Fluke 51 Series 32730261WS 3/6/2024 Immersion Temperature W/ Probe Fluke 51 Series 32730261W5 3/6/2024 Voltage-Amperage Meter Fluke 335 88303077 3/6/2024 Hydronic Pressure Evergreen Telem. S-DP-250 2300111 2/2/2024 Hydronic Differential Pressure Evergreen Telém. S-DP-250 2300111 2/2/2024 Humidity Extech RH390 150628696 3/6/2024 Air Temperature/Pressure/Velocity Evergreen Telem. S-PVF-1 2300145A 1/30/2024 Non-Contact Tachometer Tach Cal MT-200 B2293301 OP 3/6/2024 Abbreviation Index AK Free Area Factor HZ Hertz BHP Brake Horse Power LAT Leaving Air Temperature CD Ceiling Diffuser LSD Linear Slot Diffuser CFM Cubic Feet per Minute LWT Leaving Water Temperature CHWR Chilled Water Return MAT Mixed Air Temperature CHWS Chilled Water Supply N/A Not Accessible CSD Ceiling Supply Diffuser N/I Not Installed CSG Ceiling Supply Grille NIL Not Listed CWR Condensor Water Return N/S Not Shown CWS Condensor Water Supply NVL No Valid Location DA Direct Acting OSA Outside Air DNA Data Not Available R.A Reverse Acting DT Duct Traverse RA Return Air EA Exhaust Air RG Return Grill EAT Entering Air Temperature RPM Revolutions per Minute EG Exhaust Grill SA Supply Air ESP External Static Pressure SP Static Pressure EWT Entering Water Temperature SWG Sidewall Diffuser FFU Fan Filter Unit TBD To Be Determined FLA Full Load Amps TSP Total Static Pressure FPM Feet per Minute T-STAT Thermostat OF Grease Filter UTR Unable to Read HEPA High Efficiency Particulate Air V Volts HP Horse Power VAV Variable Air Volume HWR Hot Water Return VP Velocity Pressure HWS Hot Water Supply Inland Air Balance, Inc. AW & Hydmoic System Testing a,,d aalench,g Table Of Contents PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad DATE: 10/5/2023 LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA CONTACT: David Jones PROJECT #: 2208-19 Table Of Contents I Field Note Report Summary.....................................................................................................................................1 2 Roof Top Unit...........................................................................................................................................................2 2.1 RTU-01 ............................................................................................................................................................... 2 2.2 RTU-02 ............................................................................................................................................................... 3 3 Fan Unit....................................................................................................................................................................4 3.1 ERV-01 ............................................................................................................................................................... 4 3.2ERV-02 ...................................................................................................... ......................................................... 6 4 Fan Coil....................................................................................................................................................................8 4.1 FCU-01 ..... .......................................................................................................................... ................................ 8 4.2 FCU-02 ...................................................................................................... ......................... ................................ 9 4.3 FCU-03 ...................................................................................................... ......................................................... 10 4.4 FCU-04 ............................................................................................................................................................... 12 4.5 FCU-05 ...................................................................................................... . ........................................................ 14 4.6 FCU-06 ............................................................................................................................................................... 16 4.7 FCU-07 ............................................................................................................................................................... 18 4.8 FCU-08 ............................................................................................................................................................... 20 5 Apple Store Forum Carlsbad Coded Drawing.pdf....................................................................................................22 6 Instrument Certifications. pdf .................................................................................................................................... 24 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Inland Air Balance. Inc. Air & Hnimnic System Testing and Balancing Field Note Report Summary PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad DATE: 10/5/2023 LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA CONTACT: David Jones PROJECT #: 2208-19 Test System I Unit Name Date Contact Notes / Logs Fan Coil FCU-01 4-Oct-23 Aaron Nash The SA total CFM was determined by the sum of OSA and RA as the SA air diffusers provides no valid location to perform accurate reading. Fan Coil FCU-02 4-Oct-23 Aaron Nash The SA total CFM was determined by the sum of OSA and RA as the SA air diffusers provides no valid location to perform accurate reading. Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 1 of 32 Inland Air Balance. Inc. Al & Mydmnfc System Testleg a,,d Beiar,ch,g Roof Top Unit PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: RTU-01 AREA: Sales Front Unit Data Unit Type RTU Service In-Service Unit Manufacturer Carrier Unit Model Number 48LCD014D2P5AAP4C0 Unit Serial Number 1923P23036 Unit Discharge Vertical RTU-011SF Filter Bank Filter Manufacturer Glassfloss Filter Type Pleated Design MERV Rating NS Actual MERV Rating 8 Filter Qty -S1 4 Filter Size - Si 20x25x2 Test Data RTU-01!SuoDIv Fan Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM 577 RPM Motor Operating HZ/Speed 44 Hz Motor Volts T1-T2 208 Volts Motor Volts T2-T3 209 Volts Motor Volts T1-T3 208 Volts Motor Amps Ti 6.50 Amps Motor Amps T2 6.60 Amps Motor Amps T3 6.50 Amps H Test Data Design Actual Supply Airflow 4435 CFM 4538 CFM Outside Air Airflow 1755 CFM 1841 CFM Return Airflow NS CFM 2697 CFM DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/5/2023 Motor Data Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Marathon Nameplate Motor Frame 145TZ Nameplate Motor FL Amps 13.60 Amps Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.15 Brake Horsepower 2.28 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Motor Data RTU-01/Suoolv Fan Design Nameolate Motor Voltage 208-230 Volts Motor RPM 1745 RPM Motor Phase 3 Sheave Data RTU-01/Suoolv Fan Sheave Position 10% closed Number of Belts 1 Belt Size BX46 Sheave Center Line Distance 12 1/2 in. Sheave Data RTU-01/Suooly Fan Moto En Sheave Diameter 47/8 in. BK100 in. Sheave Bore 3/4 in. 1 3/16 in. Test Pressures Design External SP NS in. wc Actual External SP 0.55 in. wc Suction SP 0.31 in. wc Discharge SP 0.24 in. wc RTU-01 Outside Air Intake Summary System/Unit Outlet Type Size LxW! D Instrument AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final I % Final Velocity OS-01 FILTER 57x23.5 Velgrid 9.30 198 1755 1 1 1841 1 105 Totals: - - - - - 1755 0 1841 105 E!Ed Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 2 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Al, & Hytimnic System Testing and Balancing Roof Top Unit PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: RTU-02 AREA: Sales Back - Unit Data Unit Type RTU Service In-Service Unit Manufacturer Carrier Unit Model Number 48LC0017D3P5AAP4C0 Unit Serial Number 2123P23528 Unit Discharge Vertical RTU-021SF Filter Bank Filter Manufacturer Glassfloss Filter Type Pleated Design MERV Rating NS Actual MERV Rating 8 Filter Qty - 51 9 Filter Size - 51 16x25x2 Test Data RTU-02I8uoolv Fan Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM 908 RPM Motor Operating HZ/Speed 60 Hz Motor Volts T1-T2 209 Volts Motor Volts T2-13 207 Volts Motor Volts T1 J3 208 Volts Motor Amps TI 13.50 Amps Motor Amps T2 13.70 Amps Motor Amps T3 13.50 Amps Test Data Design Actual Supply Airflow 6600 CFM 6659 CFM Outside Air Airflow 675 CFM 707 CFM Return Airflow NS CFM 5952 CFM DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/5/2023 Motor Data - RTU-02/Supplv Fan Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Marathon Nameplate Motor Frame 213T Nameplate Motor FL Amps 19.80 Amps Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.15 Brake Horsepower 4.72 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Motor Data RTU-02/Suoolv Fan Motor HP Design Nameplate 71/2 HP Motor Voltage 208-230 Volts Motor RPM 1765 RPM Motor Phase 3 Sheave Data RTU-02/SupDlv Fan Number of Belts Belt Size BX49 Sheave Center Line Distance 11.00 in. Sheave Data RTU-02/Suonly Fan M2QE En Sheave Diameter 73/8 in. BK120 in. Sheave Bore 7/8 in. 1 3/16 in. Test Pressures Design External SP NS in. wc Actual External SP 0.64 in. wc Suction SP 0.28 in. wc Discharge SP 0.36 in. wc RTU-02 Outside Air Intake Summary [,System/Unit Outlet Type Size LxWI D Instrument I AK Factor I Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM ,1,9/o Final % Final Velocity F OS-01 FILTER 57x23.5 Velgrid 9.30 76 675 1 1 707 105 105 [ Totals: - - - - - 675 1 0 1 707 105 - Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 3 of 32 Inland Air Balance. Inc. Al, & Hydm(c Syntam TesVnQ and 8810nc109 Fan Unit PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: ERV-01 AREA: RR Unit Data Unit Manufacturer Greenheck Unit Model Number ECV-10L-VG-F Unit Serial Number 21630054 Test Data Motor Operating HZ/Speed Supply 55% I Exhausts 65% Motor Volts T1-T2 209 Volts Motor Amps Ti 1.62 Amps DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/5/2023 Motor Data Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Broad Ocean Nameplate Motor Frame Direct Drive Nameplate Motor HP 1/2 HP Nameplate Motor Rated Volts 208 Volts Nameplate Motor RPM Variable RPM Nameplate Motor FL Amps 3.80 Amps Nameplate Motor Phase 1 Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.00 Brake Horsepower 0.33 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Sheave Data Number of Belts 0 Belt Size Direct Drive Sheave Center Line Distance Direct Drive in. Sheave Data Moto En Sheave Diameter Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Sheave Bore Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Test Pressures Design External SP NS in. wc Actual External SP 0.17 in. wc Actual Suction SP 0.15 in. wc Actual Discharge SP 0.02 in. wc Test Results Design Airflow 375 CFM Actual Arfiow 390 CFM Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM NVL RPM ERV-01 Exhaust Inlet Summary System/Unit Area Served Inlet Type Size LxW D AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM. Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final % Final Velocity Inlet-01 RR EG 12x12 1.00 * 100 107 107 Inlet-02 RR EG 12x12 1.00 * 100 101 101 Inlet-03 Repair EG 2406 1.00 120 114 95 Totals 32O 0 322 101 - Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 4 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Air B Hydmaic System Toslfrtg and Balancing Fan Unit PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 ERV-01 Outside Air Intake Summary DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxWI D Instrument AK 1 Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final OS-01 Unit DUCT 10 Airfoil 0.55 709 375 390 104 Totals 375 0 390 1 104 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 5 of 32 Inland Air Balance. Inc. Air & H d,on,c System Teslini, and Balancing Fan Unit PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: ERV-02 AREA: RR Unit Data Unit Manufacturer Greenheck Unit Model Number ECV-10L-VG-F Unit Serial Number 21630055 Test Data Motor Operating HZ/Speed Supply 50% / Exhausts 45% Motor Volts T1-T2 208 Volts Motor Amps TI 1.30 Amps DATE: 13/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/4/2023 Motor Data Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Broad Ocean Nameplate Motor Frame Direct Drive Nameplate Motor HP 1/2 HP Nameplate Motor Rated Volts 208 Volts Nameplate Motor RPM Variable RPM Nameplate Motor FL Amps 3.80 Amps Nameplate Motor Phase 1 Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.00 Brake Horsepower 0.26 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Sheave Data Number of Belts 0 Belt Size Direct Drive Sheave Center Line Distance Direct Drive in. Sheave Data Moto En Sheave Diameter Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Sheave Bore Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Test Pressures Design External SP NS in. wc Actual External SP 0.17 in. wc Actual Suction SP 0.15 in. wc Actual Discharge SP 0.02 in. wc Test Results Design Airflow 390 CFM Actual Airflow 415 CFM Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM NVL RPM ERV-02 Exhaust Inlet Summary System/Unit Area Served Inlet Type Size LAN I D AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final % Final Velocity Inlet-01 RR EG 12x12 1.00 * 150 144 96 Inlet-02 RR EG 12x12 1.00 * 150 155 103 'Totals: - - - 300 0 299 100 - Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 6 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. AirS Hydenic System Testing and Be.inncl,,g Fan Unit PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 ERV-02 Outside Air Intake Summary DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I D Instrument AK I Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final OS-01 Unit DUCT 12 Airfoil 1 0.78 532 390 415 106 Totals 390 0 415 106 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 7 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Air & Sytum Tes11g and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: Cavid Jones SYSTEM/UNIT: FCU-01 Tested By: Aaron Nash AREA: Stock Date: 10/5/2023 Unit Data Unit Manufacturer 7oshiba Carrier Unit Model Number MMU-AP0124HPUL L Unit Serial Number NS Test Data Design Airflow 460 CFM Actual Airflow 450 CFM Design OSA 65 CFM Actual OSA 69 CFM FCU-01 10/4/2023 Aaron Nash The SA total CFM was determined by the sum of OSA and RA as the SA air diffusers provides no valid location to perform accurate reading. FCU-01 Return Inlet Summary Systemlthiit Inlet Type Size LxW I D AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM %FinaI % Final Velocity inlet-01 RG 14x14 1.36 280 NS 381 0 +7= Totals 0 0 381 FCU-01 Outside Air Intake Summary Systemlunit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I D Instrument AK I Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final OS-01 Unit DUCT 6 Airfoil 0.20 344 65 69 106 Totals: - - - 65 0 69 106 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 8 of 32 Log: Inland AIr Balance. Inc. Air & Mydmnic System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad DATE: 10/5/2023 LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA CONTACT: David Jones PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: FCU-02 Tested By: Aaron Nash AREA: Stock Date: 10/4/2023 Unit Data Unit Manufacturer Toshiba Carrier Unit Model Number MMU-AP0124HPUL Unit Serial Number NS Test Data Design Airflow 460 CFM Actual Airflow 447 CFM Design OSA 65 CFM Actual OSA 70 CFM FCU-02 10/4/2023 Aaron Nash The SA total CFM was determined by the sum of OSA and RA as the SA air diffusers provides no valid location to perform accurate reading. FCU-02 Return Inlet Summary System/Unit Inlet Type Size LxW/ D AK Factor Final PPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final % Final Velocity Inlet-01 RG 14x14 1.36 277 NS 377 Totals 0 0 377 0 FCU-02 Outside Air Intake Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I D Instrument AK I Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM 0/6-Final OS-Cl Unit DUCT 6 Airfoil 0.20 348 65 70 108 Totals: - - - - - 65 0 70 108 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 9 of 32 Log: Inland Air Balance, Inc. AIr & Hydronk System Testing ems Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: FCU-03 AREA: Manager Unit Data Unit Manufacturer Toshiba Carrier Unit Model Number MMD-UP0121BHP-UL Unit Serial Number 32200062 Test Data Design Airflow 450 CFM Actual Airflow 444 CFM Design OSA 155 CFM Actual OSA 157 CFM FCU-03ISuDDIv Fan Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM NVL RPM Motor Operating HZ/Speed Medium Hz Motor Volts T1-T2 209 Volts Motor Amps Ti 0.90 Amps DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/5/2023 Motor Data Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Toshiba Nameplate Motor Frame Direct Drive Nameplate Motor FL Amps 1.53 Amps Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.00 Brake Horsepower 0.18 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Motor Data FCU-03ISuDplv Fan Design Nameolate Motor HP 150 Watts Motor Voltage 208-230 Volts Motor RPM Variable RPM Motor Phase 1 Sheave Data FCU-03/SuDpIv Fan Number of Belts 0 Belt Size Direct Drive Sheave Center Line Distance Direct Drive in. Sheave Data FCU-03/SunIv Fan Moto En Sheave Diameter Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Sheave Bore Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Test Pressures Design Total SP NS in. wc Actual Total SP 0.22 in. wc Suction SP 0.12 in. wc Discharge SP 0.10 in. wc FCU-03 Supply Outlet Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW/ 0 AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final Outlet-01 Manager CD 2408 1.00 * 200 191 96 Outlet-02 Hall CD 2410 1.00 * 250 253 101 Totals: - - - 450 0 444 99 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 10 of 32 ~Air;ia;l~eince, Inc. Air & Hydmn!e System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 FCU-03 Return Inlet Summary DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones System/Unit Area Served Inlet Type __ Size LxWI D AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final % Final Velocity Inlet-01 Manager Office RG 2408 1.00 * NS 162 Inlet-02 Stock RG 10x6 1.00 * NS 77 Totals 0 0 239 0 FCU-03 Outside Air Intake Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW! D Instrument AK I Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final OS-01 Unit DUCT 6 Airfoil 0.20 783 155 157 101 Totals: - - - - - 155 0 157 101 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 11 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Air & Hydmnfc System Testing and 8alancfrg Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: FCU-04 AREA: Repair Unit Data Unit Manufacturer Toshiba Carrier Unit Model Number MMD-UP0361BHP-UL Unit Serial Number 32400003 Test Data Design Airflow 900 CFM Actual Airflow 905 CFM Design OSA 90 CFM Actual OSA 94 CFM FCU-04/SuoIv Fan Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM NVL RPM Motor Operating HZ/Speed Low Hz Motor Volts T1-T2 208 Volts Motor Amps Ti 1.40 Amps DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/5/2023 Motor Data Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Toshiba Nameplate Motor Frame Direct Drive Nameplate Motor FL Amps 2.71 Amps Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.00 Brake Horsepower 0.28 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Motor Data FCU-04!Suonlv Fan Design NameDlate Motor HP 250 Watts Motor Voltage 208-230 Volts Motor RPM Variable RPM Motor Phase 1 Sheave Data FCU-04/Suoplv Fan Number of Belts 0 Belt Size Direct Drive Sheave Center Line Distance Direct Drive in. Sheave Data FCU-04ISuoIv Fan MQQI: En Sheave Diameter Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Sheave Bore Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Test Pressures Design Total SP NS in. wc Actual Total SP 0.13 in. wc Suction SP 0.05 in. wc Discharge SP 0.08 in. wc FCU-04 Supply Outlet Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I D -ir Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final Outlet-01 Repair CD 2410 1.00 * 300 284 95 Outlet-02 Repair CD 2410 1.00 * 300 308 103 Outlet-03 Repair CD 2410 1.00 * 300 313 104 Totals: - - - 900 0 905 101 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 12 of 32 Inland Airialance, Inc. Air & Hydmnlc System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 FCU-04 Return Inlet Summary DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones System/Unit Area Served Inlet Type __ Size LxW I 0 AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM I Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final % Final Velocity Inlet-01 Repair SO. 14x10 0.97 776 NS 753 Totals 0 0 753 0 FCU-04 Outside Air Intake Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW! D Instrument AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final OS-01 Unit DUCT 6 Airfoil 0.20 472 90 94 104 Totals: 1 - - -__- - 90 0 94 104 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 13 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Al, & Ilydmnlc System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT : 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: FCU-05 AREA: People Unit Data:, Unit Manufacturer Toshiba Carrier Unit Model Number MMD-UP0071BHP-UL L Unit Serial Number 32100016 Test Data, Design Airflow 220 CFM Actual Airflow 236 CFM Design OSA 30 CFM Actual DSA 32 CFM FCU-05/Suoelv Fan Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual an RPM NVL RPM Motor Operating HZ/Speed Low speed Hz Motor Volts T1-T2 208 Volts Motor Amps Ti 0.30 Amps DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/4/2023 Motor Data FCU-05/SupDlv Fan Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Toshiba Nameplate Motor Frame Direct Drive Nameplate Motor FL Amps 0.73 Amps Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.00 Brake Horsepower 0.06 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Motor Data FCU-05lSupply Fan Design Namenlate Motor HP 150 watts Motor Voltage 208-230 Volts Motor RPM Variable RPM Motor Phase 1 Sheave Data FCU-05/Sunplv Fan Number of Belts 0 Belt Size Direct Drive Sheave Center Line Distance Direct Drive in. Sheave Data FCU-05/Sunolv Fan IQr En Sheave Diameter Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Sheave Bore Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Test Pressures Design Total SP NS in. wc Actual Total SP 0.15 in. wc Suction SP 0.02 in. wc Discharge SP 0.13 in. wc FCU-05 Supply Outlet Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I 0 AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final Outlet-01 People CD 2408 1.00 * 220 236 107 Totals: - - - 220 0 236 107 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 14 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Al, & Hydmnlc System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 FCU-05 Return Inlet Summary DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones System/Unit Area Served inlet Type Size LxW I D AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM I I % Final % Final Velocity Inlet-01 People Room S.O. 14x6 0.58 309 NS 1 179 Totals: - - - - 0 0 1 179 1 0 - FCU-05 Outside Air Intake Summary F SystemlUnit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxWI D Instrument AK I Factor Final FPM Design I CFM I Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final L OS-01 Unit DUCT 6 Airfoil 0.20 163 30 33 110 Totals: - - - _- - 30 0 33 110 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 15 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Air & Hydmnts System Testing and 8alanclhg Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad DATE: 10/5/2023 LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA CONTACT: David Jones PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: FCU-06 AREA: Business Unit Data Unit Manufacturer Toshiba Carrier Unit Model Number MMD-UP0121BHP-UL Unit Serial Number 32200064 Test Data Design Airflow 270 CFM Actual Airflow 275 CFM Design OSA 60 CFM Actual OSA 63 CFM FCU-06ISuDolv Fan Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM NVL RPM Motor Operating HZ/Speed Low Hz Motor Volts T1-12 208 Volts Motor Amps Ti 0.90 Amps Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/4/2023 Motor Data Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Toshiba Nameplate Motor Frame Direct Drive Nameplate Motor FL Amps 1.53 Amps Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.00 Brake Horsepower 0.18 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Motor Data FCU-06/Sun12lv Fan Design Nameplate Motor HP 150 Watts Motor Voltage 208-230 Volt Motor RPM Variable RPM Motor Phase 1 Sheave Data FCU-06ISuoolv Fan Number of Belts 0 Belt Size Direct Drive Sheave Center Line Distance Direct in. Sheave Data FCU-06lSuDgIv Fan Moto En Sheave Diameter Drive in. Direct Drive in. Sheave Bore Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Test Pressures Design Total SP NS in. wc Actual Total SP 0.18 in. wc Suction SP 0.04 in. wc Discharge SP 0.14 in. wc FCU-06 Supply Outlet Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Size LxW / AK Final Design Prelim Final CFM % Final Type D Factor FPM CFM CFM Outlet-01 Flex/Business CD 2408 1.00 * 135 133 99 Office Outlet-02 Flex/Business CD 2408 1.00 * 135 142 105 Office Totals: - - - - 270 0 1 275 1 102 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 16 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Air B Hydron/c System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 FCU-06 Return Inlet Summary DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones System/Unit Area Served Inlet Type Size LxW I AK Final Design Prelim Final CFM % Final % Final D Factor FPM CFM CFM Velocity Inlet-01 Flex/Business S.O. 14x10 0.97 188 NS 182 Office Totals: - - - 0 0 182 0 - FCU-06 Outside Air Intake Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW / D instrument AK I Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final OS-01 Unit DUCT 6 Airfoil 1 0.20 317 60 1 63 1 105 Totals: - - - - - 60 0 1 63 1 105 Inland Air Balance, Inc. ' Page 17 of 32 Inlanil $ir Balance, Inc. Air & Hydmnlc Systen, Tasting and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad DATE: 10/5/2023 LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA CONTACT: David Jones PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: FCU-07 AREA: Flex Unit Data Unit Manufacturer Toshiba Carrier Unit Model Number MMD-UP0121BHP-UL Unit Serial Number 32200063 Test Data Design Airflow 320 CFM Actual Airflow 339 CFM Design OSA 90 CFM Actual OSA 96 CFM FCU-07/SuDDIv Fan Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM NVL RPM Motor Operating HZ/Speed Low speed Hz Motor Volts T1-T2 209 Volts Motor Amps Ti 0.88 Amps Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/4/2023 Motor Data Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Toshiba Nameplate Motor Frame Direct Drive Nameplate Motor FL Amps 1.53 Amps Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.00 Brake Horsepower 0.18 BHP Nominal fficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Motor Data FCU-07/Suopfv Fan Design Nameølate Motor HP 150 Watts Motor Voltage 208-230 Volts Motor RPM Variable RPM Motor Phase 1 Sheave Data FCU-07lSupplv Fan Number of Belts 0 Belt Size Direct Drive Sheave Center Line Distance Direct Drive in. Sheave Data KU-07/Supply Fan Moto Eii Sheave Diameter Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Sheave Bore Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Test Pressures Design Total SP NS in. wc Actual Total SP 0.20 in. wc Suction SP 0.05 in. wc Discharge SP 0.15 in. wc FCU-07 Supply Outlet Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I 0 AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final Outlet-01 Remote bks CD 2408 1.00 * 160 172 108 Outlet-02 Remote bks CD 2408 1.00 * 160 167 104 Totals: - - - - 320 0,__ 339 106 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 18 of 32 Inlanil Air Balance. Inc. Air S Hyctmnic System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 FCU-07 Return Inlet Summary DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones System/Unit Area Served Inlet Type Size LxW I D AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM I Final CFM % Final I % Final Velocity Inlet-01 Open SO. 14x10 0.97 180 NS 1 175 Totals: - - - 0 0 1 175 1 0 - FCU-07 Outside Air Intake Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I D Instrument AK I Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final OS-01 Unit DUCT 6 Airfoil 0.20 478 90 1 96 107 Totals: - - - - - 90 0 1 96 107 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 19 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Air & llyds,nlc System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 SYSTEM/UNIT: FCU-08 AREA: Break Unit Data Unit Manufacturer Toshiba Carrier Unit Model Number MMD-UP0361BHP-UL Unit Serial Number 32400005 Test Data., Design Airflow 740 GEM Actual Airflow 778 GEM Design OSA 210 CFM Actual OSA 223 GEM FCU-08/Supplv Fan Design Fan RPM NS RPM Actual Fan RPM NVL RPM Motor Operating HZ/Speed Low Speed Hz Motor Volts T1-T2 209 Volts Motor Amps Ti 1.30 Amps DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones Tested By: Aaron Nash Date: 10/4/2023 Motor Data Nameplate Motor Manufacturer Toshiba Nameplate Motor Frame Direct Drive Nameplate Motor EL Amps 2.71 Amps Nameplate Motor Hertz 60 Hz Nameplate Motor Service Factor 1.00 Brake Horsepower 0.26 BHP Nominal Efficiency (0.00) 0.90% Motor Power Factor (0.00) 0.80 Motor Data FCU-08/Suoolv Fan Design Nameplate Motor HP 250 Watts Motor Voltage 208-230 Volts Motor RPM Variable RPM Motor Phase Sheave Data FCU-08ISuooIy Fan Number of Belts 0 Belt Size Direct Drive Sheave Center Line Distance Direct Drive in. Sheave Data 1CU-08/Supplv Fan Moto r Lan Sheave Diameter Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Sheave Bore Direct Drive Direct Drive in. in. Test Pressures Design Total SP NS in. we Actual Total SP 0.23 in. we Suction SP 0.05 in. we Discharge SP 0.18 in. we FCU-08 Supply Outlet Summary SystemlUnit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I D AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final Outlet-01 Break Area GD 8" RD 0.35 605 200 212 106 Outlet-02 Break Area LD 1Sx1"x24" 0.17 836 135 142 105 Outlet-03 Break Area LD 1Sx1"x24" 0.17 818 135 139 103 Outlet-04 Break Area LD 1Sx1"x24" 0.17 829 135 141 104 Outlet-05 Break Area LD 1Sx1"x24" 57 845 135 144 107 Totals 740 0 778 105 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 20 of 32 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Al, & Hydmnic System Testing and Balancing Fan Coil PROJECT: Apple Store Forum at Carlsbad LOCATION: Carlsbad, CA PROJECT #: 2208-19 FCU-08 Return Inlet Summary DATE: 10/5/2023 CONTACT: David Jones System/Unit Area Served Inlet Type Size LxW I D AK Factor Final FPM Design CFM Prelim CFM I Final CFM I % Final % Final Velocity Inlet-01 Break Area S.O. 14x10 0.97 514 NS 1 499 Totals: - - - - 0 0 1 499 1 0 FCU-08 Outside Air Intake Summary System/Unit Area Served Outlet Type Size LxW I D Instrument I AK Factor Final FPM I Design I CFM Prelim CFM Final CFM % Final OS-01 Unit DUCT 10 Airfoil 0.55 405 1 210 223 106 Totals: - - - - 210 0 223 106 Inland Air Balance, Inc. Page 21 of 32 Leucadia Wastewater District Vallecitos Water District 1960 La Costa Ave. 201 Vallecitos de Oro Carlsbad, CA 92009 San Marcos, CA 92069 (760) 753-0155 (760) 744-0460 The following project has been submitted for building permits: OCT 1j 2022 Ci U1LL Plan Check #: Permit #: CBC2022-0348 Property Owner: TREA N W FORUM AT CARLSBAD OWNER LLC Project Address: 1923 CALLE BARCELONA, #138 Assessor's Parcel #: 2550120400 Project Description: APPLE _INC: REMODEL EXISTING TENANT SPACE BACKSTAGE (5828 SF). City Certification: City of Carlsbad Building Division Date: October _07,2022 Please indIcate in the space below that the owner has entered into an agreement to have your agency provide public sewer service to the premises, and/or if the existing service is adequate for this project and all required conditions have been satisfied. Permits will not be issued until this form is completed and returned to our office. This space to be completed by District Personnel 1 certify the district requirements for sewer service have been satisfied. Approved by: Date: tO(\ FIELD SERVICES SPECIAUST COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT - Building Division 1635.:Faady.Ave Carlsbad, CA 9200-7314 442-339-27191 760-602-8560.f I buildin@carIsbadCa9Ov I www.caisbadcagov Hazardous Materials Questionnaire County of San Diego, Department of Environmental Health and Quality P0 Box 129261, San Diego, CA 92112-9261 \ 7 (858) 505-6700 (800) 253-9933 www.sdcdehq.org Record ID #: Not in System Plan Check #: DEH2022-HHMBP-01 2625 Business Name Business Contact - Telephone # Plan File # Apple, Inc. Jonathan Gornik (209) 404-9499 Project Address City State Zip Code APN # 1923 CALLE BARCELONA, SUITE# 128,138 CARLSBAD CA 92024 255-012-04-00 Applicant . Applicant E-Mail Applicant Telephone # Michelle Slayden michelle@gpan.com (310) 404-9499 The following questions represent the facility's activities, NOT the specific project description. PART I: FIRE DEPARTMENT -HAZARDOUS METRIALS DIVISION: OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION:(Not required for projects within the City of San Diego.) Indicate by selecting the item, whether your business will use, process, or store any of the following hazardous materials. If any of the items are selected, Applicant must contact the Fire Protection Agency with jurisdiction prior to plan submittal. Occupancy Rating: M Facility's Square Footage (including proposed project): 5828 O Explosive or Blasting Agents 0 Organic Peroxides 0 Water Reactives 0 Corrosives O Compressed Gases 0 Oxidizers 0 Cryogenics 0 Other Health Hazards O Flammable/Combustible Liquids 0 Pyrophorics 0 Highly Toxic or Toxic Materials 0 None of These O Flammable Solids 0 Unstable Reactives . 0 Radioactives PART II: SAN DIEGO COUNTY DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS DIVISION (HMDt:If the answer to any of the questions is yes, applicant must contact the County of San Diegc Hazardous Materials Division, in person at 5500 Overland Ave., Suite 110, San Diego, CA 92123, or by phone at(858) 505-6700 prior to issuance of a building permit. FEES ARE REQUIRED. Project Completion Date: 1/31/2023 YES NO 0 M Is your business listed on the reverse side of this form? (check all that apply). 0 M Will your business dispose of Hacardous Substances or Medical Waste in any amount? Will your business store or handle Hazardous Substances in quantities equal to or greater than 55 gallons, 500 pounds, or 200 cubic feet? 0 0 Will your business handle carcinogens or reproductive toxins in any quantity? 0 M Will your business use an existing, or install an underground storage tank? 0 M Will your business store or handle Regulated Substances (CalARP)? 0 IEI Will your business use or install a Hazardous Waste Tank System (Title 22, Article 10)? Will your business store petroleum in tanks or containers at your facility with a total storage capacity equal to or greater than 1,320 gallons? (California's Aboveground Petroleum Storage Act). CalARP Exempt CalARP Required CalARP Complete Review Date: PART Ill: SAN DIEGO COUNTY AIR POLLUTION CONTROL DISTRICT (APCD: If the answer to Question #1 is 'Yes' and the answer to Question #2 is 'No', the applicant must contact the APCD prior to the issuance of a building or demolition permit. If any answer to Questions #3, #4, or #5 is 'Yes', the applicant must contact the APCD prior to the issuance of a building or demolition permit. If the answer to Question #3 or #4 is 'Yes', the applicant may need to submit an asbestos notification form to the APCD at least 10 working days prior to commencing demolition or renovation (some residential projects maybe exempt from the notification requirements). Contact the APCD at 10124 Old Grove Road, San Diego, CA 92131 or telephone (858) 586-2600 for more information. YES NO M 0 Will any existing building materials be disturbed as part of this project? (If the answer is 'Yes', an asbestos survey may be required.) BI 0 Has a survey been performed todetermine the presence of asbestos containing materials? 0 M Will the project involve handling or disturbance of any asbestos containing materials? 0 M Will the project involve the remowal of any load supporting structural member? Will the subject facility or construction activities include operations or equipment that emit or are capable of emitting an air contaminant? (See the APCD factsheet at http://www.sdapcd.org/info/facts/permits.pdf 6• 0 9 (ANSWER ONLY IF QUESTION 5 IS 'YES') Will the subject facility be located within 1,000 feet of the outer boundary of a school (K through 12)? Search the California School Directory a: http://www.cde.ca.gov/re/sd/ for public and private schools or contact the appropriate school district. Briefly describe business activities: I Briefly describe proposed project: Retail of Electronics ITI to existing Apple Store. I declare under penalty of perjury that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the responses made herein are true and correct. M; Fees Acknowledged: Michelle Slayden 11/1/2022 Name of Owner or Authorized Agent . Date FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY FIRE DEPARTMENT OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION: BY: DATE: EXEMPT OR NO FURTHER INFORMATION RELEASED FOR BUILDING PERMIT BUT NOT FOR RELEASED FOR OCCUPANCY REQUIRED OCCUPANCY COUNTY.HMD* APCD COUNTY-HMD APCD COUNTY-HMD APCD 111"N 3t4 ca- VIEW REVIEWED BY T. Yousif Lr M. Fregoso Stt.N,TIitc , 11/5/2022 11/22/2022 ' DATE •0(1 *A stamp in this box only exempts businesses from completing or updating a Hazardous Materials Business Plan. Other permitting requirements may still apply. DEHQ_HMD_HMBP_Questionnaire V 2.0 (8/2021) Printed on: 11/22/2022 @ 4:37 PM Development Services (`7city of CLIMATE ACTION PLAN Building Division Carlsbad CONSISTENCY CHECKLIST 1635 Faraday Avenue B-50 442-339-2719 www.carlsbadca.gov PURPOSE This checklist is intended to help building permit applicants identify which Climate Action Plan (CAP) ordinance requirements apply to their project. This completed checklist (B-50) must be included with the building permit application. The Carlsbad Municipal Code (CIVIC) can be referenced during completion of this document by clicking on the provided links to each municipal code section. NOTE: The following type of permits are not required to fill out this form . Patio •. Decks •. PME (w/o panel upgrade) •• Pool Consultation with a certified Energy Consultant is encouraged to assist in filling out this document. Appropriate certification includes, but is not limited to: Licensed, practicing Architect, Engineer, or Contractor familiar with Energy compliance, IECC/HERS Compliance Specialist, ICC G8 Energy Code Specialist, RESNET HERS rater certified, certified ICC Residential Energy Inspector/Plans Examiner, ICC Commercial Energy Inspector and/or Plans Examiner, ICC CALgreen Inspector/Plans Examiner, or Green Building Residential Plan Examiner. If an item in the checklist is deemed to be not applicable to a project, or is less than the minimum required by ordinance, check N/A and provide an explanation or code section describing the exception. Details on CAP ordinance requirements are available at each section by clicking on the municipal code link provided. The project plans must show all details as stated in the applicable Carlsbad Municipal Code (CIVIC) and/or Energy Code and Green Code sections. Application Information Project Name/Building BP No.Cczy2.2_OZ,Lfc' Permit No.: Apple Store Property Address/APN: 1923 Calle Barcelona Suite #'s 138, 128 / APN: 255-012-04-00 Applicant Name/Co.: Michelle Slayden / Glassman Planning Associates Applicant Address: 1111 Sartori Ave. Torrance CA 90501 Contact Phone: Contact Email: 310.781.8250 X3 michelle@gpan.com Contact information of person completing this checklist (if different than above): Name: Ellyse Crawford Contact Phone: 310.781.8250 X3 Company name/address: MBH / 960 Atlantic Ave, Alameda Contact Email: ellysec@mbharch.com Applicant Signature: 5'- Date: 9.19.22 .4 B-50 Page 1 of 7 Revised 05/22 Use the table below to determine which sections of the Ordinance checklist are applicable to your project. For alterations and additions to existing buildings, bttach a Permit Valuation breakdown on a separate sheet Building Permit Valuation (BPV) $ breakdn 2,275,000 Construction Type Complete Section(s) Notes: I A high-rise residential building is 4 or more stories, including a Residential Low-rise High-rise mixed-use building in which at least 20% of its conditioned floor area is residential use 0 New construction 2A*, 3A*, 4A*, 1B , 28, 3B,4A *Includes detached, newly constructed ADU 0 Additions and alterations: BPV < $60,000 N/A N/A All residential additions and alterations O BPV~ $60,000 1A 4A 4A 1-2 family dwellings and townhouses with attached garages O Electrical service panel upgrade only ' only. *Multifamily dwellings only where interior finishes are removed BPV> $200,000 1A, 4A* 1 B, 4A* and significant site work and upgrades to structural and mechanical, electrical, and/or plumbing systems are proposed } Nonresidential 0 New construction 1B, 213, 3B, 4B and 5 U Alterations: BPV ~t $200,000 or additions ~ 1,000 1B, 5 square feet BPV ~ $1,000,000 1B, 2B, 5 Building alterations of 75% existing gross floor area ~! 2,000 sq. ft. new roof addition 2B, 5 1 B also applies if BPV $200,000 Checklist Item Check the appropriate boxes, explain all not applicable and exception items, and provide supporting calculations and documentation as necessary. 1. Energy Efficiency Please refer to Carlsbad Municipal Code (CMC) 8.21 .155and 18.30.190and the California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen) for more information. Appropriate details and notes must be placed on the plans according to selections chosen in the design. A. [] Residential addition oralteration $60,000 building permitvaluation. 0 N/A___________________________ Details of selection chosen below mustbe placed onthe plans referencing CMC 0 Exception: Home energy score ~t 7 18.30.190. (attach certification) Year Built Single-family Requirements Multi-family Requirements 0 Before 1978 Select one option: 0 Ductsealing E] Attic insulation 0 Cool roof 0 Attic insulation 0 1978 andlater Select one option: 0 Lighting package 0 Water heating Package 0 Between 1978 and 1991 Select one option: O Ductsealing o Attic insulation 0 Cool roof 0 1992 and later Select one option: 0 Lighting package fl Water heating package Updated 4/16/2021 B. E Nonresidential* new construction or alterations? $200,000 building permit valuation, or additions? 1,000squarefeet. See MC 18.21 .155and CALGreen AppendixA5 0 N/A A5.203.1.1 Choose one: 0.1 Outdoor lighting 0.2 Restaurant service water heating (CEC 140.5) 0 .3 Warehouse dock seal doors. 0.4 Daylightdesign PAFs 0.5 Exhaust air heat recovery • N/A A5.203.1.2.1 Choose one: 0 .95 Energy budget (Projects with indoor lighting OR mechanical) I .90 Energy budget (Projects with indoorlightingAND mechanical) o N/A A5.211.1** 0 On-site renewable energy: O N/A A5.211.3 OGreen power (If offered by local utility provider, 50% minimum renewable sources) O N/A A5.212.1 0 Elevators and escalators: (Projectwith more than one elevatoror two escalators) O N/A___________________ A5.213.1 0 Steel framing: (Provide detailson plans for options 1-4 chosen) O N/A___________________ * Includes hotels/motels and high-rise residential buildings **Foralterabons~ $1, 000,000 BPVand affect ng > 75% existing grossfloorarea, ORalterationsthatadd2,000squarefeetof new roof addition: comply with CMC 18.30.130 (section 2B below) instead. 2. Photovoltaic Systems Residential new construction (for low-rise residential building permit applications submitted after 1/1/20). Refer to 2019 California Energy Code section 150.1(c)14 for requirements. If project includes installation of an electric heat pump water heater pursuant to CAP section 3B below(low-rise residential Water Heating), increase system size by .3kWdc if PVoffset option is selected. Floor Plan ID (use additional sheets if necessary) CFA #d. u. Calculated kWdc* Exception 0 0 0 Total System Size: kWdc kWdc = (CFAx.572) / 1,000 + (1.15 x #d.u.) *Formula calculation where CFA = conditional floor area, #du = number of dwellings per plan type If proposed system size is less than calculated size, please explain. I] Nonresidential new construction or alterations ?$1,000,000 BPV AND affecting ?75% existing floor area, OR addition that increases roof area by ?2,000 square feet Please refer to Pk 71k. when completing this section. *Note: This section also applies to high-rise residential and hotel/motel buildings. Choose one of the following methods: I Gross Floor Area (GFA) Method GFA: 5828 Mm. System Size: 5 kWdc lf< 10,000sf. Enter: 5 kWdc o lf~ 10,000sf. calculate: 15 kWdcx (GFAI10,000)** **Round building size factor to nearest tenth, and round system size to nearest whole number. Updated 4/16/2021 4 0 Time- Dependent Valuation Method Annual TDV Energy use:*** x.80= Mm. system size: kWdc ***Attach calculation documentation using modeling software approved by the California Energy Commission. 3. Water Heating A El Residential and hotel/motel new construction. Refer to MC 18.30.170 when completing this section. Provide complete details on the plans. O For systems serving individual dwelling units choose one system: El Heat pump water heater AND Compact hot water distribution AND Drain water heat recovery (low-rise residential only) __ El Heat pump water heater AND PV system .3 kWdc larger than required in MC 18.30.13 (high rise residential hotel/motel) or CA Energy Code section 150.1(c) 14 (low-rise residential) El Heat pump water heater meeting NEEA Advanced Water Heating Specification Tier 3 or higher Solar water heating system that is either .60 solar savings fraction or 40 s.f. solar collectors O Exception: El For systems serving multiple dwelling units, install a central water-heating system with ALL of thefollowing: Gas or propane water heating system El Recirculation system per 1C 18.30.150(B)1 (high-rise residential, hotel/motel) or[CMC 18.30.170(B)(low- rise residential) Solar water heating system that is either: 0 .20 solar savings fraction El .15 solar savings fraction, plus drain water heat recovery O Exception: B. El Nonresidential new construction. Refer to ÔMC 18.30.15ô when completing this section. Provide complete details on the plans. Water heating system derives at least 40% of its energy from one of the following (attach documentation): El Solar-thermal 0 Photovoltaics 0 Recovered energy Water heating system is (choose one): O Heat pump water heater El Electric resistance water heater(s) 0 Solar water heating system with .40 solar savings fraction 0 Exception: It may be necessary to supplement the completed checklist with supporting materials, calculations or certifications, to demonstrate full compliance with CAP ordinance requirements. For example, projects that propose or require a performance approach to comply with energy-related measures will need to attach to this checklist separate calculations and documentation as specified by the ordinances. Updated 4/16/21 5 4. Electric Vehicle Charqi A. Residential New construction and major alterations* Please refer to MC 18.21.140 when completing this section. 0 One and two-family residential dwelling or townhouse with attached garage: 0 One EVSE Ready parking space required 0 Exception: 0 Multi-family residential: 0 Exception: Total Parking Spaces Proposed EVSE Spaces EVSE (10% of total) Installed (50% of EVSE) Other "Ready" Other 'Capable' Calculations: Total EVSE spaces=.lox Total parking spaces proposed (rounded up to nearestwhole number) EVSE Installed = Total EVSE Spaces x .50 (rounded up to nearest whole number) EVSE other may be "Ready" or "Capable" *Major alterations are: (1)foroneand two-family dwellings and townhouses with attached garages, alterations havea building permit valuation 2:$60,000 or include an electrical service panel upgrade; (2) for multifamily dwellings (three units or more without attached garages), alterations have a building permit valuation ~ $200,000, interiorfinishes are removed and significant site work and upgradesto structural and mechanical, electrical, and/or plumbing systems are proposed. *AJ)J exceptions for EV Ready space (no EV ready space required Wien): The accessory dwelling unit is located within one-half mile of public transit. The accessory dwelling unit is located within an architecturally and historically significant historic district. The accessory dwelling unit is part of the proposed or existing primary residence or an accessory structure. When on-street parking permits are required but not offered to the occupant of the accessory dwelling unit. When there is a car share vehicle located within one block of the accessory dwelling unit. B. El Nonresidential new construction (includes hotels/motels) 0 Exception Please refer to çMC 18.21 .150 when completing this section Total Parking Spaces Proposed EVSE (10% of total) Installed (50% of EVSE) Other "Ready" Other "Capable" Calculation: Refer to the table below: Total Number of Parking Spaces provided Number of required EV Spaces Number of required EVSE Installed Spaces U 0-9 1 1 U 10-25 2 1 26-50 4 2 O 51-75 6 3 O 76-100 9 5 101-150 12 6 U 151-200 17 9 U 201 and over 10 percent of total 50 percent of Required EV Spaces Calculations: Total EVSE spaces=.l0xlotal parking spaces proposed (rounded upto nearestwhole number) EVSE listalled =Total EVSE Spaces x.50 (rounded up to nearest whole number) EVSE other may be "Ready" or "Capable" Updated 4/16/2021 6 5._ FE] Transportation Demand Management (TDM): Nonresidential ONLY An approved Transportation Demand Management (TDM) Plan is required for all nonresidential projects that meet a threshold of employee-generated ADT. Citystaff will use the table below based on yoursubmitted plans to determinewhetherornoryourperrnit rquiresaTDM plan. If TDM is applicable toyour permit, staff will contact the applicant to develop a site-specificlDM plan based on the permit details. Employee ADT Estimation for Various Commercial Uses Emp ADT for Emp ADTI Office (all)2 20 13 Restaurant 11 11 Retai13 8 4.5 Industrial 4 3.5 Manufacturing 4 3 Warehousing 4 1 1 Unless otherwise noted, rates estimated from ITE Trip Generation Manual, 10Edition 2For all office uses, use SANDAG rate of 20 ADT/1 000 sf to calculate employee ADT Retail uses include shopping center, variety store, supermarket, gyms, pharmacy, etc. Other commercial uses may be subject to special consideration Sample calculations: Office: 20,450 sf 1. 20,450 Sf/1000 x 20 = 409 Employee ADT Retail: 9,334 sf First 1,000 sf= 8 ADT 9,334 sf- 1,000 sf= 8,334 sf (8,334 sf/1,000 x 4.5) + 8 = 46 Employee ADT Acknowledgment: I acknowledge that the plans submitted may be subject to the City of Cartsbad's Transportation Demand Management Ordinance. I agree to be contacted should my permit require a TDM plan and understand that an approved TDM plan is a condition of permit issuance. ApplicantSignature:7A& 3'z- Date: 9.19.22 Person other than Applicant to be contacted for TDM compliance (if applicable): Name(Pnnted): El lyse Crawford Phone Number '' -974-3432 Email Address: ellysec@mbharch.com Updated 4/16/2021 7